0734net PDF

Drink Vending Machine
7600 series
Service Manual 75514800

August, 2007
© Copyright - All rights reserved
This manual is protected by a copyright. No part of this manual may be copied, reproduced, translated
or processed, copied or distributed by any form of electronic means without our prior written concent.
Wittenborg cannot take over any liability for errors and faults in manuals, brochures and other printed
matter, Wittenborg reserve the right to change their products without prior notice.
© Published by Wittenborg A/S, Odense, Denmark

August, 2007
Preface and Safety Instructions 1
Installation / Putting into Operation 2
Faults 3
Programming 4
Functions 5
Water System A
Brewing System B
Dosing system C
Product Delivery D
Cooling System F
Housing / Cabinet G
Power Supply Unit and Control K
External Options L
Payment Systems P
Preventive Maintenance 6
Service Procedures 7
Technical Information 8
Modification Instructions 9
Spare Parts List 10
© 2007 Wittenborg A/S, Odense, Denmark

Service Manual 7600 series Preface and safety instructions
Table of contents
Preface and safety instructions 1
Preface / How to use this manual 1.1
General 1.1.1
Structure of the manual 1.1.2
Definition of options and accessories 1.1.3
Safety instructions 1.2
Various safety instructions 1.2.1
August, 2007 1-1

1-2 ,
August, 2007
1 Preface and safety instructions
1.1 Preface / how to use this manual
1.1.1 General
Introduction This service manual is intended for trained service technicians, who have
gone through the product training courses of this machine.
Purpose The purpose of this service manual is to learn about the technical details of
the machine.
It can be considered and used as a reference manual.
1.1.2 Structure of the manual
Chapters The service manual is divided into chapters, numbered from 1 to 10.
Sections Chapters may be divided into sections.
Example:
Section 5 Function contains nine subsections, each representing a specific
function in the machine.
A section may contain a separate section for FB/IN elements and one for
ES elements
Example:
Section 5A contains a section for the FB/IN water system and a section for
the ES water system, as well as
Section 5B contains a section for the FB brewer system and a section for
the ES brewer system.
Subsection Each section is divided into subsections

Each subsection has the same build-up, see example on next page.
August, 2007 1-3

Example The Brewing system serves as an example and it can be found under:
Chapter 5 Functions
Section B Brewer system / B Espresso Brewer system
Subsection 1 Adjustments / (ES) Adjustments
- This subsection describes all possible adjustments
for this section, regarding timing, calibration, etc.
2 (Dis-)assemblies / (ES) (Dis-)assemblies
- This subsection explains in detail how a certain
part, belonging to this section, has to be
assembled, disassembled or replaced.
3 Functional description / (ES) Functional
descriptions
- This subsection explains in detail how a certain
system in the machine works and how the different
parts in the system interact.
4 Electrical diagrams / (ES) Electrical diagrams
- Here you can find a description of electrical inputs
and outputs of the Brewing system.
5 Technical specifications / (ES) Technical
specifications
- The technical specifications for the Brewing
system, described in this section are given here.
6 Overview of options / (ES) Overview of options
- Available options, specially for the Brewing system.
7 Accessories / (ES) Accessories
- Accessories to the Brewing system.
Service informa- As the vending machine is subject to changes, consecutively numbered

tion service messages (named ‘technical information’) will inform you on these
changes. The service messages are to be filed as chapter 8 in this service
manual.
General note The concept of this manual is designed in such a way that it is valid for dif-
ferent types of machines. If a machine is not equipped with a certain com-
ponent, the corresponding section is mentioned, but will be blank. The
complete numbering has not been changed. Some of the subsections, e.g.
the one on *External Options’, can be completed by the service technician
with respect to specific countries if required.
1-4 August, 2007

1.1.3 Definitions of options and accessories
Definition Options and accessories are also described in this manual. They are de-
fined as follows:
Definition Description
Otions Various options result in different versions, types or models.
Accessories Parts that a Service Technician can build into your machine to
enable new or different options for your machine.
External Parts that can provide special functions or features for your
options machine, without need to build them into the machine.
August, 2007 1-5

1.2 Safety instructions
Introduction This subsection is intended as an overview of the instructions and warnings

used in this manual, and which you must observe.
The following general safety precautions apply to the operation and main-
tenance of the machine and must always be observed. Non-observance of
these instructions or any other safety precautions mentioned in this manual
could impair the safety standards of the coffee machine.
Hazard intensity There are three levels of hazard intensity identified by signal words -
level Danger, Warning and Caution. The level of hazard is determined by the
following definitions:
Danger - Immediate hazard will result in severe personal injury or

death.
Warning - Hazards of unsafe practices which could result in severe

personal injury or death.
Caution - Hazards of unsafe practices which could result in minor

personal injury or product or property damage.
General instruc- The instructions in this manual must always be followed. Non-observance
tions can lead to dangerous situations. The manufacturer cannot be held respon-
sible for damage, resulting from not following prescribed procedures.
The technicians must have read the service manual and the operator man-
ual thoroughly, and understood both, before they can install the machine
and put it into operation. The service technician must hand over and ex-
plain the operator manual to the customer.
Installation, start-up, programming and, if required, repair of the machine

must be performed by trained and authorised service technicians only.
When the customer sells the vending machine to another party, he must
also hand over the complete documentation, delivered with the machine.
1-6 August, 2007

1.2.4 Various safety instructions
Introduction Below is listed the instructions divided into the hazard intensity levels
• Danger
• Warning
• Caution
Danger • Never insert the power supply plug of the machine in a wet or damp
socket. The plug itself must not be wet or damp either. Also never
insert or remove the plug from the socket with wet hands.
• Safety devices must not be bridged or put out of function.
• If the power supply cord of the machine is damaged, it must be
replaced by trained service technicians.
• Before cleaning the vending machine, ensure that it is switched off.
• If repair work has to be made to the service light, always disconnect
the machine at the mains plug. The service light is connected before
the main switch in the electric system.
Warning • The machine must be connected to the mains in accordance with all
official regulations and local regulations laid down by the electricity
and water companies.
• Ensure that the supply voltage corresponds to the voltage indicated on
the rating plate which is located on the rear wall of the machine.
• The machine must be connected to an electic circuit which is secured
by an extra fuse. The connection to a supply with an integrated fault
current safety switch is recommended. If missing, we recommend to
install a fault current safety switch. The connection must be made
using an earthed safety plug socket complying with valid instructions.
• Check the drinking water quality prior to installation.
• The machine is suitable for indoor use only.
• Use only genuine spare parts when replacing components and / or
carrying out work on the machine, otherwise the manufacturer will
accept no liablility in the event of damage.
• The use of kits which are not approved by the manufacturer of the
vending machine does not guarantee compliance with safety standards,
especially for energised parts.
The manufacturer declines all responsibiity for the use of non-
approved components.
August, 2007 1-7

• Rinse the machine before putting it into operation.

• The beverages dispensed by the machine are hot! In order to prevent
scalds, hands (and/or other parts of the body) must be kept out of the
drink delivery area during drink preparation and function tests.
• Keep children away from the machine!
• Carry out a functional test of the machine when the work is completed.
• Door switch:
When the door is opened, a special switch ensures that there is no
access to electrical or moving parts.
Any operation requiring the machine to be energized with the door
opened must be carried out exclusively by qualified technicians
informed about the specific risks of such situation.
The machine may be energized by qualified technicians by inserting
the yellow service key into the door switch.
Before starting any maintenance or repair of energized or moving
parts, the machine must always be disconnected at the mains plug.
• When the yellow service key is inserted in the slot of the door key, the
machine is re-energized.
The door can be closed only after removing the key from the door
switch.
If power is turned on, be careful not to touch moving parts and
electrical components.
Caution • To ensure proper hygiene and operation of the machine, it must be

cleaned regularly. Watch out for possible sharp edges when cleaning
the machine. Danger of scratches or cuts.
• Do not switch off the machine between beverage dispensings in order
to keep the optimum water temperature in the boiler. Set ‘energy
saving’ in programming instead.
• Clean the inside and outside of the machine using a clean damp cloth
and do not splash/rinse it. To clean the machine, only use cleaning
agents approved by the food industry.
• Never use high-pressure sprays for cleaning.
1-8 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Installation
Table of contents
Installation 2
Transport / Handling 2.1
Dimensions and general transport instructions 2.1.1
Transport and storage conditions 2.1.2
Installation requirements 2.2
Prerequisites to water supply 2.2.1
Prerequisites to electricity supply 2.2.2
Physical dimensions of required space 2.2.3
Unpacking 2.3
How to unpack the machine 2.3.1
List of items, delivered with the machine 2.3.2
Disposal of packaging and machine
at the end of the lifetime 2.3.3
Installation notes 2.4
Installing the machine 2.5
Checklist of customer instructions 2.6
Technical specifications (total overview) 2.7
August, 2007 2-1

2-2 ,
August, 2007
2 Installation
2.1 Transport / Handling
2.1.1 Dimensions and general transport instructions
Dimensions The following table states the dimensions of the machine

Description Dimensions with Dimensions without
packaging packaging
Height 1930 mm 1834 mm - 1855 mm
Width 770 mm 700 mm
Depth 770 mm 620 mm (cabinet)
662 mm (cabinet+door)
Weight The following table states the weight of the machine types:
Machine type Weight with packaging Weight without packaging
IN ca. 194 kg ca. 169 kg
FB Delta ca. 196 kg ca. 171 kg
FF (2xFB) Delta ca. 211 kg ca. 186 kg
FB Sigma ca. 206 kg ca. 181 kg
FF (2xFB) Sigma ca. 221 kg ca. 196 kg
ES ca. 214 kg ca. 189 kg
General transport Observe the following instructions / cautions:

instructions • Transport the machine carefully in its original packaging.
• Only transport the machine in upright position.
• Do not turn the machine upside down.
• Do not lift the machine from the side.
• Do not lift the machine with whatever sling or rope.
• Do not place one packed machine on top of another.
General storing • When storing machine, ensure that it is only stored indoors and take
instructions precautions against parasites and frost.
• Keep the machine away from unusual odours.
• Prior to installation, each machine must be positioned and fastened
individually on a special pallet.
August, 2007 2-3

2.1.2 Transport and storage conditions
General Note To prevent damage to the machine, (un)load and handle the machine with
special care.
It is possible to lift the machine with a motor or hand operated fork lift,
placing the forks in the front or rear side of the pallet.
Precautions Before storing or transporting a used machine to a new location

before transport the following steps must be taken
and storage Step Action
1 Switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power supply plug.
2 Disconnect the machine from the water supply.
3 Empty the ingredient canisters.
4 Drain the boiler completely.
Danger of being scalded by hot water.
5 Ensure that the water system is drained completely when machine is to

be stored for a longer period of time or in a room with temperatures below
0°C.
It is recommended to disassemble individual parts of water system to
empty system completely.
6 Loosen and remove possible wall securing brackets. (Special parts).
7 Pack the machine in such a manner that a safe transport is guaranteed.
Use the original packaging, if possible.
8 Secure the transport brackets (4 each) at the levellers of the machine to
the pallet by means of two screws.
9 Screw the support leg down firmly attached to the pallet to act as a
transport securing for the door.
Ambient tempera- Min. 4°C (39°F) - max. 36°C (97°F) at 80% RH.
ture
Storage The machine must be stored in dry and frost proof ambient conditions and
requirements must not be exposed to sunlight.
• Before storing the machine for a longer time period, it must have been
cleaned correctly.
• When used machines are stored intermediately for a long time, the inlet
valve of the water supply hose towards the boiler must be disconnected
in order to ensure that the hose is empty. In this way future spoiling of
the taste is avoided.
2-4 August, 2007

2.2 Installation requirements
2.2.1 Prerequisites to water supply
Customer’s site • Water supply line with stop valve and non return valve.
• Connection to cold water line only with suitable supply lines.
• Supply system requirements:
Description Data
Water flow: 25 ml/sec.
Min. back pressure (dynamic): 0.8 bar (hot machines, only)
1.5 bar (hot and cold machines)
Max. pressure (static): 10 bar (hot machines, only)
8 bar (hot and cold machines)
Machine The connector of the supply hose has to be ordered separately according to
the local connections at the installation site.
Special conditions • Observe safety precautions and local regulations.

to be observed • When selecting the supply hoses, only use material that is neutral in
taste and compliant with local regulations.
• Check the drinking water quality. A drinking water filter is
recommended. Always observe local regulations on installation of a
drinking water filter.
• If machine is provided with a water purifying filter, always observe the
data stated by supplier in question.
August, 2007 2-5

2.2.2 Prerequisites to electricity supply
Customer’s site Recommended:

• Fault current safety switch and an isolating switch.
Requirements:
• The mains connection must match the machine output (socket), refer to
the rating plate of the machine. The machine must be protected
individually by means of fuses, 10A.
• The power supply voltage must be 230 V, 50 Hz.
The connection must be earthed.
The machine housing will be carrying voltage if no earthed
conductor is connected! (mains filter).
Machine • National plug on power supply cable.

• Length of the power supply cable approx. 3500 mm.
Diagram This diagram illustrates the dimensions of the electrical inlet and water in-
let to machine in relation to rear side of machine
90 mm
1722-1743 mm
185 mm
820-841 mm
2-6 August, 2007

2.2.3 Physical dimensions of required space
Minimum require- Floor: Even, nonskid floor.

ments
Diagram
120 mm
Required minimum
662 mm
620 mm
space from wall to
front of machine
with door open:
1423 mm
683 mm
700 mm
1834-1855 mm
974-995 mm
August, 2007 2-7

2.2.4 External options
(To be used for national information - e.g. on external filters).
2-8 August, 2007

2.3 Unpackaging
2.3.1 How to unpack the machine
Note Do not use any sharp utensils in order to avoid scratches on the machine.
Procedure Follow these steps to unpack the machine:

Step Action Illustration
1 Ensure that the machine has not been damaged during transport.
2 Remove wrapping materials around the machine.
3 Loosen screws and remove transport
brackets (4 each) from pallet and
levellers of machine (1)
4 Screw support leg up before opening
door (2). 2
5 Remove pallet from machine and position the machine on proper site.
6 Level the machine by adjusting the feet.
It is essential that the machine is
completely level.
7 Remove the transport protections located inside the machine.

8 Check the list of all items delivered with the machine. See this section,
page 2-12.
9 Position all parts delivered with machine. See this section, page 2-10.
August, 2007 2-9

Positioning parts Follow these steps to locate the parts delivered with the machine:
delivered with Step Action
machine 1 Place the plastic sleeving and finally
the plastic cap on the support leg.
2 Unpack and attach the kick plate to

the door.
3 Place the drip tray in door.
4 Place the quick reference card and

the operator manual in manual
holder on boiler cover.
2 - 10 August, 2007
Wall securing The rear wall of the machine is provided with holes to allow wall securing
brackets brackets to be fitted to the machine. The wall securing brackets have to be
ordered separately.
Check that all items listed are available and intact.
August, 2007 2 - 11
2.3.2 List of all items, delivered with the machine
List The items listed with the machine are:

• Plastic sleeving for support leg
• Plastic cap for support leg
• Yellow service key
• Drip tray
• Three screws for kick plate
• Quick reference card (in local language)
• Operator manual (in local language)
2 - 12 August, 2007
2.3.3 Disposal of packaging and machine at the end of the

lifetime.
General note Disposal of material must always be done in accordance with national, le-
gal, safety, and environmental requirements.
Packing materials The packing material for the machine consist in

used • Cardboard
• Polyethylene
• Wood
August, 2007 2 - 13
2.4 Installation requirements and safety notes
Prerequisite for Before starting the installation:

installation • Check for adequate space for correct ventilation.
A distance of minimum 120 mm is required from the rear side of the
machine to the wall.
• Check for clear space of minimum 683 mm in front of the machine, or
a minimum of 1,423 mm measured from wall to end of opened door to
allow the door to be fully opened.
• Check the connections and make sure that the national voltages and
tolerances are provided.
The machine must be earthed.
• Ensure that the fuse of the group to which the machine is connected is
in accordance with the national regulations.
• If required, ask for detailed information on voltage and tolerance
values at the local energy supply companies.
Safety notes on Attention:

installation • The machine is suitable for indoor use only.
Warnings:
• Check drinking water quality.
• The machine must be connected to the mains in accordance with all
official regulations and local regulations laid down by the electricity
and water companies. Observe the local regulations.
• The machine must be connected to an earthed electric circuit which is
secured by an extra fuse.
• Rinse the machine before putting it into operation.
General note The use of kits which are not approved by the manufacturer of the vending
machine does not guarantee compliance with safety standards, especially
for energised parts.
The manufacturer declines all responsibiity for the use of non-approved
components.
2 - 14 August, 2007
2.5 Installing the machine
Introduction The installation instructions can be divided into the following topics:
• Connecting machine to mains and putting into operation.
• Attaching loose parts.
• Adjusting manual price indication.
• Adjusting electronic price indication.
• Checking valve settings.
• Preparing machine for vend.
Connecting Follow these steps to put machine into operation:

machine to mains Step Action
and putting it into 1 Follow the instructions of section “How to unpack the machine”.
operation 2 Connect the water supply and open the water stop valve.
3 Insert the power supply plug and switch on power.
4 Open door of machine.
5 Remove ingredient canisters.
6 Switch on main switch.
- Water should now flow into the boiler.
7 Check for leakages.
Attaching loose • Attach stickers to the machine.

parts • Unpack and relocate possible parts located in the waste bucket.
Adjusting manual Follow instructions in Chapter 5, Section G, Housing / Cabinet. See “Re-
price indication placing the selection signs (Direct selection)” on page 12.
(Direct selection)
Adjusting elec- Electronic price indication not available yet.

tronic price indica-
tion
Checking valve When boiler is filled, check valve settings and possibly manufacturer’s set-
settings tings.
Preparing • Rinse entire dispensing system twice.

machine for vend • Fill ingredient canisters and insert on proper place.
• Close door and test all drink dispensings.
August, 2007 2 - 15
2.6 Checklist of customer instructions
2 - 16 August, 2007
2.7 Technical specifications (total overview)
Dimensions and Table of dimensions of machine with or without packaging:

Weight
Description Dimensions with Dimensions without
packaging packaging
Height 1930 mm 1834 mm - 1855 mm
Width 770 mm 700 mm
Depth 770 mm 620 mm (Cabinet)
662 mm (Cabinet+door)
Weight IN: ca. 194 kg IN: ca. 169 kg
FB Delta: ca. 196 kg FB Delta: ca. 171 kg
FF Sigma: ca. 211 kg FF Sigma: ca. 186 kg
FB Sigma: 206 kg FB Sigma: 181 kg
FF Sigma: 221 kg FF Sigma: 196 kg
ES: ca. 214 kg ES: ca. 189 kg
Connecting cable Mains cable: Approximately 3,500 mm
Water supply Connect the machine to a cold water supply (potable water).
Type of pressure Hot machine, only Hot and cold
machine
Min. back pressure (dynamic) 0.8 bar / 0.08 MPa 1.5 bar / 0.15 MPa
Max. pressure (static) 10 bar / 1.0 MPa 8 bar / 0.8 MPa
Power consump- Power (24h of stand-by) according to Energy Measurement

tion Standard (EMS): 3833 Wh
Heat up phase according to Energy Measurement
August, 2007 2 - 17
Standard (EMS): 381W

Machine without cold unit max. 2130W
- Heating element 1800W or 2000W

- Power consumption 152Wh/l
Power supply: 230V AC +10%/-15%
Fuses:
- Line: 10A
- Neutral: 10A
- Transformer, primary: 2A
- Transformer, secondary (on VMC) 8A
Frequency: 50 Hz
Outlet valves (solenoid valves) 24V DC

Inlet valve (solenoid valve) 24V DC
Whipper motors 24V DC
Ingredient motors 12V DC
Lines Single line+neutral+earth (IEC-standard)

Brown or black: Line
Blue: Neutral
Yellow/green: Earth
The machine must be connected to an earthed electric circuit
which is secured by an extra fuse. The connection to a supply
with an integrated fault current safety switch is recommended. If
missing, it is recommended to install a fault current safety
switch. The connection must be made using an earthed safety
plug socket complying with valid instructions.
Temperature Hot water temperature: 95°C-97°C (203°F - 207°F)

Cold water temperature: max. 25°C (77°F)
Requirements Table of requirements to installation and environment

Installation Up to 2000 m above MSL (6562 ft.); when using the machine
in greater heights the nominal water temperature must be
changed over by the service (reset in the technician menus
under “Temperatures”).
Environment The machine may only be used indoors (IP 20).
Storing tempera- -20°C (-4°F) to 36°C (97°F).

ture
2 - 18 August, 2007
Ambient tempera- 4°C (39°F) to 36°C (97°F) at 80% RH.

ture
Boiler Capacity: FB/IN: 4.5 l

ES: 0.6 l
Boil over sensor Triggering temperature 80°C (176°F)
Boiler tempera- Adjustable: Default value: IN machines: 85°C (185°F)

ture sensor Default value: FB/IN machines: 94°C - 96°C (201°F - 205°F).
Dry boiling protec- Triggering temperature 120°C (248°F)

tion
Relative humidity Max. 80% RH (relative humidity) at 36°C (-2/+0) (97°F).
Capacities Waste containers:

Coffee waste bucket: 20 l
Waste bucket: 12 l
Fresh Brew ingredient canisters:

- Standard Fresh Brew product canister (Delta) 13 l
- Standard Fresh Brew product canister (Sigma) 12 l
Espresso coffee bean canister:

- Standard Espresso bean canister: 4l
Instant ingredient canisters:

- standard: 4l
- large: 6l
Cup dispenser:
Cup magazine 600 cups (180 ml)
Stick magazine: 440 sticks
Cash box: 2.34 litres.

(Operator cover not included).
August, 2007 2 - 19
Cup and pot Dimensions of dropped cups, own cup or pot:

dimensions Dropped cup Own cup Pot
Min. height 60 mm 60 mm -
Max. height 115 mm 140 mm 240 mm
Min. int. diameter 70 mm 60 mm 60 mm
Max. ext. diameter 78 mm 80 mm 110 mma
Min. pot hole diameter - - 60 mm
a. 25 mm of upper part of pot not to exceed a diameter of 110 mm due to transport
of the cup catcher. For the other part of the pot, the diameter may extend to max.
170 mm.
Payment system The machine is equipped with all electrical prearrangement for payment
systems that support the following protocols:
• Executive (Protocol A)
• MDB
• BDV
• 2 price parallel coin mechanism
• Coin validator
The machine provides sufficient space for the (optional) installation of

most cashless payment systems as an alternative to coin systems.
Data Communica- RS232 connection

tion Infrared (option)
UP Key
Data exchange Industry standard and PC standard protocols

protocols
Directives The machine is marked with the CE label and complies with the legislative
directions of the directives.
- 89/336/EEC- Electromagnetic Compatibility
- 73/23/EEC - Low voltage
and further amendments and integrations
Approvals IMQ
Noise level Max. 45dB(A) at a distance of one meter in stand by
Acoustic emission The A-weighted sound pressure level is below 70 dB.
Lock system Standard 3 point lock.
2 - 20 August, 2007
Options and Definition:

Accessories • Options must be specified upon ordering.
• Accessories are parts that can be ordered separately.
Diagram Diagram below shows availabilities divided in accessory or option:

Description Accessory Option
Different photographic panels / posters x x
Kit, fluorescent lamp for poster x
Wall mounting kit x
Multibrew facility (with key) x
Dosed or undosed hot water x
7C or 7H cup ring x
Double brewer x
Hygiene kit x
Water filter (Brita, Everpure or Cuno) x
Operator cover for coin box x
Cabinet colour (RAL) x
Rielda lock (programmable) x x
Chiler unit x
FB creme kit x x
Mechanical counter x x
Keypad x
Note Different adjustments for individual customers were not considered.
August, 2007 2 - 21
2 - 22 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Event recording and troubleshooting
Table of contents
Event recording and troubleshooting 3
Events indicated in the display 3.1
Event messages in connection with Diagnostics/Test 3.1.1
Event messages in event log book and credit display 3.1.2
Troubleshooting - events not indicated in display 3.2
August, 2007 3-1

3-2 August, 2007

3 Event recording and troubleshooting
3.1 Events indicated in the display
Introduction This section lists, in alphabetical order, events indicated in the display,
explanations to these events and corrective action in cases where this is
necessary.
Event indications Events in the machine are shown in the credit display for as long as they
interrupt normal operation of the machine. These may be considered as
active events. Subsequently, they are listed in the Event log book found in
the Operator menu.
The Event log book registers the date and time of the first and last
occurrence of each event and the number of times it has occurred.
Example: Active events are shown in the credit display in the following way:
Indication of event
in the credit Message in credit display Explanation
display This message indicates that the water
temperature in the boiler has not
reached the required temperature.
Temperature low
The message stays in the display for as
long as the machine is not operable.
If two events are present at the same

time, the last occurred event will be
shown.
Example: Events are stored in the Event log book and are shown in the display in the
Indication of event following way:
in the Event log
book Message in Event log book Explanation
F: = First time of occurrence
(date+time)
Temperature low
L: = Latest occurrence (date+time)
*F: 220103 14.07 (xxx): = number of times of occurrence
L: 080203 16.56( 3)
^ v Sel Esc
August, 2007 3-3

3.1.1 Event messages in connection with Diagnostics/Test
Diagnostics/Test Event messages that may appear during the testing of any of the machine’s
messages functions are explained in chapter 4 Programming, Diagnostics/Test as
these messages are closely connected to the testing procedures.
3.1.2 Event messages in event log book and credit display
Branch pipe error This message indicates a time-out error on the branch pipe causing the
machine to stop operation.
Turn the machine off and on. If the error remains, investigate the
possibilities in the table below.
Possible cause Remedy

Defective branch pipe switch or Check parts, replace if necessary.
switches See chap. 5C Dosing system.
Defective branch pipe motor
Cable connection defective
Defective harness to motor
Cup blocking the movement of the Remove cup.
branch pipe
Grease or dirt blocking or obstructing Clean branch pipe system, i.e.
the movement of the branch pipe distributor head, hoses and mixing
funnels.
See Operator manual.
Cup elevator error This message indicates a problem with the cup elevator.

Elevator top switch or safety switch Remove blocking body.
pressed due to cup or other foreign
body blocking the elevator If the elevator is stuck in its top position,
open the door and turn the machine off
and on. Close the door. The elevator
will lower to Home position. Remove
blocking foreign body.
Defective motor Check, replace if necessary.
See chap. 5D Product delivery.
Defective switch or switches Check, replace if necessary.
Foreign body stuck between elevator Remove blocking foreign body.
and base
Cup on elevator when the machine is Remove cup.
turned on
3-4 August, 2007

Cup not delivered This message indicates that the machine has not been able to dispense a
cup, causing the machine to stop operating.

Dirt or grease blocking cup slide Clean cup slide.
Defective cup slide Change cup slide.
Defective cup drop ring Replace cup drop ring.
Incorrect cup size Replace with cups that fit ring size.
Cup blocking cup slide/cup ring area Remove blocking cup.
Cup storage error This message indicates that the machine is not able to dispense a cup due
to a condition in the cup storage area.

Cup pile blocked Remove blocking cup.
Switch incorrectly installed Install correctly.
Defective switch Check, replace if necessary.
Cup transport This message indicates a time-out in the cup slide or cup catcher
error mechanism which causes the machine to stop operating.

Cup slide blocked Remove blocking cup.
Grease or dirt blocking or obstructing Clean cup catcher and cup slide areas.
the movement of the cup catcher
Defective switch Check, replace if necessary.
Toothed belt defective or has come off Check, put toothed belt back on or
pulley(s) replace if necessary.
August, 2007 3-5

Door closed The purpose of the [Door closed] message is to record the time and date of
(log book only) door closings. However, the message is also being given when power is
returned to the machine.
Door open This message is either a status indication similar to the message above
(log book only) [Door closed] or an indication of a problem with the door.

Door not closed properly Close door properly.
Door switch defective Check, replace if necessary.
Door harness defective Check, replace if necessary.
ES brewer faulty This message indicates that the ES-brewer has not been installed correctly
(ES machines) or that a problem related to the brewer has caused the machine to stop
operating.

Brewer is installed incorrectly Install brewer correctly:
Important!: Check that the crank arm of
the brewer motor is correctly engaged
in its seat.
See chap. 5B Brewer system -
Espresso version.
Something is blocking the brewer. Check, remove blocking part.
Defective harness between ES Replace harness.
controller and switches
ES Grinder This message indicates that the grinder is blocked or that a problem with
blocked the grinder has occurred.
(ES machines)
Foreign body stuck in grinder. Remove foreign body from grinder.
Defective grinder or grinder motor Check grinder, replace whole unit, parts
or motor as necessary.
See chap. 5B Brewer system -
Espresso version.
ES Heater fault This message indicates that the ES boiler has not been able to heat the
(ES machines) water sufficiently. Turn the machine off and on. If the message remains,
investigate the possibilities in the table below.

Heating element defective Check the heating element, replace if
necessary.
See chap. 5A Water system - Espresso
version.
3-6 August, 2007


Harness for heating element defective Check harness, replace if necessary.
version.
Temperature sensor or harness for Check sensor and harness, replace if
temperature sensor defective necessary.
version.
Dry boiling thermostat has triggered Press the reset button. chap 5A Water
system - Espresso version.
If the heating element is not heating
again or the dry boiling thermostat
triggers repeatedly, check for other
types of errors or check temperature
setting. See chap. 4 Programming.
ES Temperature This message indicates that the machine is not able to deliver hot ES drinks
low due to the water temperature being too low.
(ES machines)
The machine has been turned on Wait until the water is heated
recently or the water has not re-heated sufficiently (maximum 15 minutes).
after a number of dispensings in quick
succession. The display is automatically cleared
when the water in the boiler reaches the
correct temperature.
ES Water fault This message appears if the ES boiler has not filled after the machine has
(ES machines) been switched on, after a dispensing of an espresso drink or after an
automatic check of the water level. The machine checks the water level
every 20 minutes (may be adjusted via menu) and fills it up if necessary.
Switch the machine off, open the water tap, check water connection and
hoses. If the message remains, please investigate the possibilities in the
table below.

Pump error If there is no or an insufficient amount
of water in the boiler, the problem may
be caused by a pump error.
• Defective motor. Check motor,
replace if necessary.
See chap. 5A Espresso water
system.
• Defective ES controller. Check,
See chap. 5K Power supply unit and
control.
• Defective harness. Check harness,
August, 2007 3-7


Flowmeter error If the boiler overflows, the problem may
be caused by a flowmeter error.
• Check the correct operation of the
flowmeter. There must be 6-7 V DC
on the terminals during the counter
operation.
Leaking valve If the boiler overflows, the problem may
be caused by a leak in the espresso
water valve.
• Check valve, replace if necessary.
See overview of espresso water
system in chap. 5A Water system -
Espresso version..
ES Water level low This message appears if the air-break tank has not filled within two and a
(ES machines) half minutes after the machine has been switched on.
hoses. If the message remains, investigate the possibilities in the table
below.

Blocked water inlet filter Remove impurities and clean, replace if
necessary.
version.
Inlet valve defective or blocked by Check, descale or replace if necessary.
limescale build-up See chap. 5A Water system - Espresso
version.
Blocked water filter for flowmeter Check, replace if necessary.
version.
Water supply connection blocked Remove impurities.
Defective air-break tank switch Check, replace if necessary.
version.
Factory info. This message indicates an internal application error which may or may not
XXXRXX cause the machine to stop operating. The error code is for internal use and
(log book only) should be reported to the manufacturer.

System error Note!
Report error to manufacturer together
with error code (XXXRXX).
3-8 August, 2007

FB1(or FB2) This message indicates that the brewer has not been installed correctly or
assemble error that a problem related to the brewer has caused the machine to stop
(log book only) operating.
(FB machines)
Filter plate or cylinder incorrectly Install filter plate and brewer cylinder
installed or not installed at all correctly.
See chap. 5B Brewer system - FB Delta
version.
Defective harness between FB printed Replace harness.
circuit board and switches See chap. 5K Power supply unit and
control.
Micro switches maladjusted or worn Adjust or replace switches.
version.
FB1 (or FB2) error This message indicates that the brewer motor has been disabled causing the
(log book only) machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the
(FB machines) credit display.

Foreign body stuck between piston and Remove foreign body from brewer.
filter plate See chap.5B Brewer system - FB Delta
version.
Harness for brewer defective or Check, replace if necessary.
disconnected See chap. 5B Brewer system - FB Delta
version.
FB printed circuit board defective Check, replace if necessary.
control.
Defective brewer motor Check brewer motor, replace if
necessary.
version.
FB1 (or FB2) This message indicates a problem with the brewer causing the machine to
Filter plate stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit display.
(log book only)
(FB machines) Possible cause Remedy
Filter plate blocked Clean / Descale filter.
version.
Defective brewer motor Check brewer motor, replace if
necessary.
version.
August, 2007 3-9

FB1 (or FB2) Ing This message indicates that the brewer ingredient motor is not running
motor1 t.out correctly. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit display.
(log book only)
Calibration error Check calibration of ingredients.
See chap. 4 Programming.
Hardware error on FB printed circuit Check, replace if necessary.
board See chap. 5K Power supply unit and
control.
FB1 (or FB2) This message indicates a brewer motor error causing the machine to stop
motor error operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit display.
(log book only)
Defective brewer motor Check brewer motor and brewer
Defective harness for brewer motor connections. Adjust, repair or replace
defective part if necessary.
Defective harness between FB printed
circuit board and switches
version.
Defective FB printed circuit board Check, replace printed circuit board if
necessary.
control.
FB1 (or FB2) This message indicates a brewer motor error related to the FB printed
short circuit circuit board. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit display.
(log book only)
Defective brewer motor Check motor.
version.
Defective FB printed circuit board Check, replace printed circuit board if
necessary.
control.
FB1 unexp. This message indicates an unexpected current from brewer causing the
current machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the
(log book only) credit display.
(FB machines)
Defective FB printed circuit board Check printed circuit board, replace if
necessary.
control.
3 - 10 August, 2007
FB1 unexpected This message indicates an unexpected motion of the brewer motor or
tacho ingredient motor. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit
(log book only) display.
(FB machines)
Defective FB printed circuit board Check printed circuit board, replace if
necessary.
control.
FB waste bucket This message indicates that the FB (coffee grounds) waste bucket is full or
full another problem related to the FB waste bucket. The machine is not able
(FB machines) to deliver freshbrew coffee.

FB waste bucket full Switch machine off, empty waste bucket
and wipe dry the sensor.
FB waste bucket sensor soiled Clean and wipe dry sensor.
Harness for waste bucket sensor Check, replace if necessary.
defective
IngMotor xx error This message indicates an error related to one of the instant ingredient
(log book only) motors causing the machine to stop operating. The message [Out of
service] appears in the credit display.

Defective instant ingredient motor Check motor, replace if necessary.
See chap. 5D Dosing system.
Defective VMC Check VMC, replace if necessary.
control.
Defective harness Check harness, replace if necessary.
Ingmotorxx This message indicates an overload of one of the instant ingredient motors
overload causing the machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service]
(log book only) appears in the credit display.

Moist ingredient powder blocking motor Check ingredient motor.
See chap. 5C Dosing system.
Instant ingredient canister not properly Reposition canister.
positioned
Outlet spout of instant ingredient Open outlet spout of canister.
canister closed
August, 2007 3 - 11

Outlet spout of instant ingredient Clean Instant ingredient canister and
canister blocked up outlet spout.
No Coffee beans
(ES machines) Possible cause Remedy
The coffee bean canister is empty Refill coffee bean canister.
Shutter is closed Check if shutter is closed. If necessary,
open shutter.
No cups This message indicates that the cup magazine is empty or that another
problem related to the cup dispensing system has caused the machine to
stop operating. The message is followed by the message [Use own cup].

Cup magazine empty Use own cup / Refill cup magazine.
Defective cup sensor Check, replace if necessary.
No payment This message appears if a coin mechanism has been selected in the menu
comm. system, see 4.3.8.2 Set payment type, but the connection between the coin
mechanism and the machine is missing.

The coin mechanism has not been Connect the coin mechanism cable to
connected to the machine the coin mechanism switch inside the
machine door.
See chap. 5P Payment system.
Defective harness for coin mechanism Check cable, replace if necessary.
See chap. 5P Payment system.
Defective SPC Check, replace if necessary.
control.
No SB1 (or SB2) This message occurs if the upper valve of the brewing cylinder does not
cyl. pressure shut tightly and, therefore, is unable to create the necessary pressure in the
(sigma brewer) cylinder.

Upper valve blocked, e.g. by coffee Remove blocking object.
bean
Out of service This message appears in the credit display if the machine is temporarily
unable to operate due to a technical or a mechanical problem.
3 - 12 August, 2007
The cause of the error will be registered in the Event log book, e.g. as [FB1
motor error]. This and other possible event messages can be found in this
alphabetical error list.
After the message (Out of service] has been shown on the display for five
seconds, the error message(s) registered in the Event log book will
automatically be shown.
SB (or SB 2) Init This message appears if an error occurs in the brewer during initialization
Failure of the machine, and the system did not detect a specific error.
(sigma brewer)
Defective brewer motor Check motor, replace if necessary.
See chap. 5B Brewer system - FB
Sigma version
Harness for brewer defective or Check harness, replace if necessary.
disconnected See chap. 5B Brewer system - FB
Sigma version,
Defective Sigma printed circuit board Check, replace if necessary.
control.
SB (or SB 2) This message indicates a blockage of the brewer piston causing the
Piston error machine to interrupt the vend in progress.
(sigma brewer)
Grease or dirt blocking or obstructing Clean brewer unit
the movement of the piston See Operator manual.
SB (or SB 2) This message indicates a blockage of the brewer scraper causing the
Scraper error machine to interrupt the vend in progress.
(sigma brewer)
Grease or dirt blocking or obstructing Clean brewer unit.
the movement of the scraper See Operator manual.
SPC short circuit This message indicates a short circuit of the SPC printed circuit board
(log book only) causing the machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service]
appears in the credit display.

Defective SPC Check, replace if necessary.
control.
August, 2007 3 - 13
Temperature low This message indicates that the machine is not able to deliver hot drinks
due to the water temperature being too low.

The machine has been turned on Wait until the water is heated
recently sufficiently (maximum 15 minutes).
The display is automatically cleared

when the water in the boiler reaches the
correct temperature.
Heating element defective Check the heating element, replace if
necessary.
See chap. 5A Water system.
Harness for heating element defective Check harness, replace if necessary.
Temperature sensor or harness for Check sensor and harness, replace if
temperature sensor defective necessary.
Dry boiling thermostat has triggered Press the reset button. See chap. 5A
Water system.
If the heating element is not heating

again or dry boiling thermostat triggers
repeatedly, check for other types of
errors or check temperature setting.
See chap. 4 Programming.
Unexpected xx This message indicates that one of the machine’s circuit board modules
reset (VMC, SPC, FB1, FB2, ES and SB) has made an unexpected reset.
(log book only)
Defective module Check the module, replace if necessary.
control.
VMC short circuit This message indicates a short circuit causing the machine to stop
(log book only) operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit display.

Short circuit in Harness Check harness, replace if necessary.
Defective motor for instant ingredients, Check motors, replace if necessary.

whipper or pump See chap. 5C Dosing system (instant
ingredient motor and whipper motor) or
5A Water system (pump).
Defective VMC Check, replace if necessary.
control.
3 - 14 August, 2007
Waste bucket full This message indicates that the waste bucket is full or that a problem
related to the waste bucket has caused the machine to stop operating.

Waste bucket full Switch machine off, empty waste bucket
and dry the sensor.
Waste bucket sensor soiled Clean and wipe dry sensor.
Harness for waste bucket sensor Check, replace if necessary.
defective
Water level low This message appears if the boiler has not filled within three minutes after
the machine has been switched on.
hoses. If the message remains, investigate the possibilities in the table
below.

Inlet valve defective or blocked by lime Check, descale or replace if necessary.
scale build-up See chap. 5A Freshbrew / Instant water
system.
Blocked water filter Remove impurities and clean, replace if
necessary.
See chap. 5A Freshbrew / Instant water
system.
Water supply connection blocked Remove impurities.
Water pump error This message indicates a problem with the water pump causing the
(log book only) machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the
credit display.

Defective pump Check motor, replace if necessary.
control.
Water pump This message indicates an overload of the water pump causing the machine
overload to stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the credit
(log book only) display.

Limescale build-up blocking pump Descale pump.
August, 2007 3 - 15

Foreign body blocking pump Disassemble water pump, remove
foreign body.
Water system This message appears if the machine has dispensed three hot drinks
failure without refilling the boiler.

Defective water pump Check, replace if necessary.
Defective water level sensor Check, replace if necessary.
Water tank This message indicates that the water temperature has reached boiling
overboil point, causing the machine to stop operating.

Overboil thermostat has triggered Press the reset button.
See chap. 5A Freshbrew / Instant water
system.
Overboil thermostat is defective Check, replace if necessary.
Harness for overboil thermostat is See chap. 5A Freshbrew / Instant water
defective system.
Temperature sensor is defective Check, replace if necessary.
Harness for temperature sensor is See chap. 5A Water system.
defective
Whipper xx error This message indicates a problem with one of the whipper motors causing
(log book only) the machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the
credit display.

Defective whipper motor Check motor, replace if necessary.
See chap. 5C Dosing system.
control.
Whipper xx This message indicates an overload of one of the whippers causing the
overload machine to stop operating. The message [Out of service] appears in the
(logbook only) credit display.
3 - 16 August, 2007

Instant ingredient system blocked up Clean Instant ingredient system
(whipper, mixing funnel, powder trap).
Foreign body blocking instant ingredient Remove foreign body.
system
August, 2007 3 - 17
3.2 Troubleshooting - Events not indicated in display
Introduction This section describes errors that are not indicated in the credit display and
Event log book, and suggestions for remedy.
Machine is out of
function Possible cause Remedy
no display Power supply interrupted Check the power supply.
Main switch defective Check the main switch, replace if
necessary.
Power supply cable defective Check, replace if necessary.
control.
Plug contact fault Check contacts, replace if necessary.
Fuse defective Check the power supply, replace the
fuse if necessary.
control.
No drinks
delivered Possible cause Remedy
Harness or sensor for water level Check, descale or replace if necessary.
control blocked by limescale build-up or See chap. 5A Water system.
incorrectly installed
Water in hose between bottom of boiler Empty hose into waste bucket.
and overflow thermostat See chap. 5A Water system.
Water system Note: It is important that the possible causes be checked in the order listed
overflows in the table.
Open the machine, leave the power supply on and the water
tap open. Remove cover at boiler, see chap 5A Water system,
and check for the following types of errors:

Inlet valve defective Check valve by removing one of the
terminals from the inlet valve.
• If the problem persists, replace the
inlet valve. See chap. 5A Water
system.
• If the water stops running, the valve
is ok.
Harness or sensor for water level Check, descale or replace if necessary.
control blocked by limescale build-up or See chap. 5A Water system.
incorrectly installed
3 - 18 August, 2007

Short-circuit on printed circuit board Using a voltmeter, measure voltage
across inlet valve terminal.
A constant voltage (of 24 V DC)
indicates a controller fault. Change the
VMC.
control.
Coins stuck
Coin may be stuck in the coin Press the coin return button.
mechanism
Coin track dirty or greasy Open coin rejector and clean coin track.
See manual for coin mechanism.
Foreign body stuck in coin track Open coin rejector and remove foreign
body.
See manual for coin mechanism.
Drinks are too cold

Wrong temperature setting Readjust temperature setting either via
the Technician menu, see chap. 4
Programming, or from a pc.
The water quantity

delivered is too Possible cause Remedy
low or irregular Boiler blocked by limescale build-up or Check boiler and descale, if required, or
defective replace.
See chap. 5A Water system
Water supply lines are blocked Check the water supply lines and clean
them if required.
Water valves are incorrectly calibrated Calibrate the water valves either via the
Technician menu, see chap. 4
Programming, or from a pc.
No water is
dispensed Possible cause Remedy
Water supply lines are blocked Check the water supply lines and clean
them if required.
August, 2007 3 - 19
Only water is dis-

pensed Possible cause Remedy
Canister is empty Refill.
Canister dislocated Relocate canister.
Blocked up mixing funnels Check, and clean if necessary.
Quantity of drink is
inadequate Possible cause Remedy
Ingredient residue blocking funnel/ Clean/replace blocked component(s).
whipper housing/delivery tube
Dispensing hose has a kink Check hoses.
Install hose of correct length.
Delivered coffee is
not whipped Possible cause Remedy
Mixing unit dirty Clean the mixing unit.
Whipper motor defective Check the motor and replace if
necessary.
See chap. 5C Dosing system
Flavour of drink
unsatisfactory Possible cause Remedy
Wrong ingredients Use correct ingredients, i.e. correct
whitener for coffee and tea.
Dispensing system dirty Clean/replace components.
Expiry date overdue Replace ingredients.
Ingredients are
moist and become Possible cause Remedy
lumpy in canisters Steam rising from mixing funnel Working from outside, remove dust
from the grille at rear of machine or,
from inside, remove dust from fan.
See chap. 5G Housing.
Powder traps or suction hoses blocked Check powder traps and their suction
hoses. Clean if necessary.
Mixing system
overflows Possible cause Remedy
Mixing unit blocked • Clean or replace blocked part or
parts. Check if they are positioned
correctly.
• Check powder traps and corre-
sponding extraction tubes.
3 - 20 August, 2007
Leak in mixing
system Possible cause Remedy
Funnel/Whipper housing not correctly Reinstall and reconnect components.
connected
Seal for whipper housing leaking or not Replace seal.
installed
Machine does not

block when bucket Possible cause Remedy
is full Foreign body blocking sensors for Clean sensors.
buckets
Sensors not in buckets Reposition sensors (sensor must be in
bucket).
Sensor defective Replace sensor.
Liquid escaping
from vending Possible cause Remedy
machine Bucket/canister/whipper housing/mixing Install component or components
funnels/delivery hoses not correctly correctly.
inserted
Sensor(s) not in bucket(s) Reposition sensor(s) (sensor must be in
bucket).
August, 2007 3 - 21
3 - 22 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Programming
Table of contents
Programming 4
Menu navigation 4.1

Navigation buttons and display 4.1.1
Button functions 4.1.2
Short cuts 4.1.3
Operator menu 4.2

Purpose of the Operator menu 4.2.1
How to access the Operator menu 4.2.2
Submenus of the Operator menu 4.2.3
Operator menu flow 4.2.4
Descriptions of Operator menu items 4.2.5-4.2.13
Technician menu 4.3

Purpose of the Technician menu 4.3.1
How to access the Technician menu 4.3.2
Submenus of the Technician menu 4.3.3
Technician menu flow 4.3.4
Descriptions of Technician menu items 4.3.5-4.3.19
Appendices 4.4
File system clean-up 4.4.1
August, 2007 4-1

4-2 August, 2007

4 Programming
Software version This chapter describes the 7600 menu system, software release 6.9.
Models included All standard models of the 7600 series (ES, FB and IN) as well as country
specific variants are included in the manual. Country specific features are
marked with an asterisk *.
4.1 Menu navigation
Introduction In this section the menu system and the way to find your way through it is
introduced.
The following topics are covered:

• Presentation of the navigation buttons and the display, see below.
• Description of the various functions of the four navigation buttons in
the menu system, see page 4-5.
4.1.1 Navigation buttons and display
Navigation buttons When the machine is in Menu selection mode, the four pre-selection
buttons in the top row of the selection panel are used for retrieval of data
and for settings, see illustration on next page.
Display The display shows the current menu in the first line, and lists the available
submenus below.
The bottom line indicates the functions of the four navigation buttons, e.g.
^, V, Sel, Esc. The functions of the buttons depend on which actions are
needed.
A selection marker * in front of a menu or submenu shows which menu

item will be selected when [Sel] is pressed.
August, 2007 4-3

Illustration
----CASH ACTION----
*Cash collected
Manual filling
^ v Sel Esc
The display shows the current

functions of the navigation buttons.
keypad If the vending machine is equipped with a keypad instead of a selection

alternative panel, the four keypad buttons 8, 9, E and C can be used as alternative menu
navigation and programming buttons.
The four keypad buttons function in exactly the same way as the pre-
selection buttons and can be used instead of or in a combination with these.
Illustration
----CASH ACTION----
*Cash collected
Manual filling
^ v Sel Esc
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Alternative menu navigation buttons
0 E C on machines with keypad.
4-4 August, 2007

Table 1 This table shows the correspondence between the four pre-selection
buttons and the keypad buttons.
Keypad navigation buttons
8 9 8 9
E C E C
8 9 8 9
E C E C
4.1.1 Button functions
Introduction The two tables below show the functions of the navigation buttons. The
functions vary according to which part of the menu system you are in and
which options are at hand.
The bottom line of the display always indicates the current functions of the
keys.
Table 1 This table describes how the four pre-selection buttons are used for
navigation in the menu system.
Display Button Function

Up button.
The button is used to
----SALES AUDIT---- move from one menu
*Total number item to the one above
Total turnover
^ v Sel Esc within a menu (e.g.
from [Total turnover] to
[Total number] in the
Sales audit menu).
Down button.
----SALES AUDIT---- move from one menu
*Total number item to the one below
Total turnover
^ v Sel Esc
within a menu (e.g.
from [Total number] to
[Total turnover] in the
Sales audit menu).
August, 2007 4-5


Select button.
With this button you
----SALES AUDIT---- select the menu item
*Total number indicated by the
Total turnover
^ v Sel Esc
selection marker [*], i.e.
you either move one
level further into the
menu system or
activate a function.
Escape button.
----SALES AUDIT---- move back one level in
*Total number the menu system, i.e.
Total turnover opposite of the Select
^ v Sel Esc
button.
Table 2 This table describes how the buttons are used to enter or change numbers,
e.g., price or quantity settings.

Minus button.
Price: [Drink] The button is used to
*Set price: xx.xx
decrease a numeric
(-) (+) -> OK value in increments of
one.
Plus button.
*Set price: xx.xx increase a numeric
(-) (+) -> OK value in increments of
one.
Next button
*Set price: xx.xx continue to the next
(-) (+) -> OK letter or digit, e.g., in
price setting menus.
OK button
Pressing the button will
Price: [Drink] save changes to
*Set price: xx.xx
settings in the system.
(-) (+) -> OK
4-6 August, 2007

Example This table illustrates how you change a price setting in the machine.
Example: Change price of a drink from 1.25 to 1.50.
Step Action Display

1. Navigate to [Price per drink] in the
Basic operations menu and press Price Cappuccino
[Sel]. Set price: 01.25
Press [v] one or more times to find
(-) (+) -> OK
the name of the drink and press
[Sel].
2. Press [->] twice to move the
cursor to the digit [2]. Price Cappuccino
Press [+] three times. The display Set price: 01.55
now reads 1.55
(-) (+) -> OK
3. Press [->] once to move to the

next digit. Price Cappuccino
Press [-] five times to decrease Set price: 01.50
the number by 5.
(-) (+) -> OK
The display now reads 1.50.
4. Press [OK] to save the new price
in the system
Coffee white
*Cappuccino
Café latte
^ v Sel Esc
4.1.2 Short cuts
Introduction Some functions of the menu system can be reached quickly through short
cuts.
Using a short cut Press one of the buttons 1 to 4 to enter a function via a short cut. The
following functions can be reached:
• Rinse functions, see 4.2.5, Filling / Clean, on page 4-34
• Test functions, see 4.2.13, Test menu, on page 4-67
• Counters, see 4.2.6, Counters menu, on page 4-35
• Menu: jumps to the top of the menu system, see 4.2.4, Operator menu
flow, on page 4-12
August, 2007 4-7

Example This table shows how the Rinse functions are reached via the short cut
menu.
Step Action Display
1. Unlock and open the door.

The display will show the short cut -----SHORTCUTS-----
selection window. *(1)=Rinse 3=Counter
(2)=Test 4=Menu
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2. Press [1]
-------RINSE-------
* Rinse total machine
Rinse with stop
and close the door to go directly to ^ v Sel Esc

the Rinse menu.
From here you can select one of the

available rinse functions.
4-8 August, 2007

4.2 Operator menu
4.2.1 Purpose of the Operator menu
Purpose The Operator menu is intended for persons with a daily responsibility for
the running and maintenance of the machine e.g. cleaning, setting up
prices, managing sales turnover and performing light adjustments to
ensure a faultless operation.
4.2.2 How to access the Operator menu
Introduction There are two different ways to access the Operator menu:
• If the menu system does not require a password at the operator level,
follow the instructions in 4.2.2.1
• If the menu system requires a password at the operator level, follow the
instructions in 4.2.2.2.
4.2.2.1 How to access the Operator menu without a password
Accessing the Follow the steps below to access the Operator menu.
Operator menu
Step Action Display
The display now shows a short cut -----SHORTCUTS-----

*(1)=Rinse 3=Counter
selection window. (2)=Test 4=Menu
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2. Press [4] to proceed to the [MENU

SELECTION] window.
--MENU SELECTION---
*Operator
The selection marker *, by default, is Technician
^ v Sel ESC
placed next to [Operator].
3. Press [Sel] to access the Operator menu.
-----OPERATOR------
*Filling/Clean
Counters
^ v Sel Esc
August, 2007 4-9

Returning to vend 1 Close the door.

mode 2 Press [Esc] once. Wait for a maximum of 20 seconds till the machine is
back in vend mode.
4.2.2.2 How to access the Operator menu with a password
Accessing the Follow the steps below to access the Operator menu.
Operator menu
Step Action Display

(1) (2) (3) (4)
2. Press [4] to proceed to the [Enter

password] window.
Enter password
(XXXX):0000
(-) (+) -> OK
3. Enter the four-digit password, and press

[OK].
--MENU SELECTION---
*Test
The [MENU SELECTION] window Operator
appears. The selection marker *, by ^ v SEL ESC
default, is placed next to [Test].
4. Press [v] then [Sel] to access the

Operator menu.
-----OPERATOR------
*Filling/Clean
Counters
^ v Sel Esc
Returning to vend 1 Close the door.

mode 2 Press [Esc] once. Wait for a maximum of 20 seconds till the machine is
back in vend mode.
4 - 10 August, 2007
4.2.3 Submenus of the Operator menu
Presentation This table gives a short presentation of the main contents of the Operator
menu.
The Operator menu can be accessed by all users.
Menu Purpose
Filling / Clean Assists in rinsing the machine.
Counters Displays recorded data regarding

• the number of drinks dispensed
• turnover
• cash balance
and enables resetting and printing of those
counters.
Cash action Assists in emptying and refilling coin tubes.
Basic operations Assists in price and quantity settings for the
individual drinks.
Service information Contains event reports and machine data.
Machine settings Allows setting of the machine according to
individual preferences.
ES system test Allows testing of the ES dispensing and
(ES machines only) dosing system.
Stirrer/Sugar test * Allows testing of the sugar and stirrer
dispensing system.
Test Allows testing of drinks and cup drop without
affecting the sales counters.
August, 2007 4 - 11
4.2.4 Operator menu flow
This diagram displays the full flow of the Operator menu.
Features marked Menu items that are marked with an asterisk * are special features which
with * are not available in all machines/countries.
Operator
Filling/Clean
Rinse
Rinse Total Machine
Rinse With Stop FB1 (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Rinse FB2 (No stop) (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Rinse With Stop FB2 (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Rinse Water
Counters
Sales Audit
Total number, nres
Total turnover,nres
Total number, res
Total turnover,res
No. per drink, nres
No. per drink, res
Turn. p. drink,nres
Turn. p. drink,res
MB per drink, nres
MB per drink, res
No. per group, nres
No. per group, res
Turn. p. group,nres
Turn. p. group,res
Card audit
No. per drink, nres
No. per drink, res
Turn. p. drink,nres
Turn. p. drink,res
Own cup audit
No. per drink, nres
No. per drink, res
Cash Audit
Money to tubes
Money to cash box
Number of tokens
Collected money
Manually filled
Manually delivered
Value overpay
Dispensed change
Cashless Audit
Revalued amount
4 - 12 August, 2007
Cup audit
Cup number, nres
Cup turnover, nres
Cup number, res
Cup turnover, res
Free vend audit
Total no. ,nres
Total no. ,res
No. per drink, nres
No. per drink, res
No. per group, nres
No. per group, res
MB. discount audit
MB. number, nres
MB. turnover, nres
MB. number, res
MB. turnover, res
Discount key audit
D.Key number ,nres
D.Key turnov. ,nres
D.Key number ,res
D.Key turnov. ,res
Time Discount audit
T.Disc number ,nres
T.Disc turnov.,nres
T.Disc number ,res
T.Disc turnov.,res
Step prices audit
SP. turnover ,nres
SP. turnover ,res
Test Audit
Test no. ,nres
Test no. ,res
No. per group, nres
No. per group, res
Reset Counters
Reset sales audit
Reset cash audit
Reset Test audit
Printing
Not Resetable
Resetable
Cash action
Cash collected
Dispense coins
Manual filling
Reset tube contents
August, 2007 4 - 13
Basic operations
Change prices
Global price
Price per cup
Price per drink
Step prices Step price on/off
Set Step price(s)
Global stepprice (+)
Global stepprice (-)
Change quantities
Drink On/Off
Autobar Selection *
Unik selec. On/Off *
Select Unik sel. *
Change group
Service information
Event log book
Reset log book
Program versions
Show menufile ver.
Machine settings
Set Freevend,global
Set Beep mode
Clock on display
Temp. on display
ES Temp. on display (ES only)
Set rinse time
Set rinse day(s)
Set date and time
Key discount
Time discount
Set Time discount
Set Day(s)
Set Time
Machine Info
Machine Code
Operator Code
Show Install. Date
Set Install. Date
Energy saving
Save Energy On/Off
Set Day(s)
Set Time
Set Temperature
Set Doorlight
Set counters on/off
Selfcheck setting
Gr. counters on/off
100% discount mode
4 - 14 August, 2007
ES System test
ES no accesories (ES only)
ES accessories only (ES only)
Stirrer/Sugar test *
Test
Complete selections
Drop Cup
Standard Cup *
InCup 1 *
InCup 2 *
August, 2007 4 - 15
The following pages contain the individual submenus of the Operator menu. For further information about the menus, please refer to sections indicated
by numbers in dark boxes.
Filling / Clean menu

4.2.5 4.2.5.1
Preparing rinse
Filling / Clean Rinse Rinse Total Machine Close the door Please place pot please wait...
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
FB only Rinse with stop FB1 Please place pot Add cleaning agent
and close door
Sel Esc
V ^
Rinse FB2 (nostop) Ready to rinse

FB only Insert jug
Sel Esc
V ^
FB only Rinse with stop FB2 Please place pot Add cleaning agent
and close door
Sel Esc
V ^
Rinse Water
Rinse water
Sel Esc Water QUIT
Short cuts for pc users
If you are viewing this manual on a computer

screen, simply place your cursor on any of the
numbers in dark boxes and click to go directly to
the section that describes the menu in question.
To go back, rightclick and select “Go to previous

view”.
4 - 16 August, 2007
Counters menu
4.2.6 4.2.6.1
Number sold, nres
Counters Sales audit Total number, nres
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc Total: xxxxxxx
V ^ OK
Turnover, nres
Total turnover, nres
Total: 00000.00
SelV Esc
^ OK
V ^
Number sold, res

Total number, res Total: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc OK
V ^
Turnover, res
Total turnover, res Total: 0000000.00
Sel Esc OK
V ^
Number sold of
No. per drink, nres Coffee Coffee
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: xxxxxxx
V ^ OK
Number sold of
No. per drink, res Coffee Coffee
V ^ V ^ OK
Turnover of
Turn. p. drink, nres Coffee Coffee
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: 0000000.00
V ^ OK
Turnover of
Turn. p. drink, res Coffee Coffee
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: 000000 0.00
V ^ OK
Number sold of :
MB. per drink, nres Coffee Coffee
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: 000000000
V ^ OK
Number sold of :
MB. per drink, res Coffee Coffee
V ^ OK
Number sold of:
No. per group, nres GROUP 1 GROUP 1
V ^ OK
Number sold of:
No. per group, res GROUP 1 GROUP 1
Cash audit Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: 000000000
OK
August, 2007 4 - 17
Turnover of:
Turn. p. group, nres GROUP 1 GROUP 1
V ^ OK
Turnover of:
Turn. p. group, res GROUP 1 GROUP 1
V ^ OK
No. (card) sold of:
Card audit No. per drink, nres Coffee Coffee
Sel Esc Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: xxxxxxx
V ^ OK
No. (card) sold of:
V ^ OK
Turnover (card) of:
V ^ V ^
Turn p. drink, nres Coffee Coffee
V ^ OK
Turnover (card) of:
Turn p. drink, res Coffee Coffee
V ^ Sel Esc Total: 000000 0.00
Sel Esc
No. (own cup) of:

Own cup audit No. per drink, nres Coffee Coffee
Sel Esc Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Total: xxxxxxx
V ^ OK
No. (own cup) of:
OK
4.2.6.2
Money to tubes
Cash audit Money to tubes
Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Money to cash box Money to cash box

Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc
OK
Number of tokens MDB/ICP **

Number of tokens
V ^ Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc
V ^ OK
Collected money
Collected money
Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Manually filled
Manually filled MDB/ICP, BDV **
Amount: 00000.00
** Option applicable only to the Sel Esc
OK
said coin mechanisms V ^
Cashless audit Manually delivered
4 - 18 August, 2007
Manually delivered Manually delivered

Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc
V ^ OK
Value overpay
Value overpay
Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Dispensed change
Dispensed change
Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc OK
4.2.6.3
Revalued money
Cashless audit Revalued amount
Amount: 00000.00
Sel Esc Sel Esc
OK
V ^
4.2.6.4
Cups dispensed
Cup audit Cup number, nres
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Cup turnover, nres

Cup turnover, nres
Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
V ^
Cups dispensed, res
Cup number, res
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Cup turnover, nres

Cup turnover, res
Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
OK
4.2.6.5
Freevend no., nres
Freevend audit Total no., nres
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Freevend no., res

Total no., res
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc
OK
V ^
Number sold of:

V ^ No. per drink, nres Coffee Coffee
V ^ OK
Number sold of:
V ^ OK
Number sold of:
V ^ OK
Number sold of:
MB. discount audit No. per group, res GROUP 1 GROUP 1
OK
August, 2007 4 - 19
4.2.6.6
Multibrew, nres
MB. discount audit MB. number, nres
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
MB. turnover, nres Multibrew, nres

Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
V ^ OK
V ^ Multibrew, res
MB. number, res
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Multibrew, res
MB. turnover, res
Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
OK
4.2.6.7
Discount key, nres
Discount key audit D.key number, nres
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
D.key turnover, nres Discount key , nres

Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
V ^ OK
V ^
Discount key, res

D.key number, res
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Discount key, res

D.key turnover, res
Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
OK
4.2.6.8
Time Discount, nres
Time Discount audit T. Disc number, nres
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
T. Disc turnov., nres Time Discount , nres

Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
V ^ OK
Time Discount, res

V ^ T. Disc number, res
Number: xxxxxxx
Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Time Discount, res

T. Disc turnov., res
Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc
OK
Step prices audit
4 - 20 August, 2007
4.2.6.9
Step price, nres. (+) Step price, nres. (-)
Step prices audit Sp. turnover, nres
Amount: 0000000.00 Amount: 0000000.00
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
OK
Sp. turnover, res Step price, res. (+) Step price, res. (-)
Amount: 0000000.00 Amount: 0000000-00
Sel Esc
V ^ OK
4.2.6.10
Number sold of Coff
Test audit Test no., nres Coffee
Total: xxxxx
Sel Esc Sel Esc V ^
Sel Esc OK
V ^
Number sold of Coff

Test no., res Coffee
Total: xxxxx
Sel Esc V ^
Sel Esc OK
V ^
Number sold of:

V ^
Sel Esc V ^
Sel Esc Total: xxxxx
OK
V ^
Number sold of:

No. per group, res GROUP 1 GROUP 1
Sel Esc V ^
Sel Esc Total: xxxxx
OK
4.2.6.11
Reset sales audit Reset of Sales
Reset counters Reset sales audit
Sel Esc Sel Esc Continue? audit finished
Esc OK
V ^
Reset Cash audit Reset of Cash

Reset Cash audit
V ^ Sel Esc Continue? audit finished
Esc OK
V ^
Reset Test audit Reset of Test

Reset Test audit
Sel Esc Continue? audit finished
Esc OK
Printing
August, 2007 4 - 21
4.2.6.12
Please wait
Printing audit
Printing Not resettable Overall printing
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc Continue? in progress
Esc OK
V ^
Printing audit Please wait

Selections counters printing
Continue?
SelV Esc in progress
^ Esc OK
V ^
Please wait
Printing audit
Time bands printing
Continue? in progress
Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^

Free vend printing
Continue?
Sel Esc Esc OK in progress
V ^

Discounts printing
Continue?
V ^
^ Esc OK
V ^
Please wait
Printing audit
Errors printing
Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^

Cash audit printing
Continue?
V ^

Test audit printing
Continue?
V ^

Group Counters printing
Continue?
Resettable
4 - 22 August, 2007
Please wait
Printing audit
Resettable Overall printing
Sel Esc Sel Esc Continue? in progress
Esc OK
V ^

Selections counters printing
Continue?
^ Esc OK
V ^
Please wait
Printing audit
Time bands printing
Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^

Free vend printing
Continue?
V ^

Discounts printing
Continue?
^ Esc OK
V ^
Please wait
Printing audit
Errors printing
Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^

Cash audit printing
Continue?
V ^

Test audit printing
Continue?
V ^

Group Counters printing
Continue?
August, 2007 4 - 23
Cash action menu

4.2.7 4.2.7.1
Press <OK> if Cash audit is now
Cash action Cash collected
cash was collected adjusted
Sel Esc Sel Esc
Esc OK
V ^
4.2.7.2
Select coin Number of coins
Dispense coins MDB/ICP, BDV **
(1-16): 01 (0-99): 01
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK (+) OK Esc
V ^
4.2.7.3
Press <OK> to Cash audit is now
Manual filling MDB/ICP, BDV **
adjust audit adjusted
Sel Esc
Esc OK
V ^
Press <OK> to Cash audit is now

Reset tube contents MDB/ICP, BDV **
reset adjusted
Sel Esc
Esc OK
** Option applicable only to the

said coin mechanisms
4 - 24 August, 2007
Basic operations menu

4.2.8 4.2.8.1
Global price:
Basic operations Change prices Global price
Set value: 0000.00
V ^
(+) Esc OK
Price on cup
Price per cup Set value: 0000.00
SelV Esc
^
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Price: Coffee
Price per drink Coffee Value: 0000.00
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Step price(s):
Step prices Step price On/Off
(Off=0, On=1): 0
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Set step price(s) Coffee Preselection 1(+)

V ^ Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
V ^
Set step price
Value: 00.00
Global price (+) (-) (+) OK
Global step price (+)
Value: 00.00
Sel Esc
(+) Esc OK
V ^
Global price (-)

Global step price (-)
Value: 00.00
Sel Esc
(+) Esc OK
4.2.8.2 Item selected

(water 1)
Change quantities Coffee Water 1
0000120
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc V ^
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.2.8.3 Drink: Coffee

Drink On/Off Coffee Drink On/Off
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Off=0/On=1: 1
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Autobar Selection
August, 2007 4 - 25
4.2.8.4
* Autobar Selection Unik selec. On/Off
Unik Selection
(Off=0, On=1): 0
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Espresso
Select Unik sel. Espresso
V ^ Selected
SelV Esc
^ V ^ Sel Esc
4.2.8.5
Coffee Set Group
Change group Coffee [GROUP 1]
[ GROUP 1]
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Yes No
* Special feature. Not available

in all 7600 machines
4 - 26 August, 2007
29
Service information menu
4.2.9 4.2.9.1 Event log book
Temperature low
Service information Event log book F: ddmm yyyy hh.mm
Sel Esc Sel Esc L: ddmm yyyy hh.mm (xx)
V ^
V ^ Esc
4.2.9.2
Reset log book
Reset log book
continue ?
Sel Esc
Esc OK
V ^
4.2.9.3
Program versions CPU xxxx dd/mm 'yy xx
Sel Esc Esc
V ^
SPC xxxx dd/mm 'yy xx

Esc
V ^
VMC xxxx dd/mm 'yy xx

V ^ Esc
V ^
FB xxxx dd/mm 'yy xx

Esc
4.2.9.4
Menu file version:
Show menufile ver.
xxxxxx-xx-xx-xxxx-xx.ini
Sel Esc
OK
August, 2007 4 - 27
Machine settings menu

4.2.10 4.2.10.1
Global freevend
Machine settings Set freevend, global
(Off=0, On=1) 1
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.2.10.2
Beep mode
Set beep mode
(Off=0, On=1) 1
SelV Esc
^
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.2.10.3
Clock on display
Clock on display
(Off=0, On=1) 1
Sel Esc
V ^
(-) (+) Esc OK
4.2.10.4
Temp. on display
Temp. on display
(Off=0, On=1) 1
SelV Esc
^
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.2.10.5
ES Temp. on display
ES only ES Temp. on display
(Off=0, On=1) 1
SelV Esc
^
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.2.10.6
Period 1
Set rinse time Period 1 Set time: 23:30
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.2.10.7 Set day, Period 1

Set rinse day(s) Period 1 (Mo=0, Su=1, All=7): 1
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.2.10.8
Set year
Set date and time Set year (04)
Set value: 04
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set month
Set month (05)
Set value: 05
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set day
Set day (23)
V ^
Set value: 23
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set hour
Set hour (09)
Set value: 09
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set minute
Key discount Set minute (15)
Set value: 15
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
4 - 28 August, 2007
4.2.10.9
Set key discount
Key discount
(0-100): 000
Sel Esc
V ^
(-) (+) OK
4.2.10.10
Set Time discount
Time discount Set Time discount
(0-100): 020
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set Start Day: Set end day:

Set Day(s) Period 1 (Mo=0, Su=6, All=7): 1 (Mo=0, Su=6, All=7): 1
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc (-) (+) Esc OK (-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
V ^
Set start time: Set end time:

Set Time Period 1 Time: 00:00 Time: 00:00
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK (-) (+) OK
4.2.10.11
------MACHINE CODE-----
Machine info Machine code
Set value: 000000000
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
-----OPERATOR CODE---
Operator code
Set value: 000000
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
--INSTALLATION DATE---
Show install date
V ^
DD/MM/YYYY
Sel Esc
OK
V ^
-----SET NEW DATE-----

Set install date
DD/MM/YYYY
Sel Esc
Esc OK
Energy saving
August, 2007 4 - 29
4.2.10.12
Save energy
Energy saving Save energy On/Off
1=On / 0=Off: 1
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Set start day: Set end day:

Set day(s) Period 1 (Mo=0, Su=6, All=7): 1 (Mo=0, Su=6, All=7): 1
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK (-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Set start time: Set end time:

V ^
Set time Period 1 Time: 00:00 Time: 00:00
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK (-) (+) OK
V ^
Set temperature
Set temperature
Sel Esc Temp.: 000
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set doorlight
Set doorlight
1=On / 0=Off: 1
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
4.2.10.13
Counter visibility
Set counters on/off
(Off=0, On=1): 1
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.2.10.14
Selfchecking time
Selfcheck setting
Time: 00:00
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.2.10.15
Group counters
Gr. counters on/off
visibility
Sel Esc
(Off=0, On=1): 1
V ^ (-) (+) Esc OK
4.2.10.16
100 p.c. discount
100% discount mode
as free vend
Sel Esc
(Off=0, On=1): 0
(-) (+) Esc OK
4 - 30 August, 2007
ES System Test menu

(ES machines only)
Close the door

4.2.11 4.2.11.1
No accessories test Running...
ES System Test ES no accessories
Continue? Please wait...
Sel Esc Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^
4.2.11.2
Accessory only Running...
ES accessories only
Sel Esc
OK Esc
August, 2007 4 - 31
* Stirrer/Sugar test
4.2.12
Stirrer/Sugar disp. Running...
Stirrer/Sugar test Continue? Please wait...
Sel Esc Esc OK

4 - 32 August, 2007
Test menu
4.2.13 4.2.13.1
Select drink DISPENSING TEST
Test Complete selections Close the door DISPENSING TEST
from selection panel Coffee w. sugar
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
4.2.13.2
Drop cup Drop Cup test
Close the door Please wait...
Continue ?
Sel Esc
Esc OK
Test menu * (Machines with Incup module)

4.2.13 4.2.13.1
Select drink DISPENSING TEST
Test Complete selections Close the door DISPENSING TEST
from selection panel Coffee w. sugar
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
4.2.13.2
Drop cup Standard Cup Close the door Dropping cup
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
InCup 1 Close the door Dropping cup

Sel Esc
V ^

* Special feature. Not available Sel Esc
August, 2007 4 - 33
4.2.5 Filling / Clean
Introduction The Filling / Clean functions assist in rinsing the machine.
Options The Filling / Clean menu includes the following option:

• Rinse, see 4.2.5.1
4.2.5.1 Rinse
The Rinse submenus assist in rinsing the machine.

-------RINSE-------
* Rinse total machine
Rinse with stop
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Rinse total machine To be activated when a complete rinse of the
machine’s dispensing system is required.
Rinse with stop FB1 To be activated when a rinse or descaling of
(FB machines only) brewer 1 is required (only FB machines).
Cleaning or descaling agent may be added to

brewer 1 during this rinse procedure.
Rinse FB2 (no stop) To be activated when a rinse of brewer 2 is
(FB machines only) required (only FB machines with two brewers).
Cleaning or descaling agent cannot be added

during this rinse procedure.
Rinse with stop FB2 To be activated when a rinse or descaling of
(FB machines only) brewer 2 is required (only FB machines with two
brewers).
Cleaning or descaling agent may be added to

brewer 2 during this rinse procedure.
Rinse water Allows dispensing of water for cleaning of the
machine. The water will be dispensed at the
current water temperature in the boiler.
Note: To dispense rinse water, the service key

must be inserted.
Please refer to the Operator manual for a detailed explanation of the rinse
procedures.
4 - 34 August, 2007
4.2.6 Counters menu
Introduction The Counters menu stores detailed information regarding the number of
drinks dispensed and the turnover.
Furthermore, the Counters menu enables resetting of the individual

counters and printing of reports.
Options The Counters menu includes the following options:

• Sales audit, see 4.2.6.1
• Cash audit, see 4.2.6.2
• Cashless audit, see 4.2.6.3
• Cup audit, see 4.2.6.4
• Free vend audit, see 4.2.6.5
• MB. discount audit, see 4.2.6.6
• Discount key audit, see 4.2.6.7
• Time discount audit, see 4.2.6.8
• Step prices counter, see 4.2.6.9
• Test audit, see 4.2.6.10
• Reset counters, see 4.2.6.11
• Printing, see 4.2.6.12
4.2.6.1 Sales audit
The options of the Sales audit menu are described in this table.
------COUNTERS------
* Sales audit
Cash audit Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Total number, nres Shows the total number of drinks dispensed since
the machine was put into operation.
(Non-resettable counter.)
Total turnover, nres Shows the total amount sold for since the machine
was put into operation.
(Non-resettable counters.)
Total number, res Shows the total number of drinks dispensed since
the last Sales audit resetting
Total turnover, res Shows the total amount sold for since the last
Sales audit resetting.
No. p. drink, nres Shows the number of drinks sold per type of drink
since the machine was put into operation.
No. p. drink, res Shows the number of drinks sold per type of drink
since the last Sales audit resetting.
Turn. p. drink, nres Shows the turnover per type of drink since the
machine was put into operation.
August, 2007 4 - 35
Submenu Description
Turn. p. drink, res Shows the turnover per type of drink since the last
MB. per drink. nres Shows, per type of drink, the number of drinks
sold as multibrew since the machine was put into
operation.
MB. per drink, res Shows, per type of drink, the number of drinks
sold as multibrew since the last Sales audit
resetting.
No. p. group, nres Shows the number of drinks sold per group since
the machine was put into operation.
No. p. group, res Shows the number of drinks sold per group since
the last Sales audit resetting.
Turn. p. group, nres Shows the turnover per group since the machine
was put into operation.
Turn. p. group, res Shows the turnover per group since the last Sales
audit resetting.
Card audit Shows the turnover on card transactions.
The card turnover is divided into the following sub-
counters:
• No per drink, nres: Number of card
transactions sorted per type of drink (non-
resettable counter).
• No per drink, res: Number of card transactions
sorted per type of drink (resettable counter).
• Turnover per drink, nres: Turnover on card
transactions sorted per type of drink (non-
resettable counter).
• Turnover per drink, res: Turnover on card
transactions sorted per type of drink
(resettable counter).
Own cup audit Shows the number of dispensings where
customers have used own cup.
The Own cup audit counter has two sub-counters,

a non-resettable and a resettable.
Test vends are not registered in the Sales audit counters. See 4.2.6.10, Test
audit, on page 4-41.
4 - 36 August, 2007
4.2.6.2 Cash audit
The options of the Cash audit menu are described in this table.
Sales audit
* Cash audit Submenu Description
Cashless audit
^ v Sel Esc Money to tubes Shows the total amount of money routed to the
coin tubes since the last Cash audit resetting.
Money to cash box Shows the total amount of money routed to the
cash box since the last Cash audit resetting.
Coins are dropped into the cash box when the

matching coin tubes are full or if there is no coin
tube for the coin type inserted.
Number of tokens Shows the total number of tokens routed to the
Collected money Shows the amount of money removed from the
Precondition: The amount is registered only if the

removal of the cash has been electronically
recorded in the Cash collected menu, 4.2.7.1.
Manually filled Shows the amount of money which has been
(Applicable only if the inserted and registered as manually inserted
machine is equipped with change in the Manual filling menu, 4.2.7.3.
BDV or MDB/ICO coin
mechanism.)
Manually delivered Shows the amount of money which has been paid
out from the coin tubes when operators have
either pressed the coin dispense button on the
coin unit inside the machine or used the Dispense
coins menu, 4.2.7.2.
Value overpay Shows the amount of money which could not be
returned due to lack of coins in coin unit, i.e. when
one or more coin tubes have run low and the
display shows [Use exact change].
Dispensed change Shows the amount of money which has been paid
out as change to customers.
4.2.6.3 Cashless audit
The Cashless audit option is described in this table.

Cash audit
* Cashless audit Submenu Description
Cup audit
^ v Sel Esc Revalued amount Shows the total amount which has been inserted
in the machine to add value to cards.
August, 2007 4 - 37
4.2.6.4 Cup audit
The Cup audit menu gives an overview of the number and value of cups
Cashless audit
dispensed from the machine.
* Cup audit
Freevend audit
^ v Sel Esc The turnover is based on the cup price which is defined in the submenu
Price per cup, see 4.2.8, Basic operations menu, on page 4-46.
The menu consists of both resettable and non resettable counters.
Submenu Description
Cup number, nres Shows the total number of cups dispensed from
the machine since it was put into operation.
Cup turnover, nres Shows the total turnover on cups dispensed from
the machine since it was put into operation. (Non-
resettable counter.)
Cup number, res Shows the number of cups dispensed from the
machine since the last Sales audit resetting.
Cup turnover, res Shows the turnover on cups dispensed from the
machine since the last Sales audit resetting.
4.2.6.5 Freevend audit
The Free vend audit option keeps track of the number of drinks dispensed
Cup audit
for free when the machine is in Free vend mode.
* Freevend audit
MB. discount audit
^ v Sel Esc Free vend is turned on or off in the submenu Set Freevend, global, see
4.2.10, Machine settings menu, on page 4-53.
The menu consists of both resettable and non resettable counters.
Submenu Description
Total no., nres Shows the total number of free drinks dispensed
Total no., res Shows the total number of free drinks dispensed
No. per drink, nres Shows the number of free drinks dispensed per
type of drink since the machine was put into
operation.
No. per drink, res Shows the total number of free drinks dispensed
per type of drink since the last Sales audit
resetting.
4 - 38 August, 2007
Submenu Description
No. per group, nres Shows the number of free drinks dispensed per
group since the machine was put into operation.
No. per group, res Shows the total number of free drinks dispensed
per group since the last sales audit resetting.
4.2.6.6 MB. discount audit
The MB (multibrew) discount audit option makes it possible to view the

Freevend audit
number of drinks dispensed as multibrew and the total discount amount
* MB. discount audit
Discount key audit
given on multibrew vends.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
MB. number, nres Shows the total number of portions dispensed as
multibrew since the machine was put into
operation.
MB. turnover, nres Shows the total amount of discount granted on
multibrew vends since the machine was put into
operation.
MB. number, res Shows the total number of portions dispensed as
multibrew since the last Sales audit resetting.
MB. turnover, res Shows the total amount of discount granted on
multibrew vends since the last Sales audit
resetting.
4.2.6.7 Discount key audit
The Discount key audit option makes it possible to view the number of
MB. discount audit
drinks dispensed and the amount given as discount on discount key vends.
* Discount key audit
Time Discount audit
^ v Sel Esc Key discount is defined in the submenu Key discount, see 4.2.10, Machine
settings menu, on page 4-53.
Submenu Description
D. key number, nres Shows the total number of drinks dispensed at a
key discount since the machine was put into
operation.
August, 2007 4 - 39
Submenu Description
D. key turnover, nres Shows the total key discount amount granted
D. key number, res Shows the total number of drinks dispensed at a
key discount since the last Sales audit resetting.
D. key turnover, res Shows the total key discount amount granted
4.2.6.8 Time Discount audit
The Time discount audit option makes it possible to view the number of
Discount key audit
drinks dispensed and the amount given as discount during time discount
* Time Discount audit
Step prices audit
periods.
^ v Sel Esc
Time discount is defined in the submenu Time discount, see 4.2.10,
Machine settings menu, on page 4-53.
Submenu Description
T. Disc number, nres Shows the total number of drinks dispensed
during active time discount periods since the
machine was put into operation.
T. Disc turnov., nres Shows the total time discount amount granted
T. Disc number, res Shows the total number of drinks dispensed
during active time discount periods since the last
T. Disc turnov, res Shows the total time discount amount granted
4.2.6.9 Step prices audit
The Step prices audit options show the amounts that have been added to
Time Discount audit
and deducted from the standard drink prices due to pre-selections.
* Step prices audit
Test audit
^ v Sel Esc
4 - 40 August, 2007
Submenu Description
Sp. turnover, nres The first window [Step price, nres. (+)] shows the
total amount that has been added to standard
drink prices when customers have used a pre-
selection button to increase strength, amount of
sugar, whitener etc.
The second window [Step price, nres. (-)] shows

the total amount that has been deducted from
standard drink prices when customers have used
a pre-selection button to decrease strength,
amount of sugar, whitener etc.
Sp. turnover, res Same as above, but resettable counters.
The positive and negative amounts from the Step price audit are balanced
against the total turnover, see 4.2.6.1, Sales audit, on page 4-35.
4.2.6.10 Test audit
The Test audit options show how many test drinks have been dispensed.
Step prices audit
* Test audit
Reset counters
^ v Sel Esc Submenu Description
Test no., nres Shows the number of test drinks dispensed since
the machine was put into operation. Each type of
drink is shown separately.
Test no., res Shows the number of test drinks dispensed since
the last Test audit resetting. Each type of drink is
shown separately.
No. per group, nres Shows the number of test drinks dispensed per
group since the machine was put into operation.
No. per group, res Shows the total number of test drinks dispensed
per group since the last sales audit resetting.
August, 2007 4 - 41
4.2.6.11Reset counters
The options of the Reset counters menu are described in this table.
Test audit
* Reset counters Submenu Description
Printing
^ v Sel Esc Reset sales audit Resets the counters from the Sales audit,
Cashless audit, Cup audit, Freevend audit, MB.
discount audit, Discount key audit, Time discount
audit and Step price audit menus.
Reset Cash audit Resets the registrations from the Cash audit
menu, i.e. the amounts of money inserted into
coin tubes and cash box plus the amount removed
manually or paid out as change.
Reset Test audit Resets the Test audit counters.
4.2.6.12 Printing
The Printing menu provides a number of different reports on turnover data

Reset counters
and errors to print out on a printer connected to the machine.
* Printing
^ v Sel Esc The Printing menu is divided into two groups of counters, non-resettable
and resettable, respectively:
• All reports printed from the submenu Not resettable show the current
status of the selected counters in totals summed up from the day the
vending machine was put into operation.
• All reports printed from the submenu Resettable show the current sta-
tus of the selected counters in totals summed up from the last time the
counters were reset.
Non-resettable This table shows the options of the Printing menu. The submenus
and resettable Resettable and Not resettable are identical and are therefore described in
counters the same table.
Submenu Description
Overall Prints a report that includes all of the categories
mentioned below.
Selections counters Prints a report on a selection of counters including
• total number of drinks dispensed.
• total number of drinks dispensed per type of
drink.
4 - 42 August, 2007
Submenu Description
Time bands Prints a report that corresponds to the Selections
counters report (above) but divided into time
(This option still remains discount periods.
to be implemented.)
Free vend Prints a report on the number of free drinks
dispensed.
Discounts Prints a report on the total number of drinks sold
at a discount and the total discount amount
granted.
Errors Prints a report on event messages registered in
the Event log book.
(Registrations in the Event log book that are not

considered errors are omitted from this report.)
Cash audit Prints a report with details on the flow of cash in
and out of the vending machine:
• Money to tubes. See 4.2.6.2.
• Money to cash box. See 4.2.6.2.
• Collected money. See 4.2.6.2.
• Manually filled. See 4.2.6.2.
• Manually delivered. See 4.2.6.2.
• Value overpay. See 4.2.6.2.
• Dispensed change. (Amount of change paid
out to customers.) See 4.2.6.2.
• Value of bill in. (Total amount of money
inserted in the form of notes.)
• Revalued amount. See 4.2.6.3.
• Number of slugs. (Number of false coins
detected in the coin mechanism. Applies to
MDB coin mechanisms.)
• Number of token. (Number of free drinks
dispensed on tokens.)
Test audit Prints a report on the number of test drinks
dispensed. Each type of drink is shown
separately.
Group counters Prints a report on the number of drinks sold per
group.
All printed reports, furthermore, state the program versions, machine code,
operator code and the date of installation. See 4.2.10.11, Machine info, on
page 4-60 for further information.
August, 2007 4 - 43
4.2.7 Cash action menu
Introduction The Cash action menu is used to set handling of coins
Options The Cash action menu includes the following options:

• Cash collected, see 4.2.7.1
• Dispense coins, see 4.2.7.2
• Manual filling, see 4.2.7.3
• Reset tube contents, see 4.2.7.4
4.2.7.1 Cash collected
The Cash collected option is described in this table.

----CASH ACTION----
* Cash collected Submenu Description
Dispense coins
^ v Sel Esc Cash collected The Cash collected option is used to electronically
confirm the amount of money which is removed
manually from the cash box.
When [OK] is pressed the removed cash amount

is registered in the Cash audit menu under
Collected money and, subsequently, the Money to
cash box counter is reset to zero. See 4.2.6.2,
Cash audit, on page 4-37.
4.2.7.2 Dispense coins
The Dispense coins option is used to manually pay out a number of coins
Cash collected
from the coin tubes of the coin unit.
* Dispense coins
Manual filling
^ v Sel Esc Note: The option is applicable if the vending machine is equipped with a
BDV or an MDB/ICP coin mechanism. If the machine is equipped with an
Executive coin unit, coins can be paid out from the coin tubes by pressing
the coin dispense button on the coin unit.
Submenu Description
Dispense coins 1. Select a coin number (1-16)
2. Enter the number of coins (1-99) to be paid out.
The coins are paid out into the coin return cup.
4 - 44 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series0 Programming
4.2.7.3 Manual filling
The Manual filling option is described in this table.

Dispense coins
* Manual filling
Reset tube contents
Note: The option is applicable only if the vending machine is equipped
^ v Sel Esc with a BDV or an MDB/ICP coin mechanism.
Submenu Description
Manual filling This option converts a cash sum inserted from
normal credit to cash for change. The coins
inserted are distributed to the appropriate tubes in
the coin unit. If the tubes in question are full, the
coins are routed into the cash box.
The inserted cash amount is recorded in the

Manually filled menu, 4.2.6.2.
4.2.7.4 Reset tube contents
The Reset tube contents option is described in this table.

Manual filling
* Reset tube contents Note: The option is applicable only if the vending machine is equipped
^ v Sel Esc with an MDB/ICP coin mechanism.
Submenu Description
Reset tube contents This option is used to reset the coin tube counters
before coins for change are inserted manually.
See 4.2.7.3 above.
The option should be used only if the tubes have

been emptied manually.
August, 2007 4 - 45
4.2.8 Basic operations menu
Introduction The Basic operations menu is used for settings of the individual types of
drinks, e.g. prices and quantities.
Options The Basic operations menu includes the following options:

• Change prices, see 4.2.8.1
• Change quantities, see 4.2.8.2
• Drink On/Off, see 4.2.8.3
• Autobar Selection *, see 4.2.8.4
• Change group, see 4.2.8.5
4.2.8.1 Change prices
Settings of global and individual prices of drinks and cup prices are
-BASIC OPERATIONS--
described in this table.
* Change prices
Change quantities
Global price This option makes it possible to set one price which will
apply to all drinks. Subsequently, prices of individual
drinks can be changed if required. See Price per drink
below.
If individual prices have been set prior to the setting of

the Global price, the price of the first drink will be
suggested when you enter the Global price option.
Note: All individual price settings will be overwritten

when you set a global price.
Price per cup A separate price for dispensed cups can be set in this
menu.
The cup price will be added to the total drink price when
customers buy a drink not using own cup.
Price per drink Prices of each of the drinks available in the machine
are set or changed in this menu.
Price mode or index mode:

If the machine is set to run in index mode (depending
on the payment system), prices should not be entered
here, i.e. in the Price per drink submenu, but directly in
the payment system. Instead, an index number
representing the price must be entered in the Price per
drink submenu. Index no. 1 must be entered as 0.01,
etc.
See further explanation in 4.3.8.12, Price mode, on

page 4-123.
4 - 46 August, 2007
Submenu Description
Step prices A step price will be added to or subtracted from the
standard price every time a customer presses a pre-
selection button one or more times to increase or
decrease the default setting of strength, amount of
whitener or sugar, etc.
Step prices can be set for individual drinks and pre-

selections or as global step prices applying to all drinks
and pre-selections.
The step prices option is divided into four submenus:

1. Price On/Off:
If you select [On], selling of drinks at graduated
prices according to pre-selections, e.g. strength, is
enabled.
2. Set step price

Setting of step prices for individual drinks and pre-
selections.
A. Select a drink.
B. Select pre-selection group, 1-4 (+) or 1-4 (-),
where 1(+) and 1(-) correspond to the left-most
pre-selection button on the payment panel,
2(+) and 2(-) correspond to the second pre-
selection button from left, etc.
Select a group number with a [+] to define a price

to be added to the standard price, and select a
group number with a [-] to define a price to be
subtracted from the standard price.
C. Enter a step price for the selected group.
3. Global step price (+)

Setting of a common step price that will be added to
the standard prices of all available drinks no matter
which pre-selection button is pressed.
4. Global step price (-)

Setting of a common step price that will be
subtracted from the standard prices of all available
drinks no matter which pre-selection button is
pressed.
Note: Setting of global step prices will overwrite all

step prices that may have been set for individual
drinks, see step 2 above.
How to set a price The way prices are entered or changed is explained in 4.1.1, Button
functions, on page 4-5.
August, 2007 4 - 47
4.2.8.2 Change quantities
The pre-set recipes for each drink may be adjusted through the Change
Change prices
quantities menu. When adjustments are made in Change quantities menu,
* Change quantities
Drink On/Off
the corresponding recipe in the flash menu will be adjusted. The options
^ v Sel Esc are described in this table.
Submenu Description
Change quantities The available options vary according to the
selected drink and type of machine, e.g. ES, FB
Delta or FB Sigma.
Powder: Set quantitiy of powder in mg for the

selected drink.
Water: Set quantity of water in ml for the selected

drink.
Whipper x: Set the whipper time in milliseconds

for the selected drink and the selected whipper no.
Whipper x speed: Set whipper speed for the

selected drink and the selected whipper no.
Note: The whipper speed is set as a percentage
and must be set at 100% or <51%.
Disp timer: Set the dispense timer time in

milliseconds. The dispense timer time is defined
by the time between the dispensing of the drink
and the final beep which indicates that the drink is
ready (drip time).
Infusion time: (Freshbrew only) Set time in

milliseconds in which the freshbrew is waiting in
the infusion chamber before the piston starts
moving to build up a pressure.
Downflow time (FB Sigma only): Set time in

milliseconds to define time from the pressure
stops building up (air piston moving forwards) until
it is released (the air piston starts moving
backwards).
Extraction pressure: (FB Sigma only) Set a value

between 1 and 9 to adjust the extraction pressure
(pressure from the air piston).
4 - 48 August, 2007
4.2.8.3 Drink On/Off
The Drink On/Off option is described in this table.

Change quantities
* Drink On/Off Submenu Description
Autobar Selection
^ v Sel Esc Drink On/Off Individual drinks can be made temporarily
unavailable. Select the drink and press [Off] to
make it unavailable. Select [On] to make it
available again.
If a user presses the button of a drink that has

been turned off, the display will read [Product not
available].
4.2.8.4 Autobar Selection *
The Autobar Selection menu makes it possible to allocate one of the

Drink On/Off
available drinks to the special Unique selection button on the machine’s
* Autobar Selection
Change group
side panel.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Unik selec. On/Off On: Select [On] to activate the Unique selection
button.
Off: Select [Off] to deactivate the Unique selection
button.
Select Unik sel. Select one of the available drinks as Unique
selection drink.
A separate price must be set for the Unique selection drink. This is done in
the Change prices menu under Price per drink. The Unique selection drink
is found at the end of the Price per drink list. See 4.2.8.1 above.
August, 2007 4 - 49
4.2.8.5 Change group
The the Change group option is described in this table.

Drink On/Off
* Change group Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc Change group All available drinks may be grouped in one of nine
groups. Special counters for each group can be
found in the Sales audit, the Freevend audit and
Test audit menus.
Select a drink, and then select a group number for

the drink in question.
All drinks by default belong to Group no. 1.
4 - 50 August, 2007
4.2.9 Service information menu
Introduction Detailed information about operation errors and events is registered in the
Service information menu.
Furthermore, information about the machine’s software program versions

is found in this menu.
Options The Service information menu includes the following options:

• Event log book, see 4.2.9.1
• Reset log book, see 4.2.9.2
• Program versions, see 4.2.9.3
• Show menu file version, see 4.2.9.4
4.2.9.1 Event log book
The structure of the Event log book is explained in this table.

SERVICE INFORMATION
* Event log book Submenu Description
Reset log book
^ v Sel Esc Event log book Each operational error or event is registered in the
event log.
Temperature low
F:DDMMYY HH.MM
L:DDMMYY HH.MM (XX)
^ v Sel Esc
F = First time of occurrence

L = Last time of occurrence
DDMMYY = Day month year
HH.MM = Time
(XX) = Number of times the event has occurred.
See chapter 3 Event recording and

troubleshooting for an explanation of the
messages that may occur in the Event log book
and suggestions for remedy.
August, 2007 4 - 51
4.2.9.2 Reset log book
The Reset log book option is described in this table.

SERVICE INFORMATION
* Reset log book Submenu Description
Program versions
^ v Sel Esc Reset log book Deletes all errors and events registered in the
Event log book.
Note: Errors that are still active will not be deleted

from the log book.
4.2.9.3 Program versions
The Program versions option is described in this table.

SERVICE INFORMATION
* Program versions Submenu Description
Show menu file ver.
^ v Sel Esc Program versions Shows the program versions of the software
installed in the machine, i.e. CPU, SPC, VMC and
FB or ES (fresh or espresso brewer).
4.2.9.4 Show menu file ver.
The Show menu file ver. option is described in this table.

Program versions
* Show menu file ver. Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc Show menu file ver. Shows information about the menu file version
installed in the machine, i.e. release no., machine
type, language and revision no.
4 - 52 August, 2007
4.2.10 Machine settings menu
Introduction The Machine settings menu allows setting the machine according to
individual preferences.
Options The Machine settings menu includes the following options:

• Set free vend, global, see 4.2.10.1
• Set beep mode, see 4.2.10.2
• Clock on display, see 4.2.10.3
• Temp. on display, see 4.2.10.4
• ES Temp. on display (ES machines only), see 4.2.10.5
• Set rinse time, see 4.2.10.6
• Set rinse day(s), see 4.2.10.7
• Set date and time, see 4.2.10.8
• Key discount, see 4.2.10.9
• Time discount, see 4.2.10.10
• Machine info, see 4.2.10.11
• Energy saving periods, see 4.2.10.12
• Set counters on/off, see 4.2.10.13
• Selfcheck setting, see 4.2.10.14
• Group counters on/off, see 4.2.10.15
• 100% Discount mode, see 4.2.10.16
4.2.10.1 Set freevend, global
The Set freevend, global option is explained in this table.

-MACHINE SETTINGS--
* Set freevend, global Submenu Description
Set beep mode
^ v Sel Esc Set free vend, global By selecting [On], you set the machine to
dispense all drinks for free.
4.2.10.2 Set beep mode
The Set beep mode option is explained in this table.

Set freevend, global
* Set beep mode Submenu Description
Clock on display
^ v Sel Esc Set beep mode By selecting ‘On’, you set the machine to give a
beep signal
• every time a button is pressed in the menu sys-
tem.
• when the machine has finished dispensing a
drink.
August, 2007 4 - 53
4.2.10.3 Clock on display
The Clock on display option is explained in this table.

Set beep mode
* Clock on display Submenu Description
Temp. on display
^ v Sel Esc Clock on display By selecting [On], you set the display to show the
time (hour and minute) when the machine is in
vend mode.
To set the time, see 4.2.10.8, Set date and time,

on page 4-56.
4.2.10.4 Temp. on display
The Temp. on display option is explained in this table.

Clock on display
* Temp. on display Submenu Description
ES Temp. on display
^ v Sel Esc Temp. on display By selecting [On], you set the display to show the
current water temperature in the FB/IN boiler
when the machine is in vend mode.
4.2.10.5 ES Temp. on display (ES machines only)
The ES Temp. on display option is explained in this table.

Temp. on display
* ES Temp. on display Submenu Description
Set rinse time
^ v Sel Esc ES Temp. on display By selecting [On], you set the display to show the
current water temperature in the ES boiler when
the machine is in vend mode.
4 - 54 August, 2007
4.2.10.6 Set rinse time
The Set rinse time option is described in this table.

ES Temp. on display
* Set rinse time Submenu Description
Set rinse day(s)
^ v Sel Esc Period 1 - Period 7 Up to seven automatic rinse periods can be set in
the machine. In this menu, time (hours and
minutes) for each period is defined. The time is set
in 24-hour format.
Note: The setting 00.00 means that the period in

question will be inactive.
The weekday to be connected with the time set for

the corresponding period is set in the menu Set
rinse day(s), 4.2.10.7.
See also explanation in the paragraph Automatic

rinse periods, on page 4-55.
4.2.10.7 Set rinse day(s)
The Set rinse day(s) option is described in this table.

Set rinse time
* Set rinse day(s) Submenu Description
Set date and time
^ v Sel Esc Period 1 - Period 7 Up to seven automatic rinse periods can be set in
the machine.
In this menu, days are defined:
0 = Monday
1 = Tuesday
etc.
7 = All (every day of the week).
The time (hours and minutes) to be connected

with the weekday of the corresponding period is
set in the menu Set rinse time, 4.2.10.6.
See also explanation in the paragraph Automatic

rinse periods, below.
Automatic rinse The machine can be set to perform automatic rinse procedures at fixed
periods intervals. Up to seven periods can be defined.
Setting a period means scheduling the machine to run an automatic rinse

procedure at a specific time on a given day of the week. The time and days
are set in separate submenus.
August, 2007 4 - 55
Example Period 1 is set to 23.00 hours in [Set rinse time] and to Monday in [Set rinse
day].
Result: Automatic rinse for Period 1 will be performed on Mondays at
23:00 hours.
Period 2 is set to 23.00 hours in [Set rinse time] and to Thursday in [Set
rinse day].
Result: Automatic rinse for Period 2 will be performed on Thursdays at
23:00 hours.
If rinsing is required at the same hour every day of the week, it is enough
to define one period and set days to [All].
4.2.10.8 Set date and time
The Set date and time option is described in this table.

Set rinse day(s)
* Set date and time Submenu Description
Key discount
^ v Sel Esc Set year Setting of year (two digits), e.g. 03
Set month Setting of month, e.g. 04
Set day Setting of day, e.g. 12
Set hour Setting of hour, e.g. 11
Set minute Setting of minute, e.g. 42
4 - 56 August, 2007
4.2.10.9 Key discount
The key discount option is described in this table.

Set date and time
* Key discount Submenu Description
Time discount
^ v Sel Esc Key discount The Key discount option makes it possible to set a
percentage rate which is given as a discount on all
drinks when the discount key is used.
Example: A setting of 20 results in a discount of

20% when the Key discount is activated.
A setting of 100 means free vend.
See also Key discount and Multibrew settings, on

page 4-132.
If a time discount is active, the higher of the two discount rates will apply.
4.2.10.10 Time discount
The Time discount option is used to set time periods during which drinks
can be sold at a discount. Up to seven periods are possible.
Key discount
*Time discount
Machine info See also explanation in the paragraph Setting Time discount periods, on
^ v Sel Esc
page 4-58.
Submenu Description
Set Time discount The Time discount option makes it possible to set
a percentage rate which is given as a discount on
all drinks during the set period(s).

20% in an active time discount period.
A setting of 100% means free vend.
August, 2007 4 - 57
Submenu Description
Set day(s) Up to seven Time discount periods may be set in
the machine.
In this submenu, days are defined.
The setting of day(s) is carried out in two steps:

1. Select a period (1-7).
2. Set the start day and end day for the selected
period.
0 = Monday
1 = Tuesday
etc.
Set time In this submenu, the time (hours and minutes) of
each period is defined.
The setting of time is carried out in two steps:

2. Set the start time and end time for the selected
period.
The time is set in 24-hour format.
If the discount key, see 4.2.10.9, is used during an active Time discount
period, the higher of the two discount rates will apply.
Setting Time Seven time discount periods may be programmed on a weekly basis.
discount periods For each period a start day and time and an end day and time must be
defined.
The start and end days are identified by progressive numbers:

Monday=0, Tuesday=1, etc. and all weekdays ALL=7.
This means:
• A time discount period that crosses midnight requires two period
settings, see Example 1, periods 1 and 2.
• If a time discount is to apply within the same period of time every day
of the week, e.g. from 10 a.m. to 2 p.m., one period setting stating ALL
as start and end day is sufficient. If a time discount should apply only
some of the days of a week, e.g. Saturdays and Sundays, separate
periods must be defined for each of these days.
• A period cannot have a start time later than the end time, see Non-
example.
• The same time period cannot include days from different weeks, i.e. a
period cannot be set from Monday to Monday.
4 - 58 August, 2007
Example 1 A time discount is to apply Monday to Friday from 10 p.m. to 6 a.m.

Furthermore, time discount is to apply all day during week-ends. Three
period settings are required to define this combination of time discounts:
Period 1
Set start day ALL=7 Set start time 22:00
Set end day ALL=7 Set end time 23:59
Result: Time discount is given between 22:00 and midnight of the same day.
Period 2
Result: Time discount is given between midnight and 06:00 of the same day.
Period 3
Set start day Sa=5 Set start time 06:00
Set end day Su=6 Set end time 23:59
Result: Time discount is given continuously all through the week-end.
Example 2 A time discount is to apply Saturdays and Sundays between 10 a.m. and 2
p.m. Separate periods must be defined for each of the two days:
Period 1
Set start day Sa=5 Set start time 10:00
Set end day Sa=5 Set end time 14:00
Period 2
Set start day Su=6 Set start time 10:00
Result: Time discount is given on Saturdays and Sundays between 10 a.m. and
2. p.m.
Non example
Period 1
Set start day All=7 Set start time 22:00
Set end day All=7 Set end time 06:00
Result: No time discount will be given as the end time cannot be earlier than the
start time for the same day or ALL. In this case a time discount up till midnight
and another one from midnight and onwards should have been defined. See
Example 1, Periods 1 and 2.
August, 2007 4 - 59
4.2.10.11 Machine info
The Machine info option is described in this table.

Time discount
* Machine info Submenu Description
Energy saving
^ v Sel Esc Machine code A machine number can be entered to give the
machine a unique number for identification when
data are retrieved electronically.
The number will be written on printed reports, see
4.2.6.12.
Operator code A number identifying the operator can be entered
for identification when retrieving data
electronically.
4.2.6.12.
Show install date Shows the date of installation of the machine as
recorded under “Set install date”, see below.
4.2.6.12.
Set install date This option makes it possible to record the date of
installation. Pressing [OK] will enter today’s date in
the system.
4.2.10.12 Energy saving
To save energy, the machine can be set to lower the water temperature over
a certain time period at fixed intervals. Up to seven energy saving periods
Machine info
* Energy saving can be set in the machine.
Set counters on/off
^ v Sel Esc
The following table describes the options of the Energy saving option.
See also explanation in the paragraph Setting energy saving periods, on

page 4-61.
Submenu Description
Save energy On/Off If Save energy is set to [Off], no energy saving
periods will be active.
If Save energy is set to [On], the energy saving
option will be active in the defined periods.
4 - 60 August, 2007
Submenu Description
Set day(s) Up to seven automatic energy saving periods can
be set in the machine.
In this submenu days are defined:
The setting of day(s) is carried out in two steps:

2. Set the start day and end day for the selected
period.
0 = Monday
1 = Tuesday
etc.
Set time In this submenu time (hours and minutes) for each
period is defined.
The setting of time is carried out in two steps:

2. Set the start time and end time for the selected
period.
The time is set in 24-hour format.
Set temperature In this menu the required low temperature is set,
e.g 65° C.
The water temperature will lower to this
temperature during the defined periods.
Set doorlight If this option is set to [On], the light in the machine
door will be turned off during the energy saving
periods.
If the option is set to [Off], the light will stay on
during the energy saving periods.
Setting energy Seven energy saving periods may be programmed on a weekly basis.
saving periods For each period a start day and time and an end day and time must be
defined.
The start and end days are identified by progressive numbers:
Monday=0, Tuesday=1, etc. and all weekdays ALL=7.
This means:
• An energy saving period that crosses midnight requires two period
settings, see Example 1, periods 1 and 2.
• If an energy saving period is to apply within the same period of time
every day of the week, e.g. from 10 a.m. to 2 p.m., one period setting
stating ALL as start and end day is sufficient. If energy saving should
apply only some of the days of a week, e.g. Saturdays and Sundays,
separate periods must be defined for each of these days, see Example
2.
• A period cannot have a start time later than the end time, see Non-
example.
• The same energy saving period cannot include days from different
weeks, i.e. a period cannot be set from Monday to Monday.
August, 2007 4 - 61
• If the periods are set overlapping, the energy saving will be active for
as long as it is covered by one of these periods, see Example, Period 3.
Example The vending machine is to run Monday to Friday from 7 a.m. till 10 p.m.
The remaining time of the week and during the weekend, the machine is
set to energy saving. Three periods have to be set as follows:
Period 1
Result: The machine is shut down every day from 22:00 till midnight.
Period 2
Result: The machine is shut down every day from midnight 00:00 till 07:00 in the
morning.
Period 3
Set start day Fr=4 Set start time 22:00
Result: The machine is shut down from Friday evening at 22:00 till Sunday
evening at 23:59.
Non-example 1
Period 1
Set start day Mo=0 Set start time 22:00
Set end day Fr=4 Set end time 07:00
Result: The machine will be shut down Monday at 22:00 till Friday at 07:00
which was not the intention.
Non-example 2
Period 1
Set start day All=7 Set start time 22:00
Set end day All=7 Set end time 07:00
Result: The machine is not ‘shut down’ as the end time must not be earlier than
the start time for the same day or ALL.
Note If a selection button is activated during an energy saving period, the

machine leaves the energy saving mode and returns to vend mode. As soon
as the temperature in the water tank has reached the nominal temperature,
the selected drink is dispensed.
When the selection buttons have been left untouched for more than 10
minutes after the last drinks dispensing, and an energy saving period is still
in force, the machine returns to the energy saving mode.
4 - 62 August, 2007
4.2.10.13 Set counters on/off
The Set counters on/off option makes it possible to have the display show
Energy saving
the number of drinks dispensed (resettable and non resettable counters)
* Set counters on/off
Selfcheck setting
during initialization of the machine. (Initialization = during start up and
^ v Sel Esc when returning from menu system to vend mode.)
Submenu Description
Set counters on/off Select [On] to display the number of drinks
dispensed.
Select [Off] to turn the function off.
4.2.10.14 Selfcheck setting
An automatic check of the software is carried out daily. By default the

Set counters on/off
check is performed from midnight, but if another time is preferred, a
* Selfcheck setting
Gr. counters on/off
starting time can be set via this menu.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Set hours and minutes Enter the starting hour and minutes for the daily
software check.
4.2.10.15 Gr. counters on/off
The Group counters on/off option makes it possible to have the display
Selfcheck setting
show the number of drinks dispensed in each of the first four groups during
* Gr. counters on/off
100% discount mode
initialization of the machine. (Initialization = during start up and when
^ v Sel Esc returning from menu system to vend mode.)
The figures will include drinks sold as well as free vend and shows non
resettable counters only.
Submenu Description
Gr. counters on/off Select [On] to display the number of drinks
dispensed per group (1-4).
Select [Off] to turn the function off.
To see or change which drinks belong to which

groups please refer to 4.2.8.5 Change group,
page 4-50.
August, 2007 4 - 63
4.2.10.16 100% discount mode
The 100% discount mode is used in relation to the Key discount option
Gr. counters on/off
when the Key discount option is set to 100.
*100% discount mode
^ v Sel Esc The 100% discount mode allows a choice between the counting of a free
vend in either Free vend audit or Discount key audit.
Submenu Description
100% discount mode Select [On] to make the vends count in Free vend
on/off audit.
Select [Off] to make the vends count in Discount

key audit.
4 - 64 August, 2007
4.2.11 ES System Test menu
Introduction The ES System Test menu makes it possible to perform various tests of the
espresso dispensing system.
Options The Test menu includes the following options:

• ES no accessories, see 4.2.11.1
• ES accessories only, see 4.2.11.2
4.2.11.1 ES no accessories
The ES no accessories option makes it possible to dispense a dose of

---ES System Test---
ground coffee and water to test the espresso dispensing system. No stirrer,
* ES no accessories
ES accessories only
dry sugar or cup are dispensed.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Es no accessories To test the ES dispensing system:
• Close the door.
• Place a cup or beaker on the cup platform.
• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [No accessories test.
Continue?].
• Press [OK] to start the test. A dose of ground
coffee and water will be dispensed.
4.2.11.2 ES accessories only
The ES accessories only option runs a test dispensing of accessories for

ES no accessories
espresso drinks, i.e. stirrer and sugar.
* ES accessories only

Es accessories only To test the ES accessories dispensing system:
• Close the door.
• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [Accessory only. Con-
tinue?].
• Press [OK] to start the test. A stirrer and one
dose of dry sugar will be dispensed.
August, 2007 4 - 65
4.2.12 Stirrer/Sugar test *
Introduction The Stirrer/Sugar test menu runs a test dispensing of accessories for
This table describes the Stirrer/Sugar test option.

Stirrer/Sugar test
Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc Es accessories only To test the Sugar/Stirrer dispensing system:
• Close the door.
• Press [Sel]
• The display now reads [Stirrer/Sugar disp.
Continue?].
4 - 66 August, 2007
4.2.13 Test menu
Introduction The Test menu makes it possible to perform various tests of the dispensing
system.

• Complete selections, see 4.2.13.1
• Drop cup, see 4.2.13.2
4.2.13.1 Complete selections
The Complete selections option makes it possible to dispense any of the

--------TEST--------
available drinks for testing.
* Complete selections
Drop cup
^ v Sel Esc Drinks dispensed as test drinks are registered in separate Test audit
counters and do not affect the sales counters.
Submenu Description
Complete selections Close the door. When the display reads
[DISPENSING TEST], press any selection key to
have the machine dispense a test drink.
4.2.13.2 Drop cup
The Drop cup option makes it possible to run a test of the cup slide, cup
Complete selections
catcher and elevator by dropping a cup onto the cup elevator.
* Drop cup
^ v Sel Esc If the machine is equipped with Incup module and cup ring, the Drop cup
menu has two additional options.
August, 2007 4- 67
Submenu Description
Drop cup Close the door. The elevator goes up, and an empty
cup is dropped onto the cup elevator.
If the machine is equipped with Incup module and

cup ring, the following options are available:
Standard cup: (as above)
InCup 1: Close the door. The elevator goes up, and

an empty cup from the left column of the Incup
module will be dropped onto the cup elevator.

an empty cup from the right column of the Incup
4 - 68 August, 2007
4.3 Technician menu
4.3.1 Purpose of the Technician menu
Purpose The Technician menu is intended for trained service technicians who have
gone through the product training courses of this vending machine.
4.3.2 How to access the Technician menu
Accessing the Follow the steps below to access the Technician menu.
Technician menu
Step Action Display

(1) (2) (3) (4)
2. Press [4] (Menu) to proceed to the

[MENU SELECTION] window.
--MENU SELECTION---
*Operator
The selection marker [*], by default, is Technician
placed next to [Operator]. ^ v Sel ESC
3. In the [MENU SELECTION] window,

press [v] once to move to [Technician].
Operator
*Technician
Shortcuts
^ v Sel Esc
4. Enter password, and press [OK].
If you have already entered password Enter password

earlier, then step 4 is left out. 0000
(-) (+) -> Ok
5. Press [Sel] to enter the Technician menu.
----TECHNICIAN-----
*Adjust system
Reset relationship
^ v Sel Esc
August, 2007 4 - 69
Returning to vend 1 Close the door. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the door.
mode 2 Press [Esc] once. Wait for a maximum of 20 seconds until the machine
has returned to vend mode.
4 - 70 August, 2007
4.3.3 Submenus of the Technician menu
Presentation This table gives a short presentation of the main contents of the Technician
menu.
Menu Description
Adjust system • Calibration of valves and ingredients.
• Water temperature settings.
• Cup sensor settings.
• Cup slide stand-by position.
• Enter button on keypad on or off.
• Brewer position settings. (FB Delta
brewers)
• Brewer profiles. (FB Sigma brewers)
• Rinsing with/without jug.
• Cup slide clip delay.
• Cup storage mode.
• Alternative cold water valve.
• Own cup on/off. (ES brewers)
• Incup enable/disable.
• Cupcatcher present.
• ES restore pressure. (ES brewers)
• Softener counter.
• Cup slide error mode.
• Extra water circulation. (FB Delta/Sigma
brewers)
Reset relationship Removal of electronic lock between vending
machine and portable data collector.
Change comm. route Definition of the mode of data read-out to a pc
or a hand-held terminal (via infra-red or cable).
Payment settings Handling of payment, e.g. coin mechanisms
and multi vend/single vend.
Multibrew settings Setting of the multibrew function (number of
portions, means of activation, and discount).
Change config. files Changing of language, recipe and menu files.
Reload machine type Resets all settings to the factory default.
Stirrer/Sugar test Allows testing of the sugar and stirrer
dispensing system.
ES test functions Allows testing of the espresso dispensing and
(ES machines only) dosing system.
Test Allows testing of drinks and cup drop without
affecting the sales counters.
Diagnostics/Test Test of various parts and functions of the
vending machine
Change password Changing of the password that gives access to
the Technician menu.
GSM settings Setting of communication parameters in
machines with GSM modem.
DaylightSaving Enabling or disabling of automatic time
adjustment feature in connection with daylight
saving.
August, 2007 4 - 71
Menu Description
UP KEY Utility Copying of setup files from one vending
machine to another and transfer of audit data
to pc, all via Up-Key memory device.
4 - 72 August, 2007
4.3.4 Technician menu flow
This diagram displays the full flow of the Technician menu.
Features marked Menu items that are marked with an asterisk * are special features which
with * are not available in all machines/countries.
Technician
Adjust system
Calibration
Ingredient
Valve (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Cold water
Temperatures
Nominal temp.
Lock temperature
ES Temperatures
Nominal temp. (ES only)
Lock temperature (ES only)
Disable stirrer/sug.
Global (ES only)
Stirrer by drink (ES only)
Sugar by drink (ES only)
Upper cup sensor
Lower cup sensor
Cup sensor status *
Cupslide idle position
Up. Photocell on/off *
Keypad enter on/off
Brewer park pos. (FB Delta only)
Brewing profile (FB Sigma only)
Rinse without jug
Cupslide clip delay
Cupstorage mode
Cold water valve
Allow own cup (ES only)
Incup enable/disabl *
Cupcatcher present *
ES restore pressure (ES only)
Softener counter
CupSlideErrorMode *
Ex.WaterCirculation
Cupslide sw. pos.
Cupslide open pos
Reset relationship
Change Comm. route
Closed door
Serial XModem
Serial EDDCMP
IR XModem
IR EDDCMP
Back to terminal
August, 2007 4 - 73
Change Comm. route continued

Opened door
Terminal Mode
Configurator Mode
Set baud rate

Payment settings
Single/Multi vend
Set payment type
Set max credit
Set max change
Obligation to buy
Coin inhibit
Low change inhibit
Audit unit Ext/Int
Exact change eq.
Exact change offset
Keyboard inhibit
Price mode
Price to index
Zero vend mode
Zero vend index
Revalue
Immediate change
Currency code(auto)
Currency code(man)
Coin validator
Decimal point pos.
Freevend count.mode
Delayed Paymentmode
Set Cash Sale
Sess. Complete Mode
Multibrew settings
Preset value
Min value
Max value
Means of action
MB Discount
Optimised multibrew (FB Sigma only)
Change config files
Set language file
Set recipe file
Set menu file
Reload machine type *
Stirrer/Sugar test *
ES Test Functions
ES no acessories (ES only)
ES accessories only (ES only)
Grind and Dose (ES only)
ES brewer cycle (ES only)
ES airbreak empty (ES only)
ES boiler empty (ES only)
Manual boiler fill (ES only)
4 - 74 August, 2007
Test *
Complete selections *
Drop Cup *
Standard Cup *
InCup 1 *
InCup 2 *
Diagnostics/Test
Overall functions
Wittlink test
Full dispense test
Test vend
Cup handling
Sensor test
Cup ring test
Cup drop test
Cup delivery test
Left Cup indexing
Right Cup indexing
Test Cupslide
Test Elevator
User interface
Button/Key test
Display test
Pre. sel. led test
Door light toggle
Test Init.text
Coin return motor
Water/power/heat
Water sensors
Pump on/off (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Heater on/off (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Fan on/off
Test Branchpipe
Test whipper no. X
Test all whippers
Test valve no. X (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Test all IN valves (FB Delta/Sigma only)
Test IN motor no.X
Test all IN motors
Sigma brewer 1
Brewer positions (FB Sigma only)
Move piston forward (FB Sigma only)
Move piston back (FB Sigma only)
Sigma brewer 2
Brewer positions (FB Sigma only)
Move piston forward (FB Sigma only)
Move piston back (FB Sigma only)
Freshbrewer 1
Test FB1 positions (FB Delta only)
Move piston up (FB Delta only)
Move piston down (FB Delta only)
Test IN motor 1 (FB Delta only)
August, 2007 4 - 75
Diagnostics/Test continued
Freshbrewer 2
Test FB2 postions (FB Delta only)
Move piston up (FB Delta only)
Move piston down (FB Delta only)
Test IN motor 1 (FB Delta only)
Change password
GSM settings
GSM On/Off
PIN Code
Pre-Alarms
Set GSM Thresholds
Reset Pre-Al. cnt
Bank ID's
Reset GSM relations
DaylightSaving
UP KEY Utility
Setup files
Statistics files
4 - 76 August, 2007
The following pages contain the individual submenus of the Technician menu. For further information about the menus, please refer to sections indi-
cated by numbers in dark boxes.
Adjust system menu
4.3.5 4.3.5.1
Press OK when Measured quantity
Adjust system Calibration Ingredient FB canist. 1 ready to start Enter: xxx.x g
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
Esc OK (-) (+) OK
FB canist. 1
V ^
Calibrated OK
Press OK when Measured quantity

Valve FB Valve 1 ready to start Enter: xxxx ml
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^ (-) (+) OK
FB1 valve 1 Press OK when Measured quantity

1. measurement OK ready to start
Esc OK Enter: xxxx ml
OK
(-) (+) OK
FB valve 1
Calibrated OK
4.3.5.2
The new temp.
Temperatures Nominal temp. New limit: XX oC limit is saved
Sel Esc Sel Esc (-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
V ^
The new temp.
Lock temperature New limit: XX o C
limit is saved
Sel Esc (-) (+) Esc OK
4.3.5.3
The new temp.
ES only ES Temperatures Nominal temp. New limit: XX oC limit is saved
Sel Esc Sel Esc (-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
V ^
The new temp.
Lock temperature New limit: XX o C
limit is saved
Disable Stirrer/Sug
August, 2007 4 - 77
4.3.5.4
Global disable
ES only Disable Stirrer/Sug Global Stirrer Control
1=Enable 0=Disable
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc 1
V ^
(-) (+) OK
Global disable
V ^ Sugar Control
1=Enable 0=Disable
Sel Esc 1
V ^
(-) (+) OK
V ^ CAFE EXPRESSO
Stirrer by Drink CAFE EXPRESSO Stirrer : 1
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
CAFE EXPRESSO
Sugar by Drink CAFE EXPRESSO
Stirrer : 1
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
4.3.5.5 (-) (+) OK
Upper cup sensor Level (0-7) : x

V ^
4.3.5.6
Lower cup sensor Level (0-7) : x
V ^
4.3.5.7
* Cup sensor status On=1, Off=0): 1
V ^
4.3.5.8
Cupslide idle pos
Sel Esc
(Close=0, Clip=1): 0 Short cuts for pc users
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.5.9
* Up. Photocell on/off Zero=Disab, 1=En. 1
If you are viewing this manual on a computer
Sel Esc (-) (+) Esc OK screen, simply place your cursor on any of the
V ^ numbers in dark boxes and click to go directly to
4.3.5.10
* Special feature. Not available the section that describes the menu in question.
in all 7600 machines Keypad enter on/off (Off=0, On=1): 1
V ^
To go back, rightclick and select “Go to previous
4.3.5.11 view”.
FB only Brewer park pos. (Closed=0, Open=1): 1
V ^
Brewing profile
4 - 78 August, 2007
4.3.5.12
Select profile
Sigma only Brewing profile Coffee
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.5.13
Rinse without jug (Yes=1, No=0): 1
V ^
4.3.5.14
Cupslide clip delay Yes=1, No=0): 1
V ^
4.3.5.15
(0=Default, 1=Side,
Cupstorage mode
2=Stack,): 0
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.5.16
Cold water valve Valve : 6
V ^
4.3.5.17
ES only Allow own cup (No=0, Yes=1): 1
V ^
4.3.5.18
* Incup enable/disabl (Off=0, On=1): 0

Sel Esc (-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.5.19
* Cupcatcher present (No=0, Yes=1): 0

Sel Esc (-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.5.20
ES only ES Restore Pressure (min. ): 020
Sel Esc (-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.5.21
Softener counter Value: 00000
* Special feature. Not available Sel Esc (-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.5.22
1=OutOfService"
* CupSlideErrorMode
0=Restart: 1
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Ex.WaterCirculation
August, 2007 4 - 79
V ^
4.3.5.23
FB Delta/Sigma only Ex.WaterCirculation Time(0-9) : xx Sec.
V ^
4.3.5.24
Switch Position
Cupslide sw. pos. (Right=0,Left=1):0
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.5.25
Cupslide open pos Coffee BIG
Sel Esc V ^ Tgl Esc
4 - 80 August, 2007
Reset relationship menu

4.3.6
Reset relationship
Reset relationship
Sel Esc Continue ?
Esc OK
August, 2007 4 - 81
Change comm. route menu

4.3.7 Setting
Serial — Xmodem
Change comm. route Closed door Serial XModem EVA DTS
Please wait…...
V ^
Setting
Serial — EDDCMP
Serial EDDCMP EVA DTS
Sel Esc
Please wait…...
V ^
Setting
IR — Xmodem
IR XModem EVA DTS
Sel Esc
V ^ Please wait…...
V ^
Setting
IR — EDDCMP
IR EDDCMP EVA DTS
Sel Esc Please wait…...
V ^
Returning
to
Back to terminal
Terminal output
Sel Esc
Please wait…...
Setting
Serial — Port
Opened door Terminal mode
Sel Esc Terminal mode
Sel Esc
Please wait…...
V ^
Setting
Serial — Port
V ^ Configurator mode
Configurator mode
Sel Esc
Please wait…...
Select baudrate
Set baud rate 1200 bps <1200 bps >
Sel Esc V ^
Sel Esc Are you sure?
Yes No
4 - 82 August, 2007
P ayment s ettings menu

4.3.8 4.3.8.1
P ayment s ettings S et S ingle/Multi v. MDB , B DV **
S ingle/Multi vend
S el E s c S el E s c S ingle=0, Multi=1: 1
(-) (+) E s c OK
V ^
4.3.8.2
S et payment type
S et payment type
S el E s c OF F =0, MDB =1, E XE C =2
B DV =3, V AL=4 .... : x
V ^
(-) (+) E sc OK
4.3.8.3
Max credit
S et max credit MDB , B DV **
S el E s c S et value : 000.00
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.4
Max change
S et max change MDB , B DV **
S et value : 000.00
S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.5
Obligation to buy
Obligation to buy
(No=0, Y es =1): 0 MDB , B DV **
S el E s c
(-) (+) E s c OK
V ^
4.3.8.6
C oin inhibit 1:
C oin inhibit C oin 1 inhibit (0) (On=1,Off=0): 0 MDB , B DV **
S el E s c S el E s c
V ^
(-) (+) E sc OK
V ^
4.3.8.7
C oin 1:
Low change inhibit C oin 1 (0) (On=1,Off=0): 0 MDB , B DV **
S el E s c V ^ S el E s c (-) (+) E sc OK
V ^
4.3.8.8
Audit unit type
Audit unit E xt/Int
(Int=0, E xt=1): 1 MDB , 2 P R , B DV **
S el E s c
V ^
(-) (+) E sc OK
4.3.8.9
E xact change eq.
E xact change eq.
S et value : 00 MDB , B DV **
S el E s c
** Option applicable only to the (-) (+) OK
s aid coin mechanis ms
V ^
E xact change offs et
August, 2007 4 - 83
4.3.8.10
Exact change offset
Exact change offset
Set number: 00 MDB, BDV **
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.11
Keyboard inhibit
Keyboard inhibit MDB, BDV **
(Off=0, On=1) : 0
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.8.12
Set Price mode
Price mode MDB, 2 PR, BDV **
(Real=0, Index=1) : 1
Sel Esc
V ^
(-) (+) Esc OK
4.3.8.13
Set price to index
Price to index MDB, BDV **
(Off=0, On=1) : 0
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.8.14
Ask payment system? MDB, BDV **
Zero vend mode
(No=0, Yes=1) : 1
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.8.15
Zero vend index
Zero vend index MDB, BDV **
Index : 000
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.16
Set revalue MDB, BDV **
Revalue (Off=0, On=1) : 0
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.8.17
Immediate change
Immediate change
0=OFF/1=ON : 0
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK Esc
V ^
4.3.8.18
Setting new
Currency code (auto) EUR currency code
Sel Esc Sel Esc was accepted
V ^
V ^
** Option applicable only to the
said coin mechanisms
Currency code (man)
4 - 84 August, 2007
4.3.8.19
Set currency code :
Currency code
V ^ (man)
Sel Esc (Decimal): 6250

(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.20
Validator line: X :
Coin validator
V ^
A: 00.05 Value : 00.00
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.21
Decimal point pos.
Decimal point pos. Enter value : 2
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.8.22
Freevend count.mode. (0=No, 1=Yes) 0
Sel Esc (-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.23
Delayed Paymentmode (0=No, 1=Yes) 0 MDB **
Sel Esc (-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.8.24
Cash Sale INTERFACE
** Option applicable only to the Set Cash Sale 0=OFF/MDB1=1/MDB2=2 MDB **
said coin mechanisms Sel Esc 0
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
4.3.8.25
Session Complete
Sess. Complete Mode after vend denied MDB **
Sel Esc 0=OFF/1=ON 0
(-) (+) Esc OK
August, 2007 4 - 85
Multibrew settings menu

4.3.9
Multibrew settings Set preset value
Preset value
(0-20) : xx cups
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set MB min value

Min value
(1-20) : xx cups
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Set MB max value

Max value
Sel Esc (1-20) : xx cups
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Means of action
Means of action
Off=0, Key=1, But=2: x
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Multibrew discount
MB Discount
Sel Esc Set percentage : 000
(-) (+) OK
V ^
FB Sigma only Optimised mulitbrew

Optimised multibrew
Sel Esc (Off=0, On=1) : 1
(-) (+) OK
Change config files menu

4.3.10 Select config file
Change config files <Error txt_UK>
Set language file Select file
Are you sure?
Sel Esc Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
Yes No
V ^
Select config file

Set recipe file Select file <1_Standard>
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc Are you sure?
Yes No
V ^
Select config file

Set menu file <English>
Select file
Sel Esc Sel Esc Are you sure?
V ^
Yes No
4 - 86 August, 2007
* Reload machine type menu

4.3.11
Reload settings Running...
Reload machine type
Are you sure? Please wait...
Sel Esc Esc OK

August, 2007 4 - 87
* Stirrer/Sugar test
4.3.12
Stirrer/Sugar disp. Running...
Stirrer/Sugar test Continue? Please wait...
Sel Esc Esc OK

4 - 88 August, 2007
ES Test Functions menu (ES machines only)

Close the door
4.3.13 4.3.13.1
No accessories test Running...
ES Test Functions ES no accessories
Sel Esc Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^
4.3.13.2
Accessory only Running...
ES accessories only
Sel Esc
OK Esc
V ^
4.3.13.3
Grind to Pot Test Running...
Grind and Dose
Sel Esc
OK Esc
V ^
4.3.13.4
Brewer cycle only Running...
ES brewer cycle
Sel Esc
OK Esc
V ^
4.3.13.5
ES airbreak empty Running...
ES airbreak empty
Sel Esc
OK Esc
V ^
4.3.13.6 ES Dispense valve

ES Dispense valve
ES boiler empty Valve will timeout Running...
Close valve ? Please wait...
Sel Esc Open valve ?
OK Esc OK
V ^
4.3.13.7
Manual boiler fill Running...
Manual boiler fill
Sel Esc
OK Esc
August, 2007 4 - 89
Test menu *
4.3.14 4.3.14.1
DISPENSING TEST Select drink DISPENSING TEST
Test Complete selections Close the door from selection panel Coffee w. sugar
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^
4.3.14.2
Drop cup Standard Cup Close the door Dropping cup
Sel Esc Sel Esc
V ^

Sel Esc
V ^

Sel Esc

4 - 90 August, 2007
Diagnostics/Test menu
4.3.15 Close the door 4.3.15.1
VMC Comm : OK
Diagnostics/Test Overall functions Wittlink test SPC Comm : OK
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc FB1 Comm : NOT OK
V ^
Press any button to escape
!!!WARNING!!!
Rinse in
Full dispense test Please remove the
progress
Sel Esc IN canisters
OK Esc
V ^ V ^
Test vend DISPENSING TEST

Sel Esc
4.3.15.2
Cup ring : ON
Cup handling Sensor test Upper opto : ON
Lower opto : ON
Sel Esc Sel Esc Safety switch : ON
V ^ Press any button to escape
--CUP DROP RESULT---

Test in progress... <---OK--->
Cup ring test Cup was dropped
V ^
Please wait!
Sel Esc correctly
--CUP DROP RESULT---

Cup drop test Cup was dropped
Please wait!
Sel Esc correctly

V ^
User interface Cup delivery test
August, 2007 4 - 91
Drop a cup test Running...

Cup delivery test
Continue? Please wait!
Sel Esc Esc OK
V ^
Please remove the CUP MAGAZINE RESULT

Left cup indexing middle stack of cups Cup stack correctly
Ready -> press a key Please wait!
Sel Esc loaded into cup ring

V ^
Please remove the CUP MAGAZINE RESULT

middle stack of cups Test in progress... <---OK--->
Right cup indexing Cup stack correctly
Please wait!
Sel Esc Ready -> press a key loaded into cup ring
V ^
-CUP SLIDE RESULT--

Test in progress... <---OK---> -CUP SLIDE RESULT--
Test cup slide Close
Please wait! <---OK---> -CUP SLIDE RESULT--
Sel Esc position found Open <---OK--->
position found Clip
position found
--ELEVATOR RESULT--
Test in progress... <---OK---> --ELEVATOR RESULT--
Test elevator Top
Please wait! <---OK---> --ELEVATOR RESULT--
Sel Esc position found Middle <---OK--->
position found Bottom
position found
User interface
4 - 92 August, 2007
4.3.15.3 Coinreturn but. : OFF

Button/Key test Key status : OFF
User interface
Press any button
Sel Esc Sel Esc
Direct sel. no. X
pressed/released....
V ^
----DISPLAY TEST---- -SPECIAL CHAR TEST--

abcdefghijklmnopqrst ARROW = ->
Display test ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST BOLD R = R
Sel Esc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 BOLD F = F
V ^
--PRE.SEL.LED TEST--
Pre. sel. led test
Test in progress...
Sel Esc
V ^ V ^
Door light toggle OFF

ON
Sel Esc
V ^
Wittenborg 7600
Nres tot :
Test Init. text Res tot :
Sel Esc <<<Initializing>>>
--DIAGNOSTICS/TEST-- -COIN RETURN MOTOR--

Coin return motor Motor and switch
Please wait!
Sel Esc working correctly.
water/power/heat
August, 2007 4 - 93
4.3.15.4 W ater temp.: xx.x°

W ater level: ON
Water/power/heat Water s ens ors S olid was te: OF F
S el E s c S el E s c Liquid was te: OF F
V ^ P res s any button to es cape
P ump on/off OF F
ON
S el E s c
V ^
Heater on/off OF F
ON
S el E s c
V ^
F an on/off OF F
ON
S el E s c
V ^
V ^
--B R ANC HP IP E R E S ULT --

T es t in progres s ... <---OK ---> --B R ANC HP IP E R E S ULT --
T es t branchpipe Home
P leas e wait! <---OK --->
S el E s c pos ition found Out
pos ition found
P res s any button to es cape
V ^
W hipper 0,5 s econd Mixer tes t

T es t whipper no. x tes t. S elect number S tarts in 3 s econds
S el E s c from 1-8: 1 when you hear a bip
(-) (+) E sc OK
V ^
Mixer tes t
T es t in progres s ...
T es t all whippers S tarts in 3 s econds
P leas e wait!
S el E s c when you hear a bip
V ^
F res hbrewer 1 T es t valve no. x
4 - 94 August, 2007
Valve 0,5 second Open valve test

Test valve no. x test. Select number starts in 3 seconds
Sel Esc from 1-11: 1 when you hear a bip
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Open valve test

Test in progress...
Test all IN valves starts in 3 seconds
Please wait
Sel Esc when you hear a bip
V ^
5 sec. INGREDIENT Please remove the Ingredient test

Test IN motor no. x test. Select number IN canisters. Starts in 3 seconds
Sel Esc from 1-9: 1 Ready -> Press a key when you hear a bip
(-) (+) Esc OK
V ^
Please remove the Ingredient test

Test in progress...
Test all IN motors IN canisters. Starts in 3 seconds
Please wait!
Sel Esc Ready -> Press a key when you hear a bip
4.3.15.5 -----SiIGMA 1 RESULT-----

Test in progress... <---OK---> -----SiIGMA 1 RESULT-----
Sigma brewer 1 Brewer positions Open
Please wait! <---OK---> -----SiIGMA 1 RESULT-----
Sel Esc Sel Esc position found Near close <---OK--->
position found Close
position found
----SiIGMA 1 RESULT-----
Move piston forward Please wait Front
Sel Esc position found
V ^
Move piston back Please wait Back
Sigma brewer 2
August, 2007 4 - 95
4.3.15.6 -----SiIGMA 2 RESULT-----

Test in progress... <---OK---> -----SiIGMA 2 RESULT-----
Sigma brewer 2 Brewer positions Open
Please wait! <---OK---> -----SiIGMA 2 RESULT-----
Sel Esc Sel Esc position found Near close <---OK--->
position found Close
position found
Move piston forward Please wait Front
Move piston back Please wait Back
4.3.15.7 -----FB1 RESULT-----

Test in progress... <---OK---> -----FB1 RESULT-----
Freshbrewer 1 Test FB1 position Fully open
Please wait! <---OK---> -----FB1 RESULT-----
Sel Esc Sel Esc position found Close <---OK--->
position found Bottom
position found
-----FB1 RESULT-----
Enter wanted dist. Test in progress... <---OK--->
Move piston up Please wait Entered distance
in mm : 001 moved correctly
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
V ^
Enter wanted dist. Test in progress... <---OK--->
Move piston down Please wait Entered distance
Sel Esc
(-) (+) OK
Test in motor 1 IN motor working
Please wait
Sel Esc correctly
Freshbrewer 2 Press any button to escape
4 - 96 August, 2007
4.3.15.8 -----F B 2 R E S ULT -----

T es t in progres s ... <---OK ---> -----F B 2 R E S ULT -----
F res hbrewer 2 T es t F B 2 pos ition C los e
P leas e wait! <---OK ---> -----F B 2 R E S ULT -----
S el E s c S el E s c pos ition found B ottom <---OK --->
pos ition found F ully open
pos ition found
V ^ P res s any button to es cape
-----F B 2 R E S ULT -----

E nter wanted dis t. T es t in progres s ... <---OK --->
Move pis ton up P leas e wait E ntered dis tance
S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
-----F B 2 R E S ULT -----

E nter wanted dis t. T es t in progres s ... <---OK --->
Move pis ton down P leas e wait E ntered dis tance
S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
-----F B 2 R E S ULT -----

T es t in progres s ... <---OK --->
T es t in motor 1 IN motor working
P leas e wait
S el E s c correctly
August, 2007 4 - 97
Change password menu

4.3.16
Change password Enter new password
Password changed
(XXXX) : 0000
Sel Esc
(+) (-) Esc Ok
4 - 98 August, 2007
G S M S ettings
4.3.17 4.3.17.1
G S M On/Off
G S M S ettings G S M On/Off
0 = OF F / 1 = ON: 1
S el E s c S el E s c
(-) (+) E sc OK
V ^
4.3.17.2
--------- P IN C ode -----------
P IN C ode V alue: 0000
S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.17.3
---------- S et C up -----------
P re-Alarms S et G S M T hres holds S et C up V alue: 00000
S el E s c S el E s c S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
----------- S et S tirrer ---------

S et S tirrer V alue: 00000
S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
P owder 01
S et P owder PPowder
owder01
01 V alue: 00000
V ^
S el E s c V ^ S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
V ^
V ^
S irup 01
S et S yrup SPyrup 01 01
owder value: 00000
S el E s c V ^ S el E s c
(-) (+) OK
R es et P re-Alarm C ounters are now

R es et P re-A. cnt. C ounters
C ontinue? eras ed!
S el E s c
E s c OK
4.3.17.4 -------- B ANK ID'S -------

B ank ID's V alue: 0
S el E s c (0 = Mas ter)
(-) (+) OK
V ^
4.3.17.5 R es et G S M P C <->V M
G S M R elation is now
R es et G S M relations R elation.
C ontinue? res et!
S el E s c
E s c OK
August, 2007 4 - 99
Daylight saving menu

4.3.18
Use DaylightSaving?
DaylightSaving
No=0, Yes=1: 1
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc OK
4 - 100 August, 2007

UP KEY Utility menu

4.3.19 4.3.19.1
SELECT A FILE WITT0000.STP
UP KEY Utility Setup files Read >WITT0000.STP WITT0000.STP Executing
Sel Esc Sel Esc Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
V ^
INSERT FILE NAME WITT0000.STP

Write Executing
WITT0000.STP
Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc
V ^
V ^ SELECT A FILE
Delete >WITT0000.STP Executing
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
V ^
FORMATTING THE KEY

Format Executing
Yes No
4.3.19.2
INSERT FILE NAME WITT0000.STA
Statistic files Write Executing
WITT0000.STA
Sel Esc Sel Esc
(-) (+) Esc
V ^
SELECT A FILE
Delete >WITT0000.STA Executing
Sel Esc V ^ Sel Esc
V ^
FORMATTING THE KEY

Format Executing
Yes No
August, 2007 4 - 101

4.3.5 Adjust system menu
Introduction The Adjust system menu makes it possible to calibrate the quantities of
water and ingredients, to adjust water temperatures and to change various
system settings.
Options The Adjust system menu includes the following options:

• Calibration, see 4.3.5.1
• Temperatures, see 4.3.5.2
• ES Temperatures (ES machines only), see 4.3.5.3
• Disable Stirrer/Sugar (ES machines only), see 4.3.5.4
• Upper cup sensor, see 4.3.5.5
• Lower cup sensor, see 4.3.5.6
• Cup sensor status *, see 4.3.5.7
• Cupslide idle pos, see 4.3.5.8.
• Up. Photocell on/off *, see 4.3.5.9
• Keypad enter, on/off, see 4.3.5.10
• Brewer park pos. (FB Delta brewers only), see 4.3.5.11
• Brewing profile, (FB Sigma brewers only), see 4.3.5.12
• Rinse without jug, see 4.3.5.13
• Cupslide clip delay, see 4.3.5.14
• Cupstorage mode, see 4.3.5.15
• Cold water valve, see 4.3.5.16
• Allow own cup (ES machines only), see 4.3.5.17
• Incup enable/disable *, see 4.3.5.18
• Cupcatcher present *, see 4.3.5.19
• ES restore pressure (ES machines only), see 4.3.5.20
• Softener counter, see 4.3.5.21
• Cup Slide Error Mode *, see 4.3.5.22
• Ex. Water Circulation (FB Delta/Sigma only), see 4.3.5.23
• Cupslide sw. pos., see 4.3.5.24
• Cupslide open pos, see 4.3.5.25
4.3.5.1 Calibration
This table describes the options of the Calibration menu.

---ADJUST SYSTEM---
* Calibration
Temperatures Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Ingredient Calibration of the amounts of ingredients delivered
from the canisters.
The amounts are measured in mg per second.
4 - 102 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Valve Calibration of the amounts of water delivered
through the IN valves and the hot water valve.
Two calibrations must be made for each valve, the

first one measures the delivered amount of water
at the minimum pump speed, and the second one
measures the delivered amount of water at the
maximum pump speed.
The amounts are measured in ml per second.
• Have a beaker graduated in ml ready for calibration of valves.

• Have cup and a pair of scales ready for calibration of ingredients.
• Press [Sel] to select a valve or canister.
• Press [OK] to start the calibration.
• Adjust value if the shown amount deviates from the measuring.
For machines equipped with sugar/stirrer dispenser:

Before starting the calibration, remove the retaining pin from the sugar
dispenser to release the spout.
4.3.5.2 Temperatures
This table describes the options of the Temperatures menu.

Calibration
* Temperatures
ES Temperatures Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Nominal temp. Setting of maximum water temperature in the
boiler.
Default settings are:
• Freshbrew machines: 95 °C.
• Instant machines: 84° C.
Lock temperature Setting of low temperature limit, e.g. 85 °C (FB)
and 70 °C (IN).
If the water temperature reaches the low
temperature limit or falls below it, dispensing of
drinks is blocked until the water is sufficiently
heated again.
The message [Temperature low] is shown in the

display for as long as the machine is not operable.
August, 2007 4 - 103

4.3.5.3 ES Temperatures (ES machines only)
This table describes the options of the ES Temperatures menu.

Temperatures
* ES Temperatures
Disable Stirrer/Sug Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Nominal temp. Setting of maximum water temperature in the ES
boiler.
Default setting is 96 °C.
Lock temperature Setting of low temperature limit, e.g. 85 °C.
If the water temperature reaches the low
temperature limit or falls below it, dispensing of
drinks is blocked until the water is sufficiently
heated again.
The message [ES Temperature low] is shown in

the display for as long as the machine is not
operable.
4.3.5.4 Disable Stirrer/Sug (ES machines only)
The automatic dispensing of sugar and/or stirrer with espresso drinks may
ES Temperatures
* Disable Stirrer/Sug
be disabled for either individual drinks or globally.
Upper cup sensor
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Global The Global option is divided into two submenus:
1. Stirrer control:
Select [1] to enable dispensing of a stirrer with
each type of espresso drink.
Select [0] to disable dispensing of a stirrer with
each type of espresso drink.
2. Dry sugar control:

Select [1] to enable dispensing of dry sugar
with each type of espresso drink.
Select [0] to disable dispensing of dry sugar
with each type of espresso drink.
Stirrer by Drink With this submenu it is possible to enable or
disable the dispensing of stirrers with individual
drink selections.
A. Select a drink.
B. Select [1] to enable dispensing of stirrers
with the selected drink.
Select [0] to disable dispensing of stirrers
with the selected drink.
4 - 104 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Sugar by Drink With this submenu it is possible to enable or
disable the dispensing of sugar with individual
drink selections.
A. Select a drink.
B. Select [1] to enable dispensing of sugar with
the selected drink.
Select [0] to disable dispensing of sugar with
the selected drink.
4.3.5.5 Upper cup sensor
This table describes the Upper cup sensor option. The upper cup sensor is
Temperatures
* Upper cup sensor
used to control the stop level of the cup elevator according to the height of
Lower cup sensor an inserted or dispensed cup.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Upper cup sensor The sensitivity of the infra-red upper cup sensor
can be adjusted to fit the transparency of the cups
used.
The sensitivity can be graded from 0 to 7. The

higher the value, the less likely the sensor is to
detect a transparent cup or a cup made of a thin
material.
Default setting is 3.
4.3.5.6 Lower cup sensor
This table describes the Lower cup sensor option. The lower cup sensor
Upper cup sensor
* Lower cup sensor
detects whether the customer inserts own cup/jug.
Cup sensor status
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Lower cup sensor The sensitivity of the infra-red lower cup sensor
can be adjusted to fit the transparency of the cups
used.
The sensitivity can be graded from 0 to 7. The

higher the value, the less likely the sensor is to
detect a transparent cup or a cup made of a thin
material.
Default setting is 3.
August, 2007 4 - 105

4.3.5.7 Cup sensor status *
The Cup sensor status option is used to activate or deactivate the lower cup
Lower cup sensor sensor. The lower cup sensor detects whether the customer inserts own cup /jug.
* Cup sensor status
Cupslide idle pos
Cup sensor Status On: If set to [On] the Lower cup sensor will be
active.
Off: If set to [Off] the Lower cup sensor will be

inactive.
4.3.5.8 Cup slide idle pos
The cup slide can be set to be parked either in a closed or an open position
Lower cup sensor
* Cupslide idle pos
when in stand-by.
Up Photocell on/off
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Cup slide idle pos Close: the cup slide is closed when the machine is
in stand-by.
Clip: the cup slide is open and the cup catcher

ready to catch a cup when the machine is in
stand-by.
The Close position gives a slightly prolonged

dispensing time.
4 - 106 August, 2007

4.3.5.9 Up Photocell on/off
This table describes the Upper photocell on/off option. The upper cup
Cupslide idle pos
* Up Photocell on/off
sensor is used to control the stop level of the cup elevator according to the
Keypad enter on/off height of an inserted or dispensed cup.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Up Photocell on/off Zero: If set to [Disab] the upper cup sensor will be
active.
En: (Enable) If set to [En] the upper cup sensor

will be inactive.
4.3.5.10 Keypad enter on/off
In machines equipped with keypad the Enter button (E) may be enabled or
Up Photocell on/off
* Keypad enter on/off
disabled.
Brewer park pos.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Keypad enter on/off On: The Enter button [E] on the keypad must be
pressed after the selection of drink to effect a
vend.
Off: The drink will be delivered as soon as the

number combination for the wanted drink has
been entered.
4.3.5.11 Brewer park position (FB Delta brewers only)
The brewer can be set to stop in an open or closed position when in stand-
Keypad enter on/off
* Brewer park pos.
by.
Brewing profile
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Brewer park pos. Open: the scraper is parked at front of brewer and
the brewer cylinder in a slightly elevated position.
Closed: the scraper is parked at rear of brewer

and the brewer cylinder in a lowered position.
August, 2007 4 - 107

4.3.5.12 Brewing profile (FB Sigma brewers only)
The Brewing profile option makes it possible to choose between a standard

Brewer park pos.
* Brewing profile
and two optional brewing profiles for freshbrew coffee and a standard and
Rinse without jug one optional profile for freshbrew tea. The different brewing profile
^ v Sel Esc options are explained in this table.
Submenu Description
Select profile A brewing profile may be selected for each
(1-5) freshbrew drink (coffee or tea). The following
profiles are available:
1: Standard profile (coffee)

Brew pressure and amount of displaced air are
adjusted according to quantities in recipe, i.e.
small quantities of water will result in low pressure
and small air displacement.
2: Low pressure (coffee)

Brew pressure and air displacement are adjusted
so that the water level in the infusion chamber
after first stroke of the air piston is controlled to a
certain level above the coffee bed resulting in a
coffee like drip-filtered coffee.
3: High pressure (coffee)

Brew pressure and air displacement are set to
maximum independent of quantities. The result is
a coffee like French press coffee, more bitter and
with a higher acidity than profiles 1 and 2.
This profile has the fastest brewing cycle, and
cleaning of the filter is required less often.
4: Standard profile (tea)

Brew pressure and amount of displaced air are
adjusted according to quantities in recipe.
5: High pressure (tea)

Brew pressure and air displacement are set to
maximum independent of quantities. The result is
a fast brewing cycle.
4 - 108 August, 2007

4.3.5.13 Rinse without jug
The Rinse without jug option makes it possible to rinse the machine
Brewing profile
* Rinse without jug
without placing a jug on the elevator platform.
Cupslide clip delay
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Rinse without jug Yes: This setting opens the possibility of using the
Rinse options without placing a jug on the elevator
platform.
No: If set to [No], a jug must be placed on the

elevator platform when the Rinse options are
used.
4.3.5.14 Cupslide clip delay
The Cupslide clip delay option should be disabled if the present cup
Rinse without jug
* Cupslide clip delay
catcher is replaced with a new one equipped with a spring:
Cupstorage mode
^ v Sel Esc • Spare part no. of old cup catcher: 30956100S, (7C) or 30953200S,
(7H).
• Spare part no. of new cup catcher: 31109800S, (7C) or 31115700S,
(7H).
The Cupslide clip delay option ensures that the cup catcher is properly
positioned before a cup is dropped. In the new type of cupslide a spring
mechanism ensures a correct positioning and, thus, supersedes the
function.
Submenu Description
Cupslide clip delay Yes: In machines equipped with cup catchers
without a spring mechanism, the Cup slide clip
delay option is set to [Yes] by default.
No: When a new cup catcher with a spring

mechanism is installed, the setting must be
changed to [No].
August, 2007 4 - 109

4.3.5.15 Cupstorage mode
With the Cupstorage mode option it is possible to change the order in

Cupslide clip delay
* Cupstorage mode
which the machine uses cup stacks.
Cold water valve
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Cupstorage mode Default*: The machine will always use cup stacks
from the left side of the cup magazine until this
side is empty, then start using cup stacks from the
right side. After a refill of cups, the machine goes
back to taking cup stacks from left no matter if the
right side is empty.
Side: The machine will use the cup stacks from

the right side of the cup magazine first then switch
to the left side. Opening the door or turning off and
on the machine does not affect from which side
the cup stacks are taken.
Stack: The machine will use cup stacks from the

right and left sides of the cup magazine
alternately, one stack at a time. Opening the door
or turning off and on the machine does not affect
from which side the cup stacks are taken.
* Default setting: If the cup magazine is often refilled, the Default setting
may have the consequence that cups from the right side of the cup
magazine are never or rarely used.
4.3.5.16 Cold water valve
The Cold water valve option makes it possible to select an alternative valve
Cup storage mode
* Cold water valve
for the dispensing of cold water.
Allow own cup
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Cold water Valve: Select a valve no. from 1-9.
(The default setting for cold water is valve no. 6.)
See overview of water system in chap. 5A, page

5A-20.
4 - 110 August, 2007

4.3.5.17 Allow own cup (ES and IN machines with dry sugar and stirrer module)
The Allow own cup option opens the possibility of using own cup instead
Cold water valve
* Allow own cup
of having the machine dispense a cup together with the drink. The option
Incup enable/disable is available in machines with dry sugar and stirrer module.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Allow own cup Yes: If set to [Yes] it is possible to use own cup. No
dry sugar or stirrer will be dispensed when
customers use own cup.
No: If set to [No] it is not possible to use own cup.
When Allow own cup is set to [On], both the Upper and Lower cup sensors
must be [On] as well. This applies to machines where these sensors can be
deactivated, see 4.3.5.7 and 4.3.5.9 above.
The Allow own cup option may only be used in machines with cup catcher
(as opposed to cup ring).
4.3.5.18 Incup enable/disable*
If an Incup module is being installed in an existing machine, the module

Allow own cup
*Incup enable/disable
must be activated after the installation. This is done using the Incup enable/
Cupcatcher present disable option.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Incup enable/disable On: Select [On] to activate the Incup module after
installation.
Off: Select [Off] to deactivate the Incup module.
August, 2007 4 - 111

4.3.5.19 Cupcatcher present *
If a cup ring is being replaced by a cup catcher in an existing machine, the

Incup enable/disable
* Cupcatcher present
cup catcher must be activated after the installation. This is done using the
ES restore pressure Cupcatcher present option.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Cupcatcher present Yes: Select [Yes] to activate the cup catcher after
installation.
No: Select [No] to deactivate the cup catcher.
4.3.5.20 ES Restore pressure (ES machines only)
When the machine is on stand-by, the water pump is automatically

Cup catcher present
* ES Restore pressure
activated at fixed intervals to ensure a correct pressure in the boiler.
Softener counter
^ v Sel Esc The ES Restore pressure option makes it possible to change the default
setting of intervals between each automatic check of the pressure.
Submenu Description
ES Restore Set a number of minutes (1-300) to define the
pressure intervals between each automatic check of the
pressure in the water tank.
The default setting is 20 minutes.
4.3.5.21 Softener counter
This option makes it possible to set a number of drinks to be dispensed

ES Restore Pressure
* Softener counter
before a message is given that the water softener filter should be replaced.
CupSlideErrorMode
^ v Sel Esc When the set number of dispensings is reached, the message [Change
softener] will be shown in the display when the door is opened. If [OK] is
pressed, the message will be removed and the counter reset to the set
number. If [Esc] is pressed, the counter will not be reset, and the message
will be shown again, the next time the door is opened.
Submenu Description
Softener counter Set a number (0 -10000).
When the machine has counted down to zero, a

message is shown in the display.
4 - 112 August, 2007

4.3.5.22 Cup Slide Error Mode *
This option makes it possible to choose between two different error modes
Softener counter
* CupSlideErrorMode
if, during a vend, a cup is stuck (hangs) in the cup slide /cup ring area.
Ex.WaterCirculation
^ v Sel Esc The first mode Out of service will make the machine inoperable, whereas
the second mode Restart requires only that the cup be removed.
Submenu Description
Cup Slide Error Out of service: This mode will stop the machine,
Mode and the message [Out of Service] will be shown in
the credit display.
Before the machine can again operate, the door of

the machine must be opened and closed and the
blocking cup removed.
Restart: In this mode, the message [Please

remove cup] will be shown in the display. After
removal of the cup (which can be done from the
outside of the machine), the machine returns to
vend mode and a new transaction can be made.
4.3.5.23 Ex. Water Circulation (FB Delta/Sigma brewers only)
Before dispensing a hot drink, the system will always run a circulation of
CupSlideErrorMode
* Ex.WaterCirculation
the hot water to secure a sufficient water temperature.
Cupslide sw. pos.
^ v Sel Esc To ensure a satisfactory water temperature also when the machine has been
on stand-by for a while, the Extra Water Circulation option makes it
possible to run a prolonged recirculation of the hot water before the
dispensing of a freshbrew drink
The prolonged recirculation will be activated if the machine has been on

stand-by for more than 10 minutes.
Submenu Description
Ex. WaterCirculation Time: Set number of seconds (0-9) for prolonged
water circulation time.
Note: The number of seconds set here totals the

whole recirculation time, i.e. a setting of 6 seconds
will give a total recirculation time of 6 seconds and
not the default recirculation time plus 6 seconds.
August, 2007 4 - 113

4.3.5.24 Cupslide sw. pos.
In some early machines, the middle cup switch is positioned slightly to the
Ex.WaterCirculation
* Cupslide sw. pos.
left compared to the new standard position.
Cupslide open pos
^ v Sel Esc When a machine has been reset and updated with new software, the setting
can compensate for the middle switch position.
Submenu Description
Cupslide sw. pos. Right: Select the right position to compensate for
the position of the middle switch.
Left: Select the left position if the middle switch is

in the new standard position.
4.3.5.25 Cupslide open pos
Light colour drinks (e.g. water) and dark colour drinks (e.g. coffee) are
Cupslide sw. pos.
* Cupslide open pos
separated into two zones in the distributer head; light colour drinks to the
right side and dark colour drinks to the left seen from the front, see also
^ v Sel Esc chap. 5C Dosing system.
To avoid drips from dark colour drinks into light colour drinks, the cup
slide can be set to catch these drips for each individual drink.
Submenu Description
Cupslide open pos Select drink.
BIG: Select BIG for dark colour drinks.
SML: Select SML for light colour drinks.
Note: If the machine is originally implemented with

software version 6.9, the cup slide position is
managed automatically from the recipe.
4 - 114 August, 2007

4.3.6 Reset relationship menu
Introduction The Reset relationship menu is used to remove the electronic lock that
links the vending machine to a specific portable data carrier.
The first time a data carrier is used with the vending machine, the machine
is electronically locked to this particular data carrier in order to protect data
from being retrieved and reset by other data carriers.
RESET RELATONSHIP Submenu Description

Reset relationship Press [OK] to remove the electronic lock between
^ v Sel Esc
Continue? vending machine and data carrier.
August, 2007 4 - 115

4.3.7 Change comm. route menu
Introduction The Change comm. route menu is used to set the mode of data transmission
to a pc or a hand-held terminal. Data can be retrieved via infra-red
connection or via a serial data cable.
This table describes the options of the Change comm. route menu.
CHANGE COMM. ROUTE
* Closed door
First select [Closed door] or [Opened door] depending on the type of data
Opened door retrieval device and then select the communication route.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Closed door Serial XModem
(key switch For data retrieval via a serial data cable and
activated) XModem protocol.
Serial EDDCMP:
For data retrieval via a serial data cable and
EDDCMP.
IR XModem:
For data retrieval via infra-red connection and
XModem protocol.
IR EDDCMP:
For data retrieval via infra-red connection and
EDDCMP.
Back to terminal:
This option is used to enable communication
between the vending machine and a pc, e.g. to
change the setup of data in the machine.
Opened door Terminal mode:
(key switch This option is used to enable communication
deactivated) between the vending machine and a pc, e.g. to
change the setup of data in the machine.
Configurator mode:
For data retrieval via a PSION hand-held terminal
or configurator tool.
Set baud rate Setting of data transmission speed:
The possible settings are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
and 19200 bps.
4 - 116 August, 2007

4.3.8 Payment settings menu
Introduction The Payment system menu allows handling of payment, e.g. coin
mechanisms and multi vend/single vend.
Options The Payment system menu includes the following options:

• Single/Multi vend, see 4.3.8.1
• Set payment type, see 4.3.8.2
• Set max credit, see 4.3.8.3
• Set max change, see 4.3.8.4
• Obligation to buy, see 4.3.8.5
• Coin inhibit, see 4.3.8.6
• Low change inhibit, see 4.3.8.7
• Audit unit Ext/Int, see 4.3.8.8
• Exact change eq., see 4.3.8.9
• Exact change offset, see 4.3.8.10
• Keyboard inhibit, see 4.3.8.11
• Price mode, see 4.3.8.12
• Price to index, see 4.3.8.13
• Zero vend mode, see 4.3.8.14
• Zero vend index, see 4.3.8.15
• Revalue, see 4.3.8.16
• Immediate change, see 4.3.8.17
• Currency code (auto), see 4.3.8.18
• Currency code (man), see 4.3.8.19
• Coin validator, see 4.3.8.20
• Decimal point pos., see 4.3.8.21
• Freevend count. mode, see 4.3.8.22
• Delayed Paymentmode, see 4.3.8.23
• Set Cash Sale, see 4.3.8.24
• Sess. Complete Mode, see 4.3.8.25
4.3.8.1 Single/Multi vend
This option is used to switch between the two options Single and Multi
-PAYMENT SETTINGS--
* Single/Multi vend
vend.
Set payment type
^ v Sel Esc
August, 2007 4 - 117

Submenu Description
Single/Multi vend The machine can be set for either single or multi
vend:
Single vend: Possible change is returned or the
card released after each vend.
Multi vend: Several drinks may be purchased one

after the other from one cash or card payment as
long as sufficient credit is available.
4.3.8.2 Set payment type
This option is used to define the payment type, ie the type of coin
Single/Multi vend
* Set payment type
mechanism in the vending machine.
Set max credit
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Set payment type Setting of the coin mechanism type available in
(0-4) the machine.
Options:
0 = OFF (no coin mechanism)
1 = MDB
2 = EXEC (Executive)
3 = BDV
4 = VAL (Coin Validator)
4.3.8.3 Set max credit
This option is used to set an amount for the maximum allowed credit.
Set payment type
* Set max credit
Set max change Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Set max credit Definition of the maximum amount which can be
inserted in one vend when the system is set to
multi vend.
4.3.8.4 Set max change
This option is used to set an amount for the maximum allowed change.
Set max credit
* Set max change
Obligation to buy
^ v Sel Esc
4 - 118 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Set max change Definition of the maximum amount which the coin
mechanism can return after a vend when the
system is set to multi vend.
If the coin credit remaining following a multi vend

is greater than the programmed max change
value, no change will be paid out. The full credit
will be retained until further purchases are made
reducing the credit below the maximum change
level.
4.3.8.5 Obligation to buy
This option is used to set the Obligation to buy option on or off.

Set max change
* Obligation to buy
Coin inhibit Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Obligation to buy If this option is set to [On], the customers have to
make at least one vend before the coin
mechanism will return the change.
The purpose of the function is to prevent that the
vending machine be used as a change giver.
4.3.8.6 Coin inhibit
This option is used to set the Coin inhibit status of the individual coin
Obligation to buy
* Coin inhibit
values in the coin unit.
Low change inhibit
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Coin inhibit (1-16) The coin inhibit option makes it possible to set the
coin unit to reject coins that are normally accepted
in the coin unit.
Coin inhibit 1 is the lowest-value coin. Status of up
to 16 coin values can be defined.
August, 2007 4 - 119

4.3.8.7 Low change inhibit
This option is used to set the Low change inhibit status of individual coins.
Coin inhibit
* Low change inhibit
Audit unit Ext/Int Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Low change inhibit The Low change inhibit option makes it possible to
(1-16) set the coin unit to reject coins that are normally
accepted when the stock of coins in the coin tubes
run low.
Coin 1 is the lowest-value coin. Status of up to 16
coin values can be defined.
4.3.8.8 Audit unit Ext/Int
If an external audit unit has been installed, it must be activated through this
Low change inhibit
* Audit unit Ext/Int.
option.
Exact change eq.
^ v Sel Esc Once activated, the external unit will take over all handling of audit data
sent from the coin mechanism, and at the same time the standard internal
unit will be deactivated.
Submenu Description
Audit unit Ext/Int Select [Ext] to activate the external audit unit.
Select [Int] if you want to deactivate the external

audit unit and go back to using the machine’s
internal audit unit.
4.3.8.9 Exact change eq.
The purpose of the Exact change equation option is to specify the

Audit unit Ext/Int
* Exact change eq.
preconditions for when the coin unit should switch to Coin tubes empty
Exact change offset mode and the vending machine will display [Use exact change].
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Exact change eq. Select a value between 0 and 15 according to the
combinations of tube empty states as defined in
the manual of the coin unit.
4 - 120 August, 2007

4.3.8.10 Exact change offset
The Exact change offset option renders the possibility of adding a number
Exact change eq.
* Exact change offset
of coins to the preprogrammed empty numbers in the coin tubes in order
Keyboard inhibit that the customer is requested to insert the exact amount before the coin
^ v Sel Esc unit switches to Coin tubes empty mode. See 4.3.8.9, Exact change eq., on
page 4-120.
Submenu Description
Exact change offset Enter a number between 0 and 15 to define exact
change offset.
Example:
The Exact change offset is set to 10.
The Exact change equation (4.3.8.9) is set to A
and B only (i.e. when the coin tubes A and B run
low, the machine will assume a Coin tubes empty
mode).
Result: When the amount of coins in the tubes A

or B is down to 10 above the empty mark, the
customer will be requested to insert exact change.
4.3.8.11 Keyboard inhibit.
If the coin unit is equipped with a keypad this may be deactivated.

Exact change offset
* Keyboard inhibit
Price mode Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Keyboard inhibit. Select [On] to deactivate the keyboard.
Select [Off] to activate the keyboard.
August, 2007 4 - 121

Interaction between vending machine and different payment systems
Introduction This section provides information about the interaction between the
vending machine and different types of payment systems, (coin
mechanisms or card systems). The section is intended as background
information to help understand the following four options of the Payment
Settings menu: 4.3.8.12 Price mode, 4.3.8.13 Price to index, 4.3.8.14 Zero
vend mode and 4.3.8.15 Zero vend index.
Two types of Roughly, the interaction between vending machine and payment system
interaction can take place in two ways, depending on the type of payment system
installed.
1 Real mode: All prices are set up in the vending machine’s own menu
system See Change prices on page 4-46.
Real mode: Prices set

in vending machine
Vending machine
Payment system
without price index
Drink Strength Mocca Sugar Whitener
Machine sends a
Fresh Brew Coffee
request for drink from
selection button 8 at
Black With Sugar White White and Sugar
price 0.75
Instant Coffee
Cappuccino Wiener Melange System returns

information about
Standard Extra Sugar Standard Extra Sugar
available credit.
Moccachoc Café au lait
4 - 122 August, 2007

2 Index mode (price holding mode): All prices are set up in the payment
system. In the vending machine, only index numbers referring to a
price in the payment system are set up.
Index mode:
• Prices set in payment system. Payment system
• Index numbers referring to prices in with price index
payment system are set in vending
machine.
Vending machine
Index Price
1 0.50
2 0.75
Machine sends a 3 0.75
request for drink from 4 1.00
Drink Strength Mocca Sugar Whitener selection button 4 at
5 0.75
Fresh Brew Coffee
price = index no. 8.
6 0.75
7 0.65
Instant Coffee
8 0.65
System looks up index
number 8 and corresponding 9 1.00

Cappuccino Wiener Melange
price (0.65). 10 0.75
Standard Extra Sugar Standard Extra Sugar
etc
System returns information
about selected drink/price
Standard With Sugar Standard With Sugar

and available credit.
4.3.8.12 Price mode
This option is used to select one of the price setting modes, Index or Real.
Keyboard inhibit
* Price mode
The choice of mode depends on which payment system is installed in the
Price to index machine. Certain payment systems allow prices to be set in the system
^ v Sel Esc itself, whereas others use the price settings from the vending machine, see
the section Interaction between vending machine and different payment
systems on page 4-122.
August, 2007 4 - 123

Submenu Description
Price mode The options are:
Index: (also known as price holding mode). Prices
of each drink are set in the payment system, e.g. a
coin unit, and only the index numbers that refer to
each drink in the payment system are set in the
Change prices menu.
Real: The actual prices of each drink are set in the

Change prices menu.
4.3.8.13 Price to index
Certain payment systems will hold a smaller number of index numbers/

Price mode
* Price to index
prices than the number of drinks available in the vending machine.
Zero vend mode
^ v Sel Esc If the number of drinks set up in the vending machine is higher than the
number of index numbers/prices available in the payment system, the Price
to index option will compensate for this disagreement.
The option is relevant only if the payment system is in Index mode (price
holding mode), and Price mode in the vending machine is set to Index, see
4.3.8.12.
Submenu Description
Price to index On: On a vend request, the value set in the vending
machine’s Change prices menu, 4.2.8.1 will be copied
to and used as price index.
Off: On a vend request the selection button number

will be used as price index.
4 - 124 August, 2007

Example The payment system (e.g. a coin mechanism) can hold only 10 index
numbers, while 24 drinks are available in the vending machine.
Illustration
Price to index:
• Prices are set in payment system. Payment system
• Index numbers referring to prices in with price index
payment system are set in vending
machine
Vending machine
Index Price
1 0.50
2 0.75
Machine sends a request for
drink from selection no. 12 at 3 0.75
price = index no. 6. 4 1.00
Drink Strength Mocca Sugar Whitener
5 0.75
Fresh Brew Coffee
The request is directed to
6 0.75
index 6 in payment system.
7 0.65
Instant Coffee
8 0.65
9 1.00
Cappuccino Wiener Melange
10 0.75
Standard Extra Sugar Standard Extra Sugar etc
Explanation Compared to illustration 2., Index mode, in the paragraph Two types of
interaction on page 4-122, the machine in the illustration above, sends the
price index no. 6 instead of the selection number 12 to the payment system.
This way the system compensates for the lack of numbers from 11 and
onwards.
When setting price index numbers in the vending machine, it must be

considered that all drink selections must comply with the limited number
of index numbers in the payment system. In the example above, all prices
must refer to one of 10 possible prices set in the payment system.
August, 2007 4 - 125

4.3.8.14 Zero vend mode
The Zero vend mode option makes it possible to register drink requests in
Price to index
* Zero vend mode
the payment system also when drinks are dispensed at a discount of 100%.
Zero vend index
^ v Sel Esc As a prerequisite, credit, e.g. a payment card, must be present in the
machine for the request to be sent to the payment system.
The Zero vend mode option does not apply to Freevend mode.
Submenu Description
Ask payment Yes: Vend requests will be sent to the payment
system? system also when drinks are dispensed at a
discount of 100 %.
No: No vend requests will be sent to the payment

system if drinks are dispensed at a discount of
100%.
4.3.8.15 Zero vend index
This option makes it possible to register drinks dispensed at 100%

Zero vend mode
* Zero vend index
discount, e.g. key discount or time discount, in a separate counter in the
Revalue payment system.
^ v Sel Esc
Drinks set to Freevend will not be registered here.
The option is relevant only if the payment system is in Index mode (price
holding mode), and Price mode in the vending machine is set to Index, see
4.3.8.12.
Submenu Description
Zero vend index Enter a number that corresponds to an index
number in the payment system at which the price
has been set at 0.00.
Example: If Index 10 in the payment system is set

at 0.00, enter 10 in the Zero vend index.
All drinks dispensed at 100% discount will be

registered at this index number.
4 - 126 August, 2007

4.3.8.16 Revalue
The Revalue option makes it possible to let customers add value to the
Zero vend index
* Revalue
credit amount on their cards.
Immediate change
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Revalue Select [On] to enable the Revalue option.
Select [Off] to disable the Revalue option.
4.3.8.17 Immediate change
With the Immediate change option the system can be set to claim credit and
Revalue
* Immediate change
return possible change right after a vend has been initiated. The Immediate
Currency code (auto) change option reduces vend time.
^ v Sel Esc
Note: If something goes wrong during delivery of the drink, the system
will not return the inserted amount when Immediate change is activated.
Submenu Description
Immediate change On: The amount of credit inserted is claimed
before the drink is dispensed, i.e. right after the
drink selection has been made.
Note: If Singlevend is set to On, possible change

will be paid out immediately.
Off: The credit will be claimed after the dispensing

of the drink.
August, 2007 4 - 127

4.3.8.18 Currency code (auto)
This option issued to select one of the currency codes that are preset in the
Immediate change
* Currency code (auto)
machine.
Currency code (man)
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Currency code Setting of the currency available in the machine.
(auto) Options:
EUR
DKR
GBP
SKR
NOK
Note: If the required currency code is not

available, see manual setting option below.
4.3.8.19 Currency code (man)
If the required currency code is not available among one of the preset
Currency code (auto)
* Currency code (man)
currency codes (see option above), the currency can be entered as a
Coin validator numeric code.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Currency code Enter the four-digit numeric code of the required
(man) currency as defined in the MDB/ICP protocol
specification.
For example, the code for EUR is ‘1978’
4.3.8.20 Coin validator
This option is used to configure the menu system in accordance with the
Currency code (man)
* Coin validator
coin validator installed in the vending machine.
Decimal point pos.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Coin validator The values listed under A, B, C etc. in this menu,
must correspond to the list of values marked on
the side of the coin validator.
It is possible to change the individual values if they

disagree with the values indicated on the coin
validator.
4 - 128 August, 2007

4.3.8.21 Decimal point position
The Decimal point position option is used to set the number of decimals to
Coin validator
* Decimal point pos.
be used in the system.
Freevend count.mode
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Decimal point pos. Enter the number of decimals to be used. The
options are 0, 1 or 2 decimals.
4.3.8.22 Freevend count.mode
This option makes it possible to register the sales amounts and the numbers
Decimal point pos.
* Freevend count.mode
of drinks dispensed as free vends in the ordinary sales audit counters for
Delayed Paymentmode paid vends.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Freevend Yes: The sales prices and numbers of the
count.mode individual drinks dispensed as free vends will be
registered in the sales audit counters for paid
vends as well as in the free vends counters.
No: Free vends will be registered in the free vends

counters, only.
4.3.8.23 Delayed Paymentmode
With the Delayed Paymentmode option the system is given extra time (up
Freevend count.mode
* Delayed Paymentmode
to eight seconds) to check for available credit on the inserted payment card
Set Cash Sale after a selection has been made by the user.
^ v Sel Esc
The option is intended for certain card systems, and will prevent that the
user has to repeat his/her selection.
Submenu Description
Allow payment after Yes: Select [Yes] to enable the delayed payment
SEL done? mode.
No: Select [No] to disable the delayed payment

mode.
August, 2007 4 - 129

4.3.8.24 Set Cash Sale
The Set Cash Sale option allows the collecting of cash sale audit data in an
Delayed Paymentmode
* Set Cash Sale
MDB card reader or an external audit device via an internal MDB Cash
Sess. Complete Mode Sale command.
^ v Sel Esc
The Cash Sale command is sent from the vending machine every time a
cash sale or a zero price vend is taking place.
Submenu Description
Set Cash Sale Off: The MDB Cash Sale command will only be
sent if an MDB card reader is connected and if this
card reader is supporting the Cash Sale
command.
MDB 1: The MDB Cash Sale command will be

sent in all cases of cash sales even if the MDB
card reader is not supporting the Cash Sale
command or the card reader is not present.
The MDB Cash Sale command will be directed to

the address of Cashless device 1.
MDB 2: See MDB 1 above.
The MDB Cash Sale command will be directed to

the address of Cashless device 2.
4.3.8.25 Sess. Complete Mode
The Session Complete Mode option has two different settings. If a cashless
Set Cash Sale
* Sess. Complete Mode
vend is denied, the user may have to remove and reinsert card or key in
order to make a new selection.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Sess. Complete On: The card or key must be removed and re-
Mode On/Off inserted before a new selection can be made.
Off: A different selection may be made after a

vend is denied without removing card or key.
Default setting is Off.
4 - 130 August, 2007

4.3.9 Multibrew settings menu
Introduction The Multibrew settings menu is used to set parameters for the multibrew
option.
This table describes the options of the Multibrew settings menu.

MULTIBREW SETTINGS
* Preset value
Min value Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Preset value The option is used to define a preset number of
portions between 0 and 20 to be dispensed when
the multibrew option is activated.
Example: A setting of 6 results in an automatic
dispensing of six portions when the multibrew
option is activated, provided that this number is
not changed by the user prior to activating.
Min value A number can be set to define a minimum of
portions to be dispensed during a multibrew vend.
The minimum possible number of portions is 1.

Max value A number can be set to define a maximum of
portions to be dispensed during a multibrew vend.
The maximum possible number of portions is 20.

Means of action This option is used to define how multibrew vends
should be activated. The options are:
Off: Multibrew is not possible.
Key: Multibrew is activated by a key.
But: Multibrew is activated by pressing the
Multibrew button.
See also the paragraph Key discount and
Multibrew settings, on page 4-132.
MB Discount The MB discount option makes it possible to set a
discount rate which is given on multibrew vends.

20% when the multibrew option is activated.
A setting of 100 means free vend.
August, 2007 4 - 131

Submenu Description
Optimised multibrew The Optimised multibrew option makes it possible
(FB Sigma brewers only) to decrease the dispense time for multibrew
vends.
Off: When Optimised multibrew is set to [Off’], a

multibrew vend is dispensed as a number of cup
sized portions, i.e. the brewer runs one cycle per
cup.
• This is shown in the display as a countdown

from the selected number of cups to zero, e.g.
from 6 to 0.
On: When Optimised multibrew is set to [On], a

multibrew is dispensed using a minimum number
of brewer cycles, so reducing the dispense time.
• Optimised multibrew is shown in the display by

a progressing bar.
Key discount and This table describes how the Key discount option (4.2.10.9) works together
Multibrew settings with different settings of the Multibrew option.
Multibrew Multibrew
Multibrew Key discount Key discount

Multibrew
Both key discount and multibrew Multibrew activated by multibrew
activated by key. button and key discount activated by
key.
Key discount: Key discount:

Key discount on drinks dispensed in Key discount on drinks dispensed in
cups is not possible. cups is possible.
Multibrew: Multibrew:
Multibrew is possible. Multibrew is possible.
If a discount has been defined for both If a higher discount has been defined
key discount and multibrew, the higher for key discount than for multibrew, the
discount rate will apply. higher discount is obtained when the
discount key is inserted during the
multibrew.
4 - 132 August, 2007

4.3.10 Change config. files menu
Introduction The Change config. files menu is used to choose menu language, recipe
settings and menu configurations.
This table describes the options of the Change config files menu.
CHANGE CONFIG. FILES
* Set language file
Set recipe file Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Set language file Select the required language file for the texts used
in credit display and Event log book.
Set recipe file Select the required recipe file.
Note: When changing the recipe file, please be

aware that the existing drink counters will be
overwritten by new ones with new text labels,
giving the impression that the present figures in
the non resettable counters apply to the new text
labels, (e.g. Coffee with milk may be replaced by
Chocolate).
To avoid erroneous information about the number

sold and turnover of individual drinks it may
therefore be recommended to read out the status
of the non resettable counters before switching to
a new recipe file.
Set menu file Select the required menu file.
August, 2007 4 - 133

4.3.11 Reload machine type menu*
The Reload machine type option is used to restore the settings that identify
the specific machine type.
This table describes the Reload machine type option.

Reload machine type
Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Reload machine Press [OK] to restore the machine type settings.
type
4 - 134 August, 2007

4.3.12 Stirrer/Sugar test menu *
Introduction The Stirrer/Sugar Test menu runs a test dispensing of accessories for
This table describes the Stirrer/Sugar test option.

Stirrer/Sugar test
Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc Es accessories only To test the Sugar/Stirrer dispensing system:
• Close the door.
• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [Stirrer/Sugar disp.
Continue?].
August, 2007 4 - 135

4.3.13 ES Test Functions menu (ES machines only)
Introduction The ES Test menu is used to test the parts of the espresso dispensing and
dosing system.
Options The ES Test Functions menu includes the following options:

• ES no accessories, see 4.3.13.1
• ES accessories only, see 4.3.13.2
• Grind and Dose, see 4.3.13.3
• ES brewer cycle, see 4.3.13.4
• ES airbreak empty, see 4.3.13.5
• ES boiler empty, see 4.3.13.6
• Manual boiler fill, see 4.3.13.7
To perform the ES functions tests, it is necessary to energize the machine.

This is done either by inserting the yellow service key into the door switch
or by closing the door. Some of the tests can be performed only by the use
of the yellow service key.
When the yellow service key is inserted, be careful not to touch moving or
energized parts.
See also the safety instructions in chapter 1.
In the ES Test Functions menu the system will time out after three minutes
of inactivity. Immediately before the time-out, four warning beeps (three
short and one long) will sound.
4 - 136 August, 2007

4.3.13.1 ES no accessories
The ES no accessories option makes it possible to dispense a dose of

--ES TEST FUNCTIONS---
ground coffee and water to test the espresso dispensing system. No stirrer,
* ES no accessories
ES accessories only
dry sugar or cup are dispensed.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Es no accessories To test the ES dispensing system:
• Insert service key or close door.
• Place waste bucket under the water outlet or
place a cup or pot on the cup elevator if the
door is closed.
• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [No accessories test.
Continue?].
• Press [OK] to start the test. A dose of ground
coffee and water will be dispensed.
The ES accessories only option runs a test dispensing of accessories (stirrer

ES no accessories
and dry sugar) for espresso drinks.
* ES accessories only
Grind and Dose
Es accessories only To test the ES accessories dispensing system:
• Hold a cup or beaker under the sugar and stir-
rer dispenser or place it on the elevator, if the
door is closed.
• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [Accessory only. Con-
tinue?].
August, 2007 4 - 137

4.3.13.3 Grind and Dose
The Grind and Dose test option is used to test the grinding grade and
ES accessories only
measure the amount of ground coffee for espresso drinks.
* Grind and Dose
ES brewer cycle
Grind and Dose Before running the Grind and Dose test:
• Remove the ES brewer, see chap. 5B, page
5B-56.
• Have a beaker ready.
To run the Grind and Dose test:
• Insert the service key.

• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [Grind to pot test. Con-
tinue?].
• Press [OK], and hold the beaker under the
grinder to catch the ground dose of coffee.
If adjustments to the dose of ground coffee are

necessary, please refer to chap. 5B, page 5B-62
If adjustments to the grinding grade are

necessary, please refer to the Operator manual.
4.3.13.4 ES brewer cycle
The ES brewer cycle runs a test of the brewer without dispensing any
Grind and Dose
powder.
* ES brewer cycle
ES airbreak empty
ES brewer cycle To run a brewer cycle test:
• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [Brewer cycle only.
Continue?].
• Press [OK] to start the test. The brewer will run
one cycle.
4 - 138 August, 2007

4.3.13.5 ES airbreak empty
The ES airbreak empty option is used to drain the air-break tank

ES brewer cycle
* ES airbreak empty Submenu Description
ES boiler empty
^ v Sel Esc ES airbreak empty Before emptying the air-break tank:
• Place empty waste bucket under the water out-
let.
• Insert service key.
(See detailed description of the procedure in
chap. 5A (ES), page 5A-30.).
To empty the air-break tank:

• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [ES AirBreak empty.
Continue?].
• Press [OK]. The cold water from the air-break
tank will be fed through the espresso boiler,
until the air-break tank is empty.
Refilling the air- Continue by emptying and refilling the boiler after emptying the air-break
break tank tank, see 4.3.13.6. Alternatively, the machine must be restarted to have the
airbreak tank refilled.
4.3.13.6 ES boiler empty
The ES boiler empty option is used to drain the ES boiler.

ES airbreak empty
* ES boiler empty
Manual boiler fill
^ v Sel Esc
To avoid hot water under pressure escaping from the boiler, empty the air-
break tank before emptying the ES boiler, see 4.3.13.5 above. After the
draining of the air-break tank, the ES boiler will automatically fill with
cold water.
August, 2007 4 - 139

Submenu Description
ES boiler empty Before emptying the ES boiler:
• Empty the air-break tank, see 4.3.13.5. above.
• Loosen inlet fitting at bottom of boiler.
See detailed description of the procedure in chap.
5A (ES), page 5A-31.
To empty the ES boiler:

• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [ES Dispense valve. Open
valve?]
• Press [OK] to start the emptying.
• Let the boiler empty completely.
• The display reads [ES Dispense valve. Valve will
timeout. Close valve?].
• Press [OK].
Remember to re-install inlet hose in ES boiler.
Refilling the boiler To refill the boiler, restart the machine or use the Manual boiler fill option,
see 4.3.13.7 below. See also chap. 5A, page 5A-32.
4.3.13.7 Manual boiler fill
The Manual boiler fill option is used if a manual filling of the ES boiler is
ES boiler empty
required.
* Manual boiler fill

Manual boiler fill Before filling the ES boiler manually:
• Re-install inlet hose in ES boiler.
• Place empty waste bucket under the water out-
let.
• Insert Service key.
See detailed description of the procedure in
chap. 5A (ES), page 5A-33.
To fill the ES boiler:

• Press [Sel].
• The display now reads [Manual boiler fill. Con-
tinue?].
• Press [OK] to start the filling. During the refill-
ing of the water tank, up to 0.9 l of water will be
forced through the boiler and into the waste
bucket to ensure that no air is left in the sys-
tem.
4 - 140 August, 2007

4.3.14 Test menu*
Introduction The Test menu makes it possible to perform various tests of the dispensing
system.

• Complete selections, see 4.3.14.1
• Drop cup, see 4.3.14.2
4.3.14.1 Complete selections
The Complete selections option makes it possible to dispense any of the

--------TEST--------
available drinks for testing.
* Complete selections
Drop cup
^ v Sel Esc Drinks that are dispensed as test drinks are registered in separate Test audit
counters and do not affect the sales counters.
Submenu Description
Complete selections Close the door. When the display reads
[DISPENSING TEST], press any selection key to
4.3.14.2 Drop cup
The Drop cup option makes it possible to run a test of the cup slide, cup
Complete selections
catcher and elevator by dropping a cup onto the cup elevator.
* Drop cup
^ v Sel Esc If the machine is equipped with Incup module and cup ring, the menu
contains two extra options.
August, 2007 4- 141

Submenu Description
Drop cup Close the door. The elevator goes up, and an empty
cup is dropped onto the cup elevator.
If the machine is equipped with Incup module, the

following additional options are available:
Standard cup: (as above)

an empty cup from the left column of the Incup

an empty cup from the right column of the Incup
4 - 142 August, 2007

4.3.15 Diagnostics/Test menu
Introduction The Diagnostics/Test menu is used to manually test the functioning of

various parts of the vending machine.
Options The Diagnostics/Test menu includes the following submenus:

• Overall functions, see 4.3.15
• Cup handling, see 4.3.15.2
• User interface, see 4.3.15.3
• Water/Power/Heat, see 4.3.15.4
• Sigma brewer 1, see 4.3.15.7
• Sigma brewer 2 (if applicable), see 4.3.15.8
• Freshbrewer 1 (FB Delta brewer only), see 4.3.15.7
• Freshbrewer 2 (if applicable), (FB Delta brewer only), see 4.3.15.8
During most of the tests, the door of the vending machine must be closed.
A warning message will appear if attempts are made to start a test while
the door is open.
In the Diagnostics/Test menu the system will time out after three minutes
of inactivity. Immediately before the time-out, four warning beeps (three
short and one long) will sound.
4.3.15.1 Overall functions
In the submenu Overall functions, the wittlink communication is tested,

--DIAGNOSTICS/TEST--
* Overall functions
i.e. the communication between the main prints. Furthermore, tests of the
Cup handling dispensing system can be made.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Wittlink test Tests the Wittlink communication status:
• VMC: Comm.: status OK or Not OK.
• SPC: Comm.: status OK or Not OK.
• FB1: Comm.: status OK or Not OK.
• FB2 (if applicable): status Comm. OK or not OK.
If the message [Not OK] is given, it is due to one of the

following reasons:
• Defective or not properly connected print. See how
prints are assembled or replaced in chap. 5K, page
5K-12 - 5K-17.
• PIC micro controller incorrectly inserted (turned
upside down) or missing. See how PIC micro
controller is inserted in chap. 5K, page 5K-21.
August, 2007 4 - 143

Submenu Description
Full dispense test Note: During this test it is not required that the door is
closed.
The test will reveal if any of the components of the

dispensing system have been incorrectly assembled.
Press [Sel] to start the test. The message [Please

remove the IN canisters] now appears in the display.
You may either remove the canisters or ignore the
message and continue the test by pressing [OK].
Note: If you run the test with the canisters still in the
machine, ingredient powder will be dropped into the
mixing funnels, but no water is used in this test.
Therefore, the funnels should be emptied after the test.
A test of the individual parts of the dispensing system

is performed in the following order:
• Fan: Tests if fan is running correctly by turning it on
for five seconds.
• Pump: Tests if pump is running correctly by turning
it on for five seconds.
• Brewer: Brewer is closed and water pressed
through cylinder to check valve and dispenser
motor.
(In machines with two brewers, the right most
brewer is checked first).
• IN module: A five second test of each instant
module one at a time is carried out in the following
order from left to right: ingredient motor 1, whipper
1, water inlet into mixing funnel 1, ingredient motor
2, whipper 2 etc.
Note: If the test order varies from the left-to-right order,

e.g. if ingredient motor 3 starts before ingredient motor
2, it is an indication that the modules have been
assembled incorrectly.
Test vend The Test vend option makes it possible to dispense
any of the available drinks for testing.
To perform the test, close the door. When the display

reads [DISPENSING TEST], press any selection key to
4 - 144 August, 2007

4.3.15.2 Cup handling
In the submenu Cup handling, functions related to the dispensing system

Overall functions
* Cup handling
are tested, i.e. cup sensors, cup ring, cup drop, cup delivery, cup
User interface conveyors, cup slide and cup elevator.
^ v Sel Esc
General error The following message may occur in all of the submenus of the Cup
message handling menu: [No response from SPC. Check comm. and PCB].
The message appears if nothing has happened within 20 seconds after the
start of the test.
Possible causes: Wittlink error, defective print. Perform the Wittlink test,
see first test of the Diagnostics/Test menu.
Submenu Description
Sensor test The following sensors are tested:
• Cup ring: status On or Off.
• Upper opto: status On or Off.
• Lower opto: status On or Off.
• Safety switch (switch at top of elevator housing):
status On or Off.
To carry out the test of the sensors, an object, e.g. a

cup or a pot must be placed on the platform or held in
front of the sensors and removed again. The status
should be On when the sensor detects an object, and
Off when it is removed.
If the status of a sensor does not switch from On to Off

or vice versa when an object is inserted or removed, it
is an indication that the switch or sensor is defective or
not correctly positioned. Check the sensor in question
and replace if necessary.
See how switch and sensors are replaced in chap. 5D,

page 5D-19 - 5D-25.
Cup ring test Runs a test of the cup drop ring motor and switch by
dropping a cup.
Press [Sel] to start the test. After a successful test the

message [Cup was dropped correctly] is given.
If the test is not successful, either the general error

message mentioned at the beginning of this section or
one of the following messages will appear in the
display:
August, 2007 4 - 145

Submenu Description
Cup ring test 1. [‘ERROR! Cup drop ring motor time out]
(continued) Possible causes:
- Motor disconnected, defective wire, defective
motor, defective switch. See how cup drop ring
motor or switch is replaced in chap. 5D, page 5D-5 -
5D-6.
- Defective SPC. See how the SPC is replaced in
chap. 5K, page 5K-17.
2. [ERROR! Cup ring/sw/motor not mounted correctly]
Possible causes:
- Motor or switch incorrectly installed (motor running
in the wrong direction).
- Actuator arm needs adjusting
Cup drop test Runs a test of the cup slide and cup catcher by
dropping a cup into the cup catcher.
Press [Sel] to start the test.

After a successful test the message [Cup was dropped
correctly] is given.

display:
1. [Cup drop ring motor time out]
Possible causes:
motor. See how cup drop ring motor or switch is
replaced in chap. 5D, page 5D-5 - 5D-6.
- Defective SPC. See how the SPC is replaced in
2. [Cup ring/sw/motor not mounted correctly]
Possible causes:
- Motor or switch incorrectly installed (motor running
in the wrong direction).
- Actuator arm needs adjusting.
3. [Cup did not land correctly in cup catcher] (upper
cup sensor has detected a cup, but the cup has not
fallen to a position below the sensor.)
Possible causes:
- Cup does not fit into cup catcher (wrong cup size
or wrong cup catcher).
- Cup catcher needs adjusting. See how cup
catcher is removed in Operator manual.
- Cup does not fit into cup catcher (wrong cup size
or wrong cup drop ring). See choice of cup drop ring
in chap. 5D, page 5D-37.
4. [Cup was never seen by the upper cup sensor]
(upper cup sensor has not detected any cup).
Possible causes:
- Cup brake has been bent and therefore prevents
the cup from being dropped onto the elevator
platform.
- Cups stick together due to static electricity.
- Causes mentioned under item 3 above.
4 - 146 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Cup delivery test Runs a complete vend cycle with cup drop and
elevator movement, but without dispensing a test drink.

Left cup indexing Performs a test run of the cup stack conveyor in the left
side of the cup magazine by dropping a cup stack into
the cup ring.

Note: The middle cup stack must be removed prior to
the testing. If it has not been removed, the following
message will be given: [Please remove the middle
stack of cups]. Remove middle stack and press any
key to continue.
After a successful test the message [Cup was dropped


display:
1. [Left side empty. No cup stack ready]
Load cups into left side of cup magazine.
2. [Cup magazine motor time out]
Possible causes:
motor. See how cup conveyor motor is replaced in
chap. 5D, page 5D-10
- Defective SPC. See how SPC is replaced in chap.
5K, page 5K-17.
- Cup conveyor is stuck or moves too slowly, for
example due to friction caused by interference with
other parts or missing lubrication.
3. [Switches / Motor connectors interchanged]
Possible cause: Wires for motor or switch incorrectly
connected.
Right cup indexing Similar to Left cup indexing but testing the cup stack
conveyor in the right side of the cup magazine.
Test cup slide Tests that the cup slide is able to move to five possible
vend-mode positions: Close, Clip, Open. ([Open] is
shown two times: The first time the cup slide is moved
to a position that gives a small opening while the
second time it will be fully opened).
To perform the test:

1. Press [Sel]. The cup slide will move to Close
position.
2. Press any key to go back, and press [Sel] again.
The cup slide now moves to Clip position.
3. Repeat step 2 to go to the remaining positions.
August, 2007 4 - 147

Submenu Description
Test cup slide If the cup slide is not able to move to one or more of
(continued) the positions, either the general error message
mentioned at the beginning of this section or one of the
following messages will appear in the display:
1. [No sw found. No motor movement detected]
Possible causes:
motor. See how the motor is replaced in chap. 5D,
page 5D-15.
5K, page 5K-17.
- Foreign body is blocking the movement of the cup
slide.
2. [Motor moved, but pos. was not found]
Possible causes:
- Grease, dirt or foreign body obstructing the
movement of the cup slide.
- Defective switch (a switch may have been
activated but not the correct one). See how position
switches are replaced in chap. 5D, page 5D-13.
Test elevator Tests that the cup elevator can move to the three stop
positions: Top, Middle, Bottom.

1. Press [Sel] The elevator will move to Top position.
The elevator now moves to Middle position.
3. Repeat to go to the Bottom position.
If the cup elevator is not able to move to one or more of

the stop positions, either the general error message
mentioned at the beginning of this section or one of the
following messages will appear in the display:
1. [Object on elevator, sensor blocked.
Please remove object]
Possible cause: Cup or other object placed on
elevator during test. The elevator must be empty
during testing.
2. [Upper opto sensor was activated.
Test cannot continue]
Possible cause: Object detected by the upper opto
sensor. Any object that is detected by the upper
opto sensor will stop the movement of the elevator.
3. [No sw found. No motor movement detected]
Possible causes:
motor. See how elevator motor is replaced in chap.
5D, page 5D-29.
- Defective switch. See how position switches are
replaced in chap. 5D, page 5D-25.
5K, page 5K-17
- Foreign body is blocking the movement of the cup
slide.
4 - 148 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Test elevator 4. [Motor moved, but pos was not found]
- Grease, dirt or foreign body obstructing the
movement of the elevator. A transparent glass jug,
for example, could trigger this message if the jug is
not detected by the sensors.
- Defective switch (a switch may have been
activated but not the correct one). See how position
switches are replaced in chap. 5D, page 5D-25.
4.3.15.3 User interface
The User interface submenu is a test of selection buttons, display, pre-

Cup handling
* User interface
selection LEDs, doorlight, initialization text and coin return motor.
Water/Power/Heat
^ v Sel Esc
General error The following message may occur in all of the submenus of the User
message interface menu: [No response from SPC. Check comm. and PCB].
start of the test.
see first test of the Diagnostics/Test menu, and/or check print.
August, 2007 4 - 149

Submenu Description
Button/Key test Tests the operating panel buttons and key.

• Press the coin return button. The status will change
from Off to On until released.
• Turn the Multibrew/Discount key. The status will
change from Off to On or vice versa.
• Press any selection, pre-selection, multibrew or
cancel button. The display will show the index
number of the pressed key until it is released.
To leave this menu wait for the system to time out after
10 seconds of inactivity. A timer shown in the lower
right corner of the display counts down from 10 to 0.
The message [Error!! Button hanging] is shown if a

button on the selection panel is stuck. In most cases it
will be sufficient to loosen the selection panel and
nudge the button into place again. If that, however,
does not help, the selection panel must be taken out
and the button(s) in question adjusted or replaced.
See how selection buttons are replaced in chap. 5G,

page 5G-15.
Display test Shows the selected character set used in the display.
The first window shows letters and numbers, the
second shows special characters.
A sure indicator that the wrong display has been

installed is if the arrow shown in the special characters
window does not have a proper arrow head.
Pre. sel. led test Tests the LEDs above the preselection buttons.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. The machine runs a

test of the LEDs from left to right. A beep will sound
when the test is completed.
Door light toggle Tests poster doorlight.
To perform the test, press [Sel] to turn doorlight on or

off (the display shows whether it is turned on or off).
Test Init. text Runs the initialization text, i.e. the text that is shown in
the display during power up of the machine or when it
is switching from menu to vend mode.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. The display will run the
initialization text. Press any button to stop the test.
4 - 150 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Coin return motor Performs a test run of coin return motor.
After a successful test the message [Motor and switch

working correctly] is given.

the following message will appear in the display:
1. [Switch or motor not correctly connected]
Possible causes:
motor, defective switch. See how the coin
mechanism is removed in chap. 5G, page 5G-5.
- Defective SPC.See how SPC is replaced in chap.
5K, page 5K-17
- Foreign body is blocking the movement of the coin
return motor, e.g. if the coin mechanism has been
incorrectly installed.
August, 2007 4 - 151

4.3.15.4 Water/Power/Heat
The Water/Power/Heat submenu checks the VMC (Vending Machine

User interface
* Water/Power/Heat
Controller) by performing test runs of the water sensors, the pump, the
Freshbrewer 1 water heater, the fan, the branch pipe, the whippers, the valves and the IN
^ v Sel Esc motors.
General error The following message may occur in all of the submenus of the Water/
message Power/Heat menu: [No response from VMC. Check comm. and PCB].
start of the test.
Submenu Description
Water sensors Status of the following sensors is shown:
• Temperature sensor: current temperature shown.
• Water level sensor: status On or Off.
• Solid waste sensor (in coffee waste bucket): status
On or Off.
• Liquid waste sensor (in waste bucket or drip tray,
depending on machine type): status On or Off.
Pump on/off Tests if the pump is running correctly by turning it on

for two seconds.
Heater on/off Tests if the heater is functioning correctly by turning it
on for five seconds.
Fan on/off Tests if the fan is running correctly by turning it on for
five seconds.
Test branch pipe Tests that the branch pipe can move to Home and Out
positions.

1. Press [Sel]. The branch pipe will move to Home
position.
The branch pipe now moves Out position.
If the test run is not successful, either the general error

display:
1. [Switches/motor connectors interchanged]
Possible cause: Wires for motor or switch incorrectly
connected.
4 - 152 August, 2007

Submenu Description
Test branch pipe 2. [No sw found. No motor movement detected]
motor, defective switch. See how drive assembly
motor is disassembled in chap. 5C, page 5C-12.
- Defective VMC. See how the VMC is replaced in
Test whipper no. x Runs a test of selected whipper for 0.5 seconds.
To perform the test, press [Sel], select whipper no. (no.

1 = left most whipper) and press [OK].
More whippers can be tested subsequently.
Test all whippers Runs a test of all whippers in a sequence from left to
right.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. A beep will sound after

the testing of each whipper. Press any button to stop
the test.
Test valve no. x Runs a test of selected valve for 0.5 seconds.
To perform the test, press [Sel], select valve no., and

press [OK].
More valves can be tested subsequently.
Test all IN valves Runs a test of all valves in a sequence.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. A beep will sound after

the testing of each valve. Press any button to stop the
test.
Test IN motor no. x Runs a test of selected IN motor for two seconds.
To perform the test, press [Sel], select IN motor no.

(no. 1 = left most IN motor), and press [OK].
The message [Please remove the IN canisters] now

appears in the display. You may either remove the
canisters or ignore the message and continue the test
by pressing any key.
More IN motors can be tested subsequently.

the following message will appear in the display:
August, 2007 4 - 153

Submenu Description
Test IN motor no. x 1. [Ing. motor x overload]
- Worn motor or gear. See how motor is changed in
chap. 5C, page 5C-9.
- Ingredient canister spout is closed. If you run the
test without removing the ingredient canisters, the
spouts must be open during testing. Open spout(s)
and retry.
Test all IN motors Runs a test of all IN motors in a sequence from left to
right.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. The message [Please

remove the IN canisters] now appears in the display.
You may either remove the canisters or ignore the
message and continue the test by pressing any key.
Press any button to stop the test.

the following messages will appear in the display:
1. [Ing. motor x overload]
Possible causes:
- Worn motor or gear. See how motor is changed in
chap. 5C, page 5C-9.
- Ingredient canister spout is closed. If you run the
test without removing the ingredient canisters, the
spouts must be open during testing. Open spout(s)
and retry.
4 - 154 August, 2007

4.3.15.5 Sigma brewer 1
The Sigma brewer 1 submenu tests the Sigma freshbrewer.

Water/Power/Heat
* Sigma brewer 1
Sigma brewer 2
^ v Sel Esc
submenu Description
Brewer positions Tests that Sigma brewer 1 can move to three positions:
Open, Near close and Close.

1. Press [Sel]. The brewer will move to Open position.
The fresh brewer now moves to Near close position.
3. Repeat to go to the Close position.
If the test is not successful, one of the following

messages will appear in the display:
• [ERROR! Brewer position Open] or
[ERROR! Brewer position Near close] or
[ERROR! Brewer position Close]
Possible causes:
- Brewer is not working satisfactory. Disassemble
brewer and check. See chap 5B.
- No tacho received or no current. This error may
arise if the door has been opened and closed again
while the brewer tried to find its position. Otherwise,
check wire connections.
- Wires for brewer disconnected or defective.
- Sigma brewer controller defective.
- Unexpected current from brewer.
Move piston forward Tests that the piston can move forwards in the brewer
cylinder.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. The piston will move to

Front position.

1. [ERROR! Piston position Front]
Possible causes: - Foreign body blocking the
movement of the piston.
- Motor error.
2. [ERROR! Piston sync. error]
Possible causes:
- Foreign body stuck between piston and filter plate.
- Sigma brewer controller defective.
August, 2007 4 - 155

submenu Description
Move piston back This test may be performed only after having
performed the Move piston forward” test above.
Tests that the piston can move backwards in the

brewer cylinder.
To perform the test, press [Sel]. The piston will move to

Back position.

1. [ERROR! Piston position Front]
Possible causes: See above.
2. [ERROR! Piston sync. error]
Possible causes: See above.
4.3.15.6 Sigma brewer 2
If the machine is equipped with two brewers a submenu similar to the

Sigma brewer 1
* Sigma brewer 2
Sigma brewer 1 is available for Sigma brewer 2.
Freshbrewer 1
^ v Sel Esc
4.3.15.7 Freshbrewer 1 (FB Delta brewer only)
The Freshbrewer 1 submenu tests the Delta freshbrewer and the IN motor
Sigma brewer 2
* Freshbrewer 1
no.1.
Freshbrewer 2
^ v Sel Esc
General error The following message may occur in all of the submenus of the
message Freshbrewer 1 submenu: [No response from FB1/FB2. Check comm. and
PCB].
start of the test.
4 - 156 August, 2007

submenu Description
Test FB1 positions Tests that Freshbrewer 1 can move to three positions:
Fully open, Close and Bottom.

1. Press [Sel]. The brewer will move to Fully open
position.
The fresh brewer now moves to Close position.
3. Repeat to go to the Bottom position.

display:
1. [Brewer moved but no switch activation]
Possible causes: Brewer is not working satisfactory.
Disassemble brewer and check. See chap. 5B,
page 5B-24.
2. [FB1 filter plate, filter needs cleaning]
Remove filter plate. Clean, descale or replace filter,
see Operating instructions.
3. [FB1 error or not connected]
Possible causes:
- Foreign body stuck between piston and filter plate.
- FB print defective, see how print is replaced in
4. [Unexpec. current]
Possible causes: Unexpected current from brewer.
Short circuit of FB1 print or defective FB1 print.
Check print, replace if necessary, see chap. 5K,
page 5K-15.
5. [FB1 short circuit]
Possible cause: Fatal short circuit of FB1 print.
Replace print, see chap. 5K, page 5K-15.
6. [Brewer or IN motor moved unexpectedly]
Possible causes: The brewer or IN motor has made
unexpected movement, e.g. if IN motor has been
turned by hand.
Move piston up Tests that the piston can move to a selected position,
upwards in cylinder.
To perform the test, press [Sel], enter a value between

0 and 255 millimetres to tell the system how far you
want the piston to move. Press [Sel] again to start the
test. Now two things may happen:
August, 2007 4 - 157

submenu Description
Move piston up 1. The piston stops when the cylinder has moved the
(continued) selected distance, and the message [Entered
distance moved correctly] is given.
2. The piston stops when one of the positions Fully
open, Closed or Bottom is reached, and the
message [Could not move dist. Close/End pos.
found] appears.
If the test is not successful, the same messages as

apply to the FB1 positions test above may appear in
the display.
Move piston down Tests that the piston can move down, downwards in
cylinder.
The test is performed in the same way as Move piston

up above.
Test IN motor 1 Performs a testrun of IN motor 1 (brewer motor).
To perform the test, press [Sel]. The motor will run for
five seconds.
After a successful test the message [IN motor working


display:
1. [IN motor did not move or no tacho received]
Possible causes:
switch. see how IN motor is disassembled in chap.
5B, page 5B-24.
- Tacho circuit defective, see how tacho board is
disassembled in chap. 5B, page 5B-37
2. The messages mentioned under items 4-6 in the
FB1 positions test above applies to this test as well.
4.3.15.8 Freshbrewer 2 (FB Delta brewer only)
If the machine is equipped with two brewers, a submenu similar to the

Freshbrewer 1
* Freshbrewer 2
Freshbrewer 1 is available for Freshbrewer 2.
^ v Sel Esc
4 - 158 August, 2007

4.3.16 Change password menu
Introduction The Change password menu is used to change the password used to access
the Technician menu.
Change password Submenu Description

Enter new password Enter a new four-digit password and press [OK] to
^ v Sel Esc
confirm.
August, 2007 4 - 159

Programming 7600 Programming
4.3.17 GSM settings menu
Introduction The GSM settings menu is used to set communication parameters when a
GSM modem is installed in the vending machine.
Options The GSM settings menu includes the following options:

• GSM On/Off, see 4.3.17.1
• PIN Code, see 4.3.17.2
• Pre-Alarms, see 4.3.17.3
• Bank ID’s, see 4.3.17.4
• Reset GSM relations, see 4.3.17.5
4.3.17.1 GSM On/Off
The GSM On/Off option is used to enable or disable detection of a GSM

---GSM Settings----
* GSM On/Off
modem during power-up of the vending machine.
PIN Code
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
GSM On/Off When GSM On/Off is set to On, the machine will
check at each power-up if a GSM modem is
connected.
If the setting is changed (from On to Off or vice

versa), the vending machine will have to be restarted
before the new setting applies.
Note: When GSM is set to On no other forms of

communication, e.g. by IR, serial data cable, hand-
held terminal or configurator is possible.
4.3.17.2 PIN Code
This option makes it possible to assign a PIN code to the GSM modem SIM
GSM On/Off
card. A PIN code will prevent misuse of the SIM card if this is removed
* PIN Code
Pre-Alarms
from the modem and inserted into another device.
^ v Sel Esc
Note: The exact same PIN code must be set up in the corresponding Flash
program.
Submenu Description
PIN Code Enter a four-digit PIN code and press [OK] to confirm.
4 - 160 August, 2007

4.3.17.3 Pre-Alarms
In the Pre-Alarms submenu, threshold values, e.g. for the number of cups
PIN Code
used, may be set. This will result in alarm messages being sent when the
* Pre-Alarms
Bank ID’s
threshold values are reached.
^ v Sel Esc
Furthermore, the counters of the threshold values may be reset.
Submenu Description
Set GSM Thresholds Set cups: Enter the number of dispensed cups
that will result in a message being sent to the
receiving computer.
Example: If the number 200 is entered, a

message will be sent when 200 cups have been
dispensed since the last resetting of pre-alarms.
Set stirrer: Enter the number of dispensed stirrers

that will result in a message being sent to the
receiving computer (applies to Espresso and IN
machines with sugar/stirrer dispenser).
Set powder: Enter the number of dispensed

portions of ingredients that will result in a
message being sent to the receiving computer.
Number of portions must be set for each individual
type of ingredient, i.e.:
• Powder from ingredient canisters 1-8.
• Sugar (applies to Espresso and IN machines
with sugar/stirrer dispenser).
• FB1: From coffee canister 1 (applies to
freshbrew machines).
• FB2: From coffee canister 2 (applies to
freshbrew machines with two freshbrew units).
• Espresso: From coffee bean canister (applies
to Espresso machines).
Set syrup: Enter the number of dispensed portions

of syrup that will result in a message being sent to
the receiving computer (applies to machines
equipped with cold unit with syrup kit).
Reset Pre-Alarm cnt. Press [OK] to reset the counters of all of the above
mentioned threshold values.
The pre-alarm counters should be reset after each

refill of cups, stirrers and ingredients.
August, 2007 4 - 161

Programming 7600 Programming
4.3.17.4 Bank ID’s
Up to eight vending machines may be banked, i.e. operate in a CAN bus

Pre-Alarms
network that links to the same GSM modem. When banked, vending
* Bank ID’s
Reset GSM relations
machines must be given individual IDs.
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Bank ID’s Enter a number between 0 and 7 to identify the
vending machine.
Note: The machine in which the modem is

installed is the Master. The Master must be given
the ID no. 0.
4.3.17.5 Reset GSM relations
The Reset GSM relations option resets the D/A configuration that has been
Pre-Alarms
sent to the GSM modem to establish a connection between computer and
* Reset GSM relations GSM modem, e.g. telephone numbers (to modem and SMS exchange) and
^ v Sel Esc ID number.
Note: To re-establish the connection, send the D/A configuration from the
Flash program again.
Submenu Description
Reset GSM pc <-> vm Press [OK] to reset the GSM relation between
vending machine(s) and pc.
4 - 162 August, 2007

4.3.18 Daylight saving
Introduction The Daylight saving menu is used to enable or disable the feature that
automatically adjusts the time when daylight saving begins and ends.
---DaylightSaving----
* Use DaylightSaving?
Submenu Description
^ v Sel Esc
Use DaylightSaving? Yes: Select [Yes] to enable the automatic daylight
saving adjustment feature.
The change times are:

• Last Sunday in March. At 02:00 the clock is
automatically adjusted to 03:00.
• Last Sunday in October. At 03:00. the clock is
automatically adjusted to 02:00.
No: Select [No] to disable the automatic daylight

saving feature.
The default setting is [Yes].
August, 2007 4 - 163

4.3.19 UPKEY Utility
Introduction An Up-Key is a memory device which can contain setup files and audit
files from different vending machines.
The UPKEY Utility serves two purposes:

1. Setup data: All information about the setup of a vending machine can
be copied to an Up-Key, and these setup data may be loaded into other
vending machines of the same type.
2. Statistics data: All statistics (audit) data collected in the vending
machine may be copied to and Up-Key. These data may later be proc-
essed in a pc using FLASH software.
The UPKEY Utility menu includes the following options:

• Setup files, see 4.3.19.1
• Statistics files, see 4.3.19.2
4.3.19.1 Setup files
With the Setup files option, all information about machine settings may be
---UPKEY Utility----
* Setup files
copied from one vending machine to other machines of the same type.
Statistics files
^ v Sel Esc
Submenu Description
Setup files Read: Uploads a setup data file from the Up-Key into
the vending machine in which the Up-Key is inserted.
To upload a file, select a file on the Up-Key using the
V and ^ scroll buttons, and press [Sel] to start the
process.
Write: Copies all setup data from the vending

machine to the inserted Up-Key.
To download, enter a file name of eight characters

using the (-), (+) and -> buttons. Default name is
WITT0000.stp. Press [Sel] to start the process.
Delete: Deletes single setup files from the Up-Key.

To delete a file, select the file to be deleted using the
V and ^ scroll buttons, and press [Sel].
Format: Clears all setup files currently stored on the

Up-Key.
4 - 164 August, 2007

4.3.19.2 Statistics files
The statistics files option makes it possible to copy all statistics (audit) data
setup files
from the vending machine to an Up-Key.
*Statistics files

Statistics files Write: Copies all statistics data from the vending
machine to the inserted Up-Key.
To copy, enter a file name of eight characters using

the (-), (+) and -> buttons. Default name is
WITT0000.sta. Press [Sel] to start the process.
Delete: Deletes single statistics files from the Up-Key.

To delete a file, select the file to be deleted using the
V and ^ scroll buttons, and press [Sel].
Format: Clears all statistics files currently stored on

the Up-Key.
August, 2007 4 - 165

4.4 Appendices
Introduction This chapter contains features or functions which are related to the
software but not integrated in the menu structure.
List of appendices
No. Appendix Models
1. File system clean-up FB/IN/ES - section 4.4.1.1
4 - 166 August, 2007

4.4.1 File system clean-up
Introduction The File system clean-up procedure is used to optimize the space in the
flash memory.
Note: No settings or audit data are deleted during the clean-up procedure.
Caution:
Electrostatic discharge may cause damage to Printed Circuit Boards
(PCBs) and electronic components.
To avoid damage:
• Always wear an anti-static wrist wrap when handling PCBs or
electronic components.
• Alternatively touch a metal area of the earthed cabinet to discharge
static electricity from your body prior to touching any PCB or
electronic component.
4.4.1.1 Cleaning the file system
This table describes how to clean up the file system by using the button on
the CPU board. The procedure can be carried out only during power up of
the machine.

1. Open the door and turn off the machine on the main switch.
2. Loosen two screws (1).
2
3. Remove cover plate (2).
August, 2007 4 - 167


4. With the one hand, press
and hold the button on the
CPU board.
While pressing the button,

turn on the machine on the
main switch with the other
hand.
The machine now starts

beeping.
5. Release and press the CPU board button once again.
Note: This must be done within 5 seconds (5 beeps) after the machine
has been turned on. Otherwise, the machine will continue the normal start
up procedure and no files will be deleted.
A long beep now indicates that the system is being cleaned up.
4 - 168 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series
Table of contents
Functions 5
Total Overview 5.1
General safety instructions 5.2
(FB/IN) Water system A
(FB/IN) Adjustments A.1
(FB/IN) Total overview of the water system A.2
(FB/IN) (Dis-)assemblies A.3
(FB/IN) Removing the boiler cover A.3.1
(FB/IN) Removing the pump cover A.3.2
(FB/IN) Draining water from the boiler A.3.3
(FB/IN) Removing the boiler A.3.4
(FB/IN) Removing the lid for boiler from its suspension bracket A.3.5
(FB/IN) Removing the temperature sensor (thermal feeler) A.3.6
(FB/IN) Removing the overboil thermostat A.3.7
(FB/IN) Resetting the overboil thermostat A.3.8
(FB/IN) Removing the water level sensor (electrode) A.3.9
(FB/IN) Disassembling the heating element and
dry-boiling thermostat A.3.10
(FB/IN) Resetting the dry-boiling thermostat A.3.11
(FB/IN) Disassembling the water inlet filter with reflux
valve and the supply hose A.3.12
(FB/IN) Removing the inlet valve A.3.13
(FB/IN) Resetting the pressure security valve of the inlet valve A.3.14
(FB/IN) Removing the recirculation valve A.3.15
(FB/IN) Removing and disassembling the water pump A.3.16
(FB/IN) Rearranging/replacing the water tubes for instant
ingredients A.3.17
(FB/IN) Removing a dispensing valve for instant ingredients A.3.18
(FB/IN) Removing the dispensing valve for Freshbrewer unit A.3.19
(FB/IN) Replacing the water purifying filter cartridge A.3.20
(FB/IN) Functional descriptions A.4
(FB/IN) Total overview of the water system A.4.1
(FB/IN) Function: Inlet valve and water inlet into the boiler A.4.2
(FB/IN) Function: Heating and temperature regulation A.4.3
(FB/IN) Function: Water outlet system and outlet valves A.4.4
(FB/IN) Water flow diagrams A.5
(FB/IN) Technical specifications A.6
(FB/IN) Options A.7
(FB/IN) Accessories A.8
(ES) Espresso Water system A
(ES) Adjustments A.1
(ES) Total overview of the espresso water system A.2
(ES) (Dis-)assemblies A.3
August, 2007 5-1

(ES) Emptying the air-break tank A.3.1

(ES) Draining water from the espresso boiler A.3.2
(ES) Filling the espresso boiler A.3.3
(ES) Opening / removing the front cover of the espresso boiler
module A.3.4
(ES) Resetting the dry-boiling thermostat A.3.5
(ES) Disassembling / replacing the control circuit board for
the espresso boiler A.3.6
(ES) Removing the complete espresso boiler unit A.3.7
(ES) Removing the boiler temperature sensor A.3.8
(ES) Removing / replacing the by-pass valve and / or
the no-return valve A.3.9
(ES) Removing / replacing the thermic protection (Klixon) A.3.10
(ES) Removing / replacing the heating element A.3.11
(ES) Removing the espresso boiler module from machine A.3.12
(ES) Removing / replacing the pump A.3.13
(ES) Removing the lid for air-break tank A.3.14
(ES) Removing / replacing the switch and the float of the
air-break tank A.3.15
(ES) Replacing the water filter for flowmeter A.3.16
(ES) Removing the air-break tank A.3.17
(ES) Gaining access to the interior parts of the espresso boiler
module A.3.18
(ES) Removing / replacing the 3-way valve on the
espresso boiler A.3.19
(ES) Removing / replacing the 125°C thermostat (dry-boiling
thermostat) A.3.20
(ES) Removing / replacing the volumetric counter (flowmeter) A.3.21
(ES) Functional descriptions A.4
(ES) Total overview of the water system with ES unit A.4.1
(ES) Overview of espresso water system A.4.2
(ES) Air-break tank and volumetric counter (flowmeter) A.4.3
(ES) Pump, by-pass and espresso boiler A.4.4
(ES) Water flow diagram A.5
(ES) Technical specifications A.6
(ES) Options A.7
(ES) Accessories A.8
(FB Sigma) Brewer System B

(FB Sigma) Adjustments B.1
(FB Sigma) Overview of brewer parts B.2
(FB Sigma) (Dis-)assemblies B.3
(FB) Removing the entire brewer unit B.3.1
(FB) Removing the scraper motor assembly B.3.2
(FB) Removing / Replacing the scraper motor B.3.3
(FB) Disassembling the driving parts of the scraper motor B.3.4
(FB) Removing the brewer motor assembly B.3.5
(FB) Removing / Replacing the brewer motor B.3.6
5-2 August, 2007

(FB) Disassembling driving parts of brewer motor without

removing motor B.3.7
(FB) Removing / Replacing the optical sensor of the
brewer motor B.3.8
(FB Sigma) Function of the brewer B.4
(FB Sigma) Electrical diagrams B.5
(FB Sigma) Technical specifications B.6
(FB Sigma) Options B.7
(FB Sigma) Accessories B.8
(FB Delta) Brewer System B

(FB Delta) Adjustments B.1
(FB Delta) Overview of brewer parts B.2
(FB Delta) (Dis-)assemblies B.3
(FB) Safety instructions B.3.1
(FB) Disassembling the brewer unit B.3.2
(FB) Testing the brewer unit next to the machine B.3.3
(FB) Removing the brewer cylinder, filter plate holder
and scraper B.3.4
(FB) Removing the brewer housing B.3.5
(FB) Disassembling the tie rods B.3.6
(FB) Removing the ingredient motor B.3.7
(FB) Disassembling the scraper arms B.3.8
(FB) Removing the actuator B.3.9
(FB) Disassembling the tachoboard B.3.10
(FB) Removing the actuator motor B.3.11
(FB) Disassembling the actuator and its driving parts B.3.12
(FB) Disassembling driving parts of actuator without
removing actuator B.3.13
(FB) Replacing the microswitch BSSW B.3.14
(FB) Replacing the ejector spring B.3.15
(FB) Replacing the gaskets of the piston B.3.16
(FB) Removing and descaling the filter plate B.3.17
(FB) General notes B.3.18
(FB Delta) Function of the brewer B.4
(ES Z3000) Espresso brewer system B
(ES Z3000) Adjustments B.1
(ES Z3000) Overview of parts B.2
(ES Z3000) (Dis-)assemblies B.3
(ES) Removing the espresso brewer B.3.1
(ES) Disassembling the upper piston of the espresso brewer B.3.2
(ES) Disassembling outer parts of the espresso brewer B.3.3
(ES) Disassembling the brewer chamber assembly B.3.4
(ES) Disassembling the lower piston of the espresso brewer B.3.5
(ES) Changing the brewer chamber volume of the
espresso brewer B.3.6
August, 2007 5-3

(ES) Adjusting the espresso coffee dose B.3.7

(ES) Disassembling the coffee motor B.3.8
(ES) Replacing the brewer park switch B.3.9
(ES) Removing the coffee doser unit B.3.10
(ES) Replacing the switch of the coffee doser unit B.3.11
(ES) Replacing the solenoid of the coffee doser unit B.3.12
(ES) Removing the grinder unit B.3.13
(ES) Replacing the brushes of the grinder motor B.3.14
(ES) Removing the regulating screw of the grinder B.3.15
(ES) Removing the grinder motor B.3.16
(ES) Removing / replacing the upper grinding disk B.3.17
(ES) Removing / replacing the lower grinding disk B.3.18
(ES) Disassembling the lower parts of the grinder B.3.19
(ES Z3000) Functional descriptions (ES) B.4.
(ES) Total overview of the brewer system (ES) B.4.1
(ES) Function: Grinder unit (ES) B.4.2
(ES) Function: Coffee doser unit (ES) B.4.3
(ES) Function: Coffee brewer (ES) B.4.4
(ES Z2000) Espresso brewer system B
(ES Z2000)Adjustments B.1
(ES Z2000) Total overview B.2
(ES) Removing the espresso brewer B.2.1
(ES) Disassembling the upper piston of the espresso brewer B.2.2
(ES) Disassembling the lower piston of the espresso brewer B.2.3
(ES) Changing the brewing chamber volume of the espresso
brewer B.2.4
(ES) Adjusting the espresso coffee dose B.2.5
(ES) Disassembling the coffee motor B.2.6
(ES) Replacing the brewer park switch B.2.7
(ES) Removing the coffee doser unit B.2.8
(ES) Replacing the switch of the coffee doser unit B.2.9
(ES) Replacing the solenoid of the coffee doser unit B.2.10
(ES) Removing the grinder unit B.2.11
(ES) Replacing the brushes of the grinder motor B.2.12
(ES) Removing the regulating screw of the grinder B.2.13
(ES) Removing the grinder motor B.2.14
(ES) Removing / replacing the upper grinding disk B.2.15
(ES) Removing / replacing the lower grinding disk B.2.16
(ES) Disassembling the lower parts of the grinder B.2.17
(ES Z2000) Functional descriptions B.3.
(ES) Total overview of the brewer system B.3.1
(ES) Function: Grinder unit B.3.2
(ES) Function: Coffee doser unit B.3.3
(ES) Function: Coffee brewer B.3.
Dosing System C
Adjustments C.1
(Dis-)assemblies C.2
Removing the instant ingredient mixing units C.2.1
5-4 August, 2007

Removing a dispensing valve for instant ingredients C.2.2

Replacing a whipper motor C.2.3
Removing the coffee whipper module C.2.4
Replacing the coffee whipper motor C.2.5
Rearranging the extraction tube couplings C.2.6
Disassembling an ingredient motor for instant products (or
coffee - Sigma brewer) C.2.7
Distributor head configuration C.2.8
Disassembling the drive assembly for branch pipe C.2.9
Removing the drive assembly from its housing C.2.10
Replacing switches of drive assembly for branch pipe C.2.11
Replacing the motor of drive assembly C.2.12
Removing the toothed belt for drive assembly C.2.13
Removing and adjusting the drive shaft C.2.14
Removing the suspension assembly for ingredient canisters C.2.15
Removing the suspension rails and guides for ingredient
canisters C.2.16
Removal of spring in lid for ingredient canister C.2.17
Functional descriptions C.3
Total overview - IN mixing units C.3.1
Total overview - Branch pipe C.3.2
Electrical diagrams C.4
Technical specifications C.5
Options C.6
Accessories C.7
Product delivery D
Adjustments D.1
Overview of parts
(Dis-)assemblies D.3
Replacing the cup drop ring D.3.1
Replacing the cup drop ring motor D.3.2
Replacing the switch for cup drop ring motor D.3.3
Removing the cup dispenser D.3.4
Adjusting the cup stack conveyors D.3.5
Replacing the cup conveyor motor D.3.6
Replacing the cup pile guide with sensor D.3.7
Removing the magazine empty switches of cup magazine D.3.8
Removing the cover at the cup slide mechanism D.3.9
Replacing the position switches for cup catcher / cup slide
mechanism D.3.10
Removing the bracket for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism D.3.11
Removing the motor for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism D.3.12
Removing the driven pulley from motor for cup catcher / cup
slide mechanism D.3.13
Removing the toothed belt for cup catcher / cup slide
mechanism D.3.14
Removing the free running pulley from toothed belt for cup
catcher / cup slide mechanism D.2.15
August, 2007 5-5

Removing the cover for cup station D.3.16

Replacing the opto-sensor glasses for upper cup sensors D.3.17
Replacing the safety switch for cup catcher / cup slide
mechanism D.3.18
Removing the left / right cover for cup elevator D.3.19
Adjusting the toothed belts for cup elevator D.3.20
Removing the shield around the cup station D.3.21
Replacing the glasses of the cup sensors D.3.22
Replacing the position switches for cup elevator D.3.23
Removing the right side sliding rail D.3.24
Removing the upper pulley for right side toothed belt of cup
elevator D.3.25
Removing the right side toothed belt for cup elevator D.3.26
Removing the motor for cup elevator D.3.27
Removing the lower pulleys for left/right toothed belt of
cup elevator D.3.28
Removing the left side sliding rail D.3.29
Removing the upper pulley for left side toothed belt for
cup elevator D.3.30
Removing the left side toothed belt for cup elevator D.3.31
Functional descriptions D.4
Total overview D.4.1
Electrical diagrams D.5
Technical specifications D.6
Options D.7
Choice of cup ring D.7.1
Accessories D.8
Cooling System F
Housing / Cabinet G
Adjustments G.1
Overview of parts G.2
(Dis-)assemblies G.3
Removing the fan G.3.1
Removing the coin mechanism G.3.2
Removing the coin chutes G.3.3
Removing the right cover for selection panel G.3.4
Removing the coin return motor G.3.5
Removing the coin insert chute G.3.6
Removing the hinge rail for selection panel cover G.3.7
Removing the mounting plate for coin mechanism G.3.8
Replacing the selection signs (Direct selection) G.3.9
Removing the selection panel (Direct selection) G.3.10
Replacing a selection button (Direct selection) G.3.11
Removing the upper advertising poster frame G.3.12
Replacing the upper advertising poster G.3.13
Replacing the upper fluorescent tube G.3.14
Removing the lower advertising poster frame G.3.15
5-6 August, 2007

Replacing the lower advertising poster G.3.16

Replacing the choke coils / Starters of the fluorescent tubes G.3.17
Replacing the lower fluorescent tube G.3.18
Functional descriptions G.3
Total overview G.3.1
Electrical diagrams G.4
Technical specifications G.5
Options G.6
Accessories G.7
Power Supply Unit and Control K
Adjustments K.1
(Dis-)assemblies K.2
Safety instructions K.2.1
Disassembling the power supply cord K.2.2
Removing the cover plate for power supply box K.2.3
Removing the power supply box K.2.4
Removing the transformer K.2.5
Removing the relay for heating element K.2.6
Removing the noise capacitor or fuses K.2.7
Removing the cover for electronic box K.2.8
Removing the up-key connection circuit board K.2.9
Removing the RS 232 plug K.2.10
Removing the main switch K.2.11
Disassembling the vending machine controller (VMC) K.2.12
Disassembling the ICB / CBU K.2.13
Disassembling the expansion board of the ICB CPU K.2.14
Disassembling the printed circuit board for freshbrewer unit K.2.15
Disassembling the ES controller circuit board K.2.16
Disassembling / replacing the circuit board for the espresso
boiler K.2.17
Replacing the SPC circuit board K.2.18
Overview - the vending machine controllers and E-box K.3
Electrical diagrams K.4
Technical specifications K.5
Options K.6
Accessories K.7
External Options L
Payment systems P
Adjustments P.1
(Dis-)assemblies P.2
Removing the coin mechanism P.2.1
Removing the ZIP card reader P.2.2
Removing the CPU for the ZIP card reader P.2.3
Removing the card reader (Proton = Chipper/Chipknip) P.2.4
Functional descriptions P.3
August, 2007 5-7

Function of the BDV or the MDB/ICB coin mechanism P.3.1

Function of the Executive coin mechanism P.3.2
Electrical diagrams P.4
Technical specifications P.5
Options P.6
Accessories P.7
5-8 August, 2007

5 Functions
5.1 Total Overview
● Refer to Spare Parts List on the N&W Global Vending web-site: http://www.nwglobalvending.com
5.2 General safety instructions
CAUTION When the work has been

finished, always carry out a
DANGER: The work described in this functional test.
chapter must only be carried
out by trained service techni- CAUTION Make sure that all earthed con-
cians. ductor connections are con-
nected and fastened tightly.
DANGER: Safety devices must not be
changed or bridged.
There is an increased risk of injuries when the
DANGER Before starting the work, dis- main switch is activated. The white cables carry
connect the dispenser from 230V.
the electrical mains supply and
close the water tap. Be careful when the boiler cover has been dis-
mounted. There is an increased risk of being
DANGER When carrying out disassem- scalded.
blies at the boiler, there is the
danger of being scalded by hot When working on the boiler or pump there is no
water (see chap. “Disassem- protection against unintentionally pulling out a
bly of the boiler”). component and spilling hot water as a result.
DANGER After the repair work ensure Replace cable harnesses only as complete
that the waste buckets, their original spare parts!
sensors, and the overflow
hoses are mounted correctly. Never repair the cable harness of the heating
system. There is a risk of a fire!
DANGER When carrying out any kind of
work, ensure that the earth For safety reasons the heating element and the
connectors are mounted cor- cable harness of the heating system may only
rectly in order to guarantee be replaced completely and together with the
faultfree ground connection. assembly group boiler or spare part boiler
cover.
DANGER The metal parts that ensure
ground connection must be When disconnecting electrical connections
connected with metal screws. hold the components to avoid draining the
Beneath the screw head there boiler. There is a risk of being scalded!
must be a lock washer. Fasten
the screws tightly (ground con-
nection).
WARNING The manufacturer cannot be

held liable or responsible
when other than original spare
parts are used for repair work.
WARNING Cable harnesses must not be

repaired, but must be replaced
completely.
CAUTION In any case, observe the safety

instruction of each chapter.
August, 2007 5-7

5-8 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Water System - Freshbrewer / Instant version
(FB/IN) A Water System
(FB/IN) A.1 Adjustments
General adjust-
ments Water temperature Adjustable via software, see chap. 4, page 102.
Recommended water temperature is:

FB: 94°C - 96°C (201°F - 205°F).
IN: 84°C - 86°C (183°F - 187°F).
Recirculation valve Close the adjusting screw on the valve. Then unscrew
1.5 rotations using an Allen key (wrench size 5 mm).
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 1

(FB/IN) A.2 Total overview of the water system
FB1 FB2
VR
V1 Vx
D
A T
Legend
A Water level sensor I Inlet Valve
B Boiler K Valve for water injection
C Recipient, e.g. cup P Pump
D Dry boiling protection T Temperature sensor
E Overboil sensor VR Recirculation valve
H Heating element V1 - VX Dispensing valves
FB1 - FB2 Brewer/s
5A (FB/IN) - 2 August, 2007

(FB/IN) A.3 (Dis-)assemblies
(FB/IN) A.3.1 Removing the boiler cover
Preparation Before removing the boiler cover:

• Open the door.
• Switch off the main switch.
Removal Follow these steps to remove cover:

2. Lift off cover (2).
Installation Installation is done in reverse order.
(FB/IN) A.3.2 Removing the pump cover
Preparation Before removing the pump cover:

• Open the door.
• If necessary, remove boiler cover, see this section, page 5A-3.

Removal Follow these steps to remove cover:

2. Lift off cover (2).
(FB/IN) A.3.3 Draining water from the boiler
Preparation Before draining water from the boiler:

• Open the door.
• Remove pump cover, see this section, page 5A-3.
There is the danger of being scalded by hot water.
Draining the boiler Follow these steps to drain water from the boiler:
1. Empty the waste bucket (1).
3
2. Pull the outlet drain out of the boiler
and place the outlet of the drainage 1
hose in the empty waste bucket (2).
3. Loosen the screw of the hose clamp (3)
located on the drainage hose and let 2
the water drain completely from the
boiler.
• Remember to tighten screw of hose clamp after draining.

(FB/IN) A.3.4 Removing the boiler
Preparation Before removing the boiler:

• Open the door.
• Remove boiler cover, see this section, page 5A-3.
• Drain the boiler completely, see this section, page 5A-4.
There is the danger of being scalded by hot water and parts.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the boiler after having drained the water from
it:
1 Detach the pump from its clip. Lift up
pump a little higher than the bottom of 2
the boiler and keep it in this position
while removing hoses from pump. This
prevents scales from falling into the
pump.
2 Remove hoses (1) from the outlet
spouts of the water tank.
3 Lift release arm and unclip boiler in 3
both sides (2). Remove the boiler in a
downward movement (3).
4 Place pump upside down at bottom of

machine.
1
Installation Installation is done in reverse order. Clean hoses before refitting to pump
or replace by new ones to prevent blocking of the pump because of scales.
• Clean pump feed hose before refitting to pump or replace by new one
to prevent blocking of the pump or valves because of scales.
• Inspect suction spout and pressure spout of pump for scaling, if neces-
sary rinse the pump before reinstallation.

(FB/IN) A.3.5 Removing the lid for boiler from its suspension
bracket
Preparation Before removing the lid for boiler:

• Open the door.
• Remove the boiler, see this section, page 5A-5.
Removal of the lid Follow these steps to remove the lid for boiler
for boiler Step Action Illustration
1 Unhook the lid for boiler (1)
(if necessary, loosen screws) 1
2 Remove all electrical connectors

from lid.
3 Remove all hoses from hose

connections in lid (2).
2

(FB/IN) A.3.6 Removing the temperature sensor (thermal feeler)
Preparation Before removing the temperature sensor:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the temperature sensor:

1 Pull off the electrical connector.
2 Pull the temperature sensor (1) out of
the boiler
Installation Installation is done in reverse order. Apply water on installation.
When the temperature sensor has been removed, check the old rubber
holder for damage. If it is damaged, use a new rubber holder for re-instal-
lation.
If the temperature sensor is not connected properly electrically, the heating

element will not be switched off as long as the machine is switched on
(boiling over).

(FB/IN) A.3.7 Removing the overboil thermostat
Preparation Before removing the overboil thermostat:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the safety cut-out:

1 Pull off the electrical connector.
2 Unscrew the overboil thermostat from

the overflow pipe at the bottom of the
boiler.
(FB/IN) A.3.8 Resetting the overboil thermostat
Preparation Before resetting the overboil thermostat:

• Open the door.
Resetting Use the reset button of the overboil thermostat, as follows:

1 Locate the overboil thermostat that is
installed underneath the boiler.
2 Press the reset button (1) on the

overboil thermostat. 1

(FB/IN) A.3.9 Removing the water level sensor (electrode)
Preparation Before removing the water level sensor:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the water level sensor:

1 Pull off the electrical connector (1).
1
2
2 Pull the water level sensor out of its
holder (2).
Installation Installation is done in reverse order. Apply water on reinstallation.
Check the sensor holder for tear and brittleness, replace it if necessary.
Check that the electrical connector is properly connected, as otherwise the
water intake is not stopped automatically when the water reaches the water
level sensor.
(FB/IN) A.3.10 Disassembling the heating element and dry-

boiling thermostat
Preparation Before disassembling the heating element and the dry-boiling thermostat:
• Open the door.
• Remove the boiler, see this section, page 5A-5.
• Remove the lid for boiler, see this section, page 5A-6.

Removal Follow these steps to remove the heating element:

1 • Pull the insulating hoses off
the heating element contacts
• Disconnect the electrical
connectors as well as the
earth wire.
2 Loosen the nut at the heating
element (1), and remove the
heating element with the dry-
boiling thermostat.
(FB/IN) A.3.11 Resetting the dry-boiling thermostat
Preparation Before resetting the dry-boiling thermostat:

• Open the door.
Resetting Use the reset button of the dry-boiling thermostat as follows:

1 Locate the dry-boiling
thermostat for the heating
element on the lid of the boiler.
2 Press the reset button (1) of 1

the dry-boiling thermostat.
5A (FB/IN) - 10 August, 2007

(FB/IN) A.3.12 Disassembling the water inlet filter with reflux

valve and the supply hose
Preparation Before disassembling the water inlet parts:

• Open the door.
• Switch off the main switch, and close the water tap.
Hot water, risk of being scalded.
Drain the boiler before you proceed. If the boiler is not drained, hot water
will flow from the hoses as soon as the hoses are disconnected.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the water inlet parts:

1 Unscrew two screws of
holder for water inlet filter (1),
and take out holder. 3
2 Loosen the swivel nut (2),
and take off the supply hose
from the mains supply.
3 Remove hose to inlet valve /
water purifying filter from 2
water inlet filter (3).
1
4 Unscrew filter lid (4) and
remove stainless steel filter
inside the lid (5).
5 Check filter and rinse as
necessary.
6 Remove reflux valve from
water inlet in filter (6), and
check for impurities.
5
6 4
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 11

Assembly Assembly is done in reverse order.
When reassembling the water inlet filter, make sure the reflux valve is
positioned correctly into the socket. A small arrow on the side of the valve
indicates how to turn it.
(FB/IN) A.3.13 Removing the inlet valve
Preparation Before removing the inlet valve:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the inlet valve and connecting hose:
1 Remove filter lid with filter to close the
water supply (1).
2 Loosen two screws from holder for

inlet valve (2), and lift off holder from 3
screws.
3 Disconnect the electrical plug 2
connections of the inlet valve (3).
4 Remove hoses from the inlet valve: 6
• Hose from water inlet filter / water
purifying filter (4).
• Hose from lid of boiler (5).
• Hose from bottom of boiler (6).
5 Loosen and remove two screws to
5
remove inlet valve (7).
5A (FB/IN) - 12 August, 2007

(FB/IN) A.3.14 Resetting the pressure security valve of the inlet

valve
Preparation Before resetting the pressure security valve:

• Open the door.
Resetting Follow these steps to reset the pressure security valve:

1 Remove filter lid with filter to
close the water supply (1).
2 Loosen two screws from holder

for inlet valve (2), and lift off
holder from screws.
3 Disconnect hose at pressure 2
security valve (3).
4 Empty water from the hose into
waste bucket.
3
5 Unscrew hose connection to
hose from water inlet filter /
water purifying filter (4) to
release the pressure in inlet
valve.
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 13

(FB/IN) A.3.15 Removing the recirculation valve
Preparation Before removing the recirculation valve:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the recirculation valve:

1 Disconnect the electrical plug
connections of the valve (1).
2 Loosen two screws (2), and pull the
valve out of the bracket. 1
3 Remove hoses from the outlet spouts

of the valve: 3
• Hose to leftmost valve of the dis-
pensing system (3).
• Hose from lid of boiler (4).
2
Assembly Installation is done in reverse order.
Adjustment of Close the adjusting screw on the valve. Then unscrew 1.5 rotations using
recirculation valve an Allen key (wrench size 5 mm).
(FB/IN) A.3.16 Removing and disassembling the water pump
Preparation Before removing the water pump:

• Open the door.
Hot water, risk of being scalded.
Drain the boiler before you proceed. If the boiler is not drained, hot water
will flow from the hoses as soon as the hoses are disconnected from the
pump.
5A (FB/IN) - 14 August, 2007
Carefully follow the instructions below in the correct order. Failing to do

so might result in scales falling into the pump.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the water pump:

1 Disconnect the plug connectors for
pump (1).
2 Remove the hose from the pump to 4
the dispensing system (2).
2
3 Detach the pump from its clip (3):
Lift up pump a little higher than the
bottom of the boiler and keep it in this
position while removing hose from
pump and boiler (4).
1
3
4 Disassemble pump parts.
Installation Installation is done in reverse order. Clean hoses before refitting to pump
or replace by new ones to prevent blocking of the pump because of scales.
• Clean pump feed hose before refitting to pump or replace by new one
to prevent blocking of the pump or valves because of scales.
• Inspect suction spout and pressure spout of pump for scaling, if neces-
sary rinse the pump before reinstallation.
• Ensure that the pump impeller runs clockwise, when seen from above.
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 15

(FB/IN) A.3.17 Rearranging/replacing the water tubes for instant

ingredients
Preparation Before rearranging the location of water tubes for instant ingredient:
• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient mixing units, see chap. 5.C.2.7,
page 5C-9.
Rearrangement Follow these steps to rearrange/replace the water hoses:

1 Loosen two screws in either side of
connecting rail and remove the
connecting rail
2 Pull the tubes out of the rubber T-piece or L-pieces in question.
3 Rearrange the rubber T-pieces or L-pieces in question

4 Rearrange the tubes to the proper locations of the T-pieces or L-pieces.
Note: four different sizes available
5A (FB/IN) - 16 August, 2007

Tube lengths The tubes are available in lengths as follows:

• 60 m
• 70 mm
• 80 mm
• 100 mm
(FB/IN) A.3.18 Removing a dispensing valve for instant

ingredients
Preparation Before removing a dispensing valve:

• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient mixing unit in question, see chap.
5.C.2.7, page 5C-9.
Removal Use a flat screw driver to lift the locking tab as shown in the illustration
below, and pull out the dispensing valve of the outlet tube module plate.
Illustration
Ensure that the valve is properly seated in the outlet tube, which is
simultaneously acting as a seal.
Note the flow direction of the outlet tube which should align with the
direction marked on the outlet valve.
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 17
(FB/IN) A.3.19 Removing the dispensing valve for Freshbrewer

unit
Preparation Before removing the dispensing valve:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the dispensing valve for Freshbrewer unit:
1 Loosen two screws (1) and detach
cover (2) at left side of ingredient
shelf next to the sensor for coffee
waste bucket.
2. Disconnect the electrical plug connections of the valve.

3 Pull the valve (3) downwards to
release front from the silicone T-
piece (4).
3
4
4 Disconnect the dispensing valve

from the silicone hose (5). 5
5A (FB/IN) - 18 August, 2007

(FB/IN) A.3.20 Replacing the water purifying filter cartridge
Preparation Before replacing the water purifying filter cartridge:

• Open the door.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the water purifying filter cartridge:
1 Lift up lever and turn up towards the
back of the machine.
2 Make a test vend to release the pressure.

3 Remove filter cartridge.
4 Install new filter in reverse order:
• Switch on the machine.
• Gently open the lever of the water filter. This will prevent damage to
the envelope in the water filter and scale being blown into the water
system.
• Once the boiler has filled completely, you can open the water filter
lever fully.
5 Drain the boiler twice to ensure the filter will be flushed with at least 10
liters of water.
Replace filter cartridge every 30,000 vends (approximately every three to

four months). See further specifications on filter.
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 19

(FB/IN) A.4 Functional descriptions
(FB/IN) A.4.1 Total overview of the water system
FB1 FB2
VR
V1 Vx
K
D
A T
C
P
Legend
B Boiler K Valve for clold water injection
D Dry boiling protection T Temperature sensor
FB1 - FB2 Brewer/s
5A (FB/IN) - 20 August, 2007

(FB/IN) A.4.2 Function: Inlet valve and water inlet into the boiler
Description • The inlet valve (I) is opened until the water level sensor (A) recognizes
that the boiler (B) is filled.
• When the correct filling level in the boiler is reached, the water inlet
valve (I) is closed.
If the correct filling level has not been reached within three minutes after
the inlet valve has been opened, an error message “Water level low” is
given.
If the boiler (B) is filled for the first time, an error message is given if the
correct water level has not been reached within 3 minutes.
(FB/IN) A.4.3 Function: Heating and temperature regulation
Description • The heating element (H) is switched on as soon as the water level
reaches the water level sensor (A).
• The temperature sensor (T) measures the temperature in the boiler and
controls the switching on/off of the heating element according to the
value set in technician mode, see chap. 4, page 102.
• The dry boiling protection (D) triggers and switches off the heating
element (H), if the temperature rises above 120°C (248°F). To enable
the heating element again, you must reset the dry boiling thermostat
(D) manually and restart the machine, see this section, page 5A-10.
• The overboil sensor (E) is located in the overflow hose. If the sensor
detects steam or water in the overflow hose, it will switch off the heat-
ing element (H). To enable the heating element again, you must reset
the overboil thermostat (E) manually and restart the machine, see this
section, page 5A-8.
• Water from the overflow hose is led into recipient (C) at the end of the
overflow hose, e.g. a cup.
• If water is continuously running through the overboil hose, the water is
led back to the inlet valve (I). When the water pressure in the mechani-
cal pressure security valve of the inlet valve reaches a certain level, the
pressure security valve triggers and closes the inlet valve. The hoses to
the inlet valve has to be disconnected and reconnected to release the
pressure in the inlet valve and the pressure security valve, see this sec-
tion, page 5A-13.
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 21

(FB/IN) A.4.4 Function: Water outlet system and outlet valves
Description When hot water with a high temperature is to be dispensed, the machine
will open valve (VR) and start pump (P) simultaneously. The valve (K)
and (Vx) remain closed.
The water of high temperature now runs from the boiler and circulates
through the entire hose system and back into the boiler through the valve
(VR) for approximately 2 seconds, thus ensuring that the hottest tempera-
ture is obtained and that possible air bobbles are removed from the hose
system.
After this circulation the required water quantity is supplied by closing the
valve (VR) and opening one or more of the valves from (V1) through (Vx)
in sequential order. When the required water quantity is obtained the dis-
pensing valve/s in question (V1) through (Vx) close, and the pump (P)
stops.
Only when equipped with cold water injection:

When hot water with a lower temperature is required for a drink, the dis-
pensing is performed in the same way as for high temperature, but in this
instance the valve (K) is open simultaneously as the pump is running. In
this way the water of lower temperature is mixed with the water of hotter
temperature in relation 1:1.
5A (FB/IN) - 22 August, 2007

(FB/IN) A.5 Water flow diagrams
August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 23

5A (FB/IN) - 24 August, 2007

August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 25

5A (FB/IN) - 26 August, 2007

August, 2007 5A (FB/IN) - 27

(FB/IN) A.6 Technical specifications
Not available here.
(FB/IN) A.7 Options
Not available here.
(FB/IN) A.8 Accessories
Not available here.
5A (FB/IN) - 28 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Water System - Espresso version
(ES) A Water System
(ES) A.1 Adjustments
General adjust-
ments Water temperature Adjustable via software, see chap. 4, page 102.
Default water temperature is:

ES: 95°C (203°F).
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 29

(ES) A.2 Total overview of the espresso water system
K
G
H
L
5A (ES) - 30 August, 2007

Legend
A Switch I Thermic protection
B Lid for air-break tank J Pump
C Float K Dry-boiling thermostat /
D Air-break tank dry-boiling protection
E Filter for flowmeter L Heating element
F Flowmeter (volumetric coun- M Espresso boiler
ter) (high pressure boiler)
G 3-way valve N No-return valve / check valve
H Boiler temperature sensor O By-pass valve
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 31

(ES) A.3 (Dis-)assemblies
(ES) A.3.1 Emptying the air-break tank
Preparation Before emptying the air-break tank

• Open the door.
Emptying the air- Follow these steps to empty the air-break tank:
break tank Step Action
1. Remove waste bucket and coffee waste bag from the machine.
2. Empty the waste bucket and place it under the water outlet.
3. Insert the service key and turn to the display.
4. Enter the menus ‘Technician’ -> ‘ES Test Functions’ -> ‘ES airbreak
empty’.
5. Follow instructions on display, see Chap. 4.3.13.5, page 139.
6. When the air-break has been emptied proceed with the next job, eg.
draining water from the espresso boiler.
The heating element in the espresso boiler is switched off and the inlet
valve remains closed during this procedure. As the hot water is drained
from the espresso boiler, it is replaced by the cold water from the air-break
tank. Subsequently, the espresso boiler can be emptied in a safe way.
5A (ES) - 32 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.2 Draining water from the espresso boiler
Preparation Before draining water from the boiler:

• Open the door.
• Remove waste bucket and coffee waste bag from machine.
• Place waste bucket under the espresso boiler.
• Empty the air-break tank via the software, see chap. 4, page 136.
Draining the boiler Follow these steps to drain water from the boiler:
1. Loosen the inlet fitting (1) at
bottom of boiler and pull out
the hose (2). Bend it aside.
1 2
2. Turn to the display.

3. Enter the menus ‘Technician’ -> ‘ES Test Functions’ -> ‘ES boiler empty’.
Remember to re-install inlet hose in espresso boiler after complete

draining.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 33

(ES) A.3.3 Filling the espresso boiler
Introduction The espresso boiler can be filled in two ways:

• Automatic filling
• Manual filling
Automatic filling Follow these steps to fill the espresso boiler automatically (time consum-
ing):
1. Ensure that the inlet hose (1)
is properly reinstalled on the
inlet fitting (2) of the espresso 2
boiler, if it has been removed.
1
2. Empty waste bucket and place it under the water outlet.
3. Switch on the main switch
• insert service key
4. Result: After initialization of the machine, the machine takes in water in
both water systems.
ES system: Water will be fed through the boiler and flow into the waste
bucket until no air is left in the espresso water system.
5. Empty waste bucket and reinsert it in its proper place.
5A (ES) - 34 August, 2007

Manual filling of Follow these steps to fill the espresso boiler manually after having emptied
the espresso the espresso boiler (time saving when machine is already on):
boiler Step Action Illustration
1. Ensure that the inlet hose (1)
is properly reinstalled on the
inlet fitting (2) of the 2
espresso boiler, if it has
been removed.
1
2. Empty the waste bucket and place it under the water outlet.
3. • Insert the service key
and turn to the display.
4. Enter the menus ‘Technician’ -> ES Test Functions* -> ‘Manual boiler fill’.
Result: Water will be fed through the boiler and flow into the waste bucket
until no air is left.
6. When water has stopped flowing into the waste bucket, empty waste
bucket and reinsert it in its proper place.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 35

(ES) A.3.4 Opening / removing the front cover of the

espresso boiler module
Preparation Before opening / removing the front cover:

• Open the door.
• If fitted, swing out incup / sugar module
• Remove the espresso brewer, see section B, page 5B (ES) - 32.
Opening Follow these steps to open the cover plate:

1 Loosen and remove two
screws (1). 1
2 Lower the front cover (2) and

let it hang in the lower part,
forming a ‘hinge’ towards the
bottom of the housing for the
espreso boiler module.
5A (ES) - 36 August, 2007

Removal Follow these steps to remove the cover plate:

1 Open the front cover.
2 Unscrew and detach the
parts suspended on the front 1
cover.
(1) Suspension bracket with

the circuit board for the
espresso boiler
(2) Espresso coffee motor
(3) Brewer park switch. 2
3 Lift and release the front

cover (4) from bottom of
housing for the espresso
boiler module.
4
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 37

(ES) A.3.5 Resetting the dry-boiling thermostat
Preparation Before resetting the dry-boiling thermostat:

• Open the door.
• Open and lower the front cover of the espresso boiler module, see this
section, page 5A-36.
Resetting Reset the dry-boiling thermostat in the following way:

Action Illustration
Press the reset button (1) to switch
on the heating element again.
1
T
SE
RE
(ES) A.3.6 Disassembling / replacing the control circuit board

for the espresso boiler
See chap. K.2.17, page 5K-17.
5A (ES) - 38 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.7 Removing the complete espresso boiler unit
Preparation Before removing the espresso boiler unit:

• Open the door.
• Empty the air-break tank, see this section, page 5A-32.
• Drain water from the espresso boiler, see this section, page 5A-33.
• If fitted, swing out incup / sugar module.
• Open and remove the front cover of the espresso boiler module, see
this section, page 5A-36.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the complete espresso boiler unit:
1 Unscrew and remove outlet 2
hose (1) from the espresso
boiler and hose (2) on top of
the three-way valve.
2 Disconnect all electrical

connectors (3) from
components on the 3
espresso boiler unit.
3 Pull off the earth wire (4).
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 39


4 Loosen two screws (5) at
the bottom of the espresso
boiler module, and from
inside of espresso boiler
module lift away the
espresso boiler unit (6) from
the base plate (7) of the 6
espresso boiler module.
7
Installation installation is done in reverse order.
(ES) A.3.8 Removing the boiler temperature sensor
Preparation Before removing the boiler temperature sensor:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the boiler temperature sensor:

1 Pull off electrical connectors
3
from the temperature sensor
(1)
2 Loosen and remove nut with
boiler temperature sensor
(2).
3 Remove the sealing O-ring
(3). 2
5A (ES) - 40 August, 2007

On installation check the sensor sealing O-ring for tear and brittleness, re-
place it if necessary.
(ES) A.3.9 Removing / replacing the by-pass valve and / or

the no-return valve
Preparation Before removing / replacing the by-pass valve or the no-return valve:
• Open the door.
Removal Folllow these steps to remove the by-pass valve or the no-return valve:
1 Pull off the hose (1) from the
by-pass valve. (2)
2 Loosen knurled nut on the
by-pass valve and pull off the 1
hgh pressure tube (3) for the
espresso boiler.
3 Hold counter on the no- 4

return valve (4) with a
spanner while unscrewing
the by-pass valve (2) with 2
another spanner.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 41


4 Hold counter on the pump
outlet (5) with a spanner 5
while unscrewing the no-
return valve (4) with another 4
spanner.
(ES) A.3.10 Removing / replacing the thermic protection

(Klixon)
Preparation Follow these steps to remove / replace the thermic protection:

• Open the door.
• Remove the espresso brewer, see this section, page 5A-32.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the thermic protection:

1 Disconnect electrical
connectors (1) of the 1
thermic protection (2).
2 Remove the thermic 2
protection from its holder
(2).
5A (ES) - 42 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.11 Removing / replacing the heating element
Preparation Follow these steps to remove the heating element:

• Open the door.
• Remove the complete espresso boiler unit, see this section, page 5A-
39.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the heating element:

1 Remove four screws, washers and
nuts (1).
1
2 Take apart the upper (2) and lower
part (3) of the espresso boiler.
3 Take care not to loose the sealing
ring (4).
2
4
3
4 Unscrew two nuts (5) and pull the 5

heating element (6) out of the
upper part of the espresso boiler.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 43

(ES) A.3.12 Removing the espresso boiler module from

machine
Preparation Follow these steps to remove the heating element:

• Open the door.
• Close the shutter of the coffee bean canister and lift off canister.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the espresso boiler module:

1 Unscrew one screw and remove
cover for plugs (1), located at
the lower right side of the
espresso boiler module.
2 Disconnect electrical plugs for
the espresso boiler module.
3 Loosen knurled nut below the

espresso boiler and pull off
hose (2).
5A (ES) - 44 August, 2007


4 Unscrew two screws (3) and lift
the espresso boiler module (4)
out of the machine.
(ES) A.3.13 Removing / replacing the pump
Preparation Before removing the pump:

• Open the door.
• Remove the espresso boiler module from machine, see this section,
page 5A-44.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 45

Removal Follow these steps to remove the pump:

1 Disconnect the thermic
protection and the electrical
connectors from the pump (1).
1
2 Loosen and remove screws 4

and washers (2) of rubber 3
suspensions (3) from pump
front side and from rear side of
3 Pull off the hose (4) at intake
of pump.
4 Hold counter at pump outlet

(4) with a spanner while
loosening nut of no-return 4
valve (5) with another spanner.
5 Remove rubber suspensions

(3) from pump. 3
5A (ES) - 46 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.14 Removing the lid for air-break tank
Preparation Before removing the lid for air-break tank:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the lid for air-break tank:
1
connectors (1).
2 Detach lid for air-break tank,
using eg. a flat tipped
screwdriver in either side (2).
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 47

(ES) A.3.15 Removing / replacing the switch and the float of

the air-break tank
Preparation Before removing the float of the air-break tank:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
• Remove the lide for air-break tank, see this section, page 5A-47.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the float of the air-break tank:
1 Press upwards locking lever 3
(1) with thumb on one hand 1
and remove switch (2) from 4
location pins (3) with the other
hand.
2 Lift out the O-ring from the
groove and remove it (4), eg
using a pair of pointed pliers.
2
3 Remove float (5) from the lid.
Do not replace the micro switch with any one of different mechanical char-
acteristics, as a variety of malfunctions may occur.
5A (ES) - 48 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.16 Replacing the water filter for flowmeter
Preparation Before replacing the water filter for flowmeter:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the water filter:

1 Remove the hoses (1 and 2) in
either side of filter.
2 Install new filter (3).
(ES) A.3.17 Removing the air-break tank
Preparation Before removing the air-break tank:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 49

Removal Follow these steps to remove the air-break tank:

1 Detach lid for air-break tank,
using eg. a flat tipped
screwdriver in either side (1).
2 Remove spouts and hoses

from the bottom hose holder at 4
rear side of the espresso boiler
module (2).
3 Remove hose with filter for air-
break tank from its spout on 5
the air-break tank (3).
4 Lift the air-break tank (4) up
and off its holder at rear side of
espresso boiler module (5).
5 Remove hoses from spouts of
air-break tank. 3
5A (ES) - 50 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.18 Gaining access to the interior parts of the

espresso boiler module
Preparation Before gaining access to the interior parts:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
• Remove and push aside the coffee doser unit, see section B, page 5B
(ES) - 66.
• Remove the grinder unit, see section B, page 5B (ES) - 70.
Gaining access Follow these steps to gain access to the interior parts:
1 Release the lead-in bush,
pushing it leftwards with
the harness for the doser 2
unit (1).
2 Put doser unit with its
harnesses through hole for
grinder unit (2).
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 51


3 Unscrew screws of the
‘coffee shelf cover as 4
follows:
- four screws in left side (3) 3
- four screws at the top (4)
- two screws in front side
5
(5).
4 Lower the coffee shelf
cover to the left side (6).
(ES) A.3.19 Removing / replacing the 3-way valve on the

espresso boiler
Preparation Before removing the 3-way valve:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
(ES) - 66.
• Gain access to the interior parts, see this section, page 5A-51.
5A (ES) - 52 August, 2007

Removal Follow these steps to remove the 3-way valve:

1 Loosen the connection nut (1)
at top of the valve (2) and
remove the draining hose (3).
2 Loosen and remove nut, 3
cover and washer (4).
4 1
connectors from the valve (5).
5
4 Remove the earth wire (6).
5 Lift off coil of valve. (7)

6 Loosen and remove four 7
screws and serrated discs as
well as the valve seat (8).
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 53

(ES) A.3.20 Removing / replacing the 125°C thermostat (dry

boiling thermostat)
Preparation Before removing the dry-boiling thermostat:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
(ES) - 66.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the dry-boiling thermostat:

1 Disconnect electrical connectors
from the dry-boiling thermostat (1). 1
2 Unscrew two screws (2) and remove
the dry-boiling thermostat (3). 2
5A (ES) - 54 August, 2007

(ES) A.3.21 Removing / replacing the volumetric counter

(flowmeter)
Preparation Before removing the volumetric counter:

• Open the door.
page 5A-44.
(ES) - 66.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the volumetric counter:

connectors (1) from the 3
flowmeter.
2 pull off hoses from the 1
flowmeter:
- hose from filter for
flowmeter (2)
- hose to espresso boiler 2
unit (3).
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 55


3 Flex the snap lock (4) under
the retaining plate with a pair
of pointed pliers and lift off
the flowmeter.
5A (ES) - 56 August, 2007

(ES) A.4 Functional descriptions
(ES) A.4.1 Total overview of the water system with ES unit
VR
V1 VX
D A T
ES
B WATER
SYSTEM
Legend
B Boiler (IN water) K Espresso water Valve
D dry-boiling protection T Temperature sensor
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 57

(ES) A.4.2 Overview of espresso water system
E J
H
M
5A (ES) - 58 August, 2007

Legend
A Microswitch G Pump
B Float H Check valve
C Air-break tank J Dry-boiling protection
D Volumetric counter K Heating element
E 3-way valve L Espresso boiler
F Auto-reset klixon M By-pass valve
(ES) A.4.3 Air-break tank and volumetric counter (flowmeter)
Description • The air-break tank (C) holds a reservoir of water at normal atmos-
pheric pressure, so that the volumetric counter (D) by means of the
pump (G) can measure the correct water dose for the selection and
deliver it to the espresso boiler (L) without changes in pressure.
• When the maximum level is reached in the air-break tank (C), a float
(B) triggers a microswitch (A), and the water intake is closed.
• If upon switching on the machine, the float (B) has not triggered the
microswitch (A) within two and a half minutes, the dispensing of
drinks is locked and the error message ‘ES Water level low’ will be
reported. The water intake is closed for 10 seconds and open for two
and a half minutes by turns until the maximum level is reached. The
error will be active until the maximum level is reached.
Switch the machine off, open the water tap, check water con-
nection and hoses. If the message remains, see chap. 3, page 8.
• In the event that the microswitch (A) fails to detect and trigger at the
maximum water level, an overflow hole ensures that the excess water is
led direct into the overflow bucket through a silicone hose.
• The voulmetric counter (D) measures the correct dose of water for an
espresso drink.
(ES) A.4.4 Pump, by-pass and espresso boiler
Description • The pump (G) for the espresso water system is a vibration pump and is
fitted with an overheating protection by means of a 90°C auto-reset
klixon (F).
If the overheating protection triggers, check the reason before
continuing.
• A by-pass valve (M) is fitted at the outlet of the pump to ensure correct
and consistent dispensing pressure. In case of scale-deposits influenc-
ing the functioning of the by-pass it is advisable to replace it com-
pletely.
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 59

The by-pass valve (M) is factory pre-set at 12 bar and should

never be re-adjusted.
• To prevent any flow-back to the espresso boiler (L), the pump outlet is
also fitted with a check valve (H).
• The espresso boiler (L) is provided with a dry-boiling protection (J)
which triggers and switches off the power supply to the machine in
case of failure to the system and no water in the espresso boiler. Simul-
taneously the message ‘ES Heater fault’ is reported, see chap. 3,
page 6.
The dry-boiling protection (J) triggers at approximately 150°C. Before

restarting the machine, the dry-boiling protection must be reset manu-
ally by pressing its red reset button before the heating element (K) of
the espresso boiler can be re-activated.
The malfunction must be identified before reactivating the
heating element (K).
• When the pump (C) starts, the three-way solenoid valve (E) on the out-
let opens and the amount of water delivered to the espresso boiler (L)
displaces an equal amount of water being dispensed through the valve.
• The machine checks the water level every 30 minutes and fills it up if
necessary.
5A (ES) - 60 August, 2007

(ES) A.5 Water flow diagram
August, 2007 5A (ES) - 61

(ES) A.6 Technical specifications
Not available here.
(ES) A.7 Options
Not available here.
(ES) A.8 Accessories
Not available here.
5A (ES) - 62 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Brewer System - FB Sigma version
(FB) B Brewer System
(FB) B.1 Adjustments
General The following settings may be adjusted via the menu system:
adjustments Function Description
Water volume 50 - 500 ml per cup.
(min. / max.)
Dosage Ground coffee: Up to 28 g
Tea: Up to 10 g
Infusion time The amount of time in which the brew is waiting in the
infusion chamber before the piston starts moving to build up a
pressure in the infusion chamber.
Extraction A relative value (1-9) adjusting the brewer pressure.
pressure The default value is 5.
Downflow time The amount of time from when the pressure stops building up
(air piston moves forwards) and until it is released (the air
piston starts moving backwards).
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 1

(FB) B.2 Overview of brewer parts
Parts and func- This illustration shows the location of the brewer components::
tions
K D C
E F
G
B
I A
Legend for figure:

Part
A Brewer cylinder
B Mixing funnel
C: Air cylinder
D: Air piston
E: Brewer motor
F: Upper valve for closing the brewer cylinder
G: Cylinder grip
H: Scraper for cleaning the filter
I: Infusion filter
J: Scraper motor
K: Optical sensor
5B (FB) - 2 August, 2007

(FB) B.3 (Dis-)assemblies
(FB) B.3.1 Removing the entire brewer unit
Before removing the brewer unit:

• Open the door.
• Remove coffee waste chute, solid waste bucket and angle connection
with outlet hose, see the Operator manual.
• Remove the brewer cylinder, filter, scraper and air cylinder, see the
Operator Manual.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the entire brewer unit from the machine:
1 Detach the three electrical connections from the brewer - located at rear
wall of of cabinet under the brewer (1).
2 Remove two screws from

brewer housing bracket
(2).
3 Remove brewer unit (3)
from machine:
• Carefully slide brewer
unit 20 mm out of
bracket. (Brewer will
hang in rear part of
bracket).
• Pull and remove brewer
entirely from bracket.
2
1
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 3

(FB) B.3.2 Removing the scraper motor assembly
Preparation Before removing the scraper motor assembly:

• Open the door.
with outlet hose . see the Operator manual.
Operator Manual.
• Remove the brewer unit, see this section, page 5B (FB) - 3.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the scraper motor assembly:

1 Place brewer unit upside
down on a plain surface.
Remove two screws (1)
and nuts (2). 1
2 Remove the scraper motor

manually rotating the
spindle until it is free (3).
Assembly Assembly is done in reverse order. Make sure that the wires are free.
5B (FB) - 4 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.3 Removing / Replacing the scraper motor
Preparation Before removing the scraper motor:

• Open the door.
Operator Manual.
• Remove the entire brewer unit, see this section, page 5B (FB) - 3.
• Remove the scraper motor assembly see this section, page 5B (FB) - 4.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the scraper motor:

1 Remove two screws from
the scraper motor housing
(1) and carefully pull out
the motor.
Be sure to turn the nuts correctly. Tighten to a torque value of 1.2 Nm.
Be sure to place the motor correctly in the housing - turning the inductor
towards the spindle.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 5

(FB) B.3.4 Disassembling the driving parts of the scraper

motor
Preparation Before disassembling the driving parts of the scraper motor:

• Open the door.
Operator Manual.
• Remove the scraper motor assembly see this section, page 5B (FB) - 4.
• Remove the scraper motor, see this section, page 5B (FB) - 5.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the driving parts of the scraper motor:
1 Remove four screws from
the scraper motor housing
(1). 3 2
2 Remove spindle with thrust
ring sledge (2) and bearing
gear sledge (3).
Assembly Follow these steps to re-assemble the scraper motor assembly:

1 Place bearing gear sledge
4
(1) and thrust ring sledge
(2) on spindle. 1
2
Groove in thrust ring
sledge (3) and recess in 3
bearing gear sledge (4)
must both face away from
the tooth wheel.
5B (FB) - 6 August, 2007


2 Insert spindle in one half of
the housing (5). 6
5
Note: Be sure to position
bearing gear sledge and
thrust ring sledge correctly 3
in housing (6).
3 Close housing with other
half (7) and fasten with
four screws.
Tighten the screws to a

torque value of 0.5 Nm.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 7

(FB) B.3.5 Removing the brewer motor assembly
Preparation Before removing the brewer motor assembly:

• Open the door.
Operator Manual.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the brewer motor assembly:

1 Place brewer unit upside
down on a plane surface.
Remove two fastening

1
screws from the brewer
motor (1).
2 Remove two side screws
from metal supports (2).
3 If fitted, cut and remove
the wire strap.
Release the housing,

slightly forcing the two side
metal supports to release
the angle ribs, and remove 2
the motor assembly.
5B (FB) - 8 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.6 Removing / Replacing the brewer motor
Preparation Before removing / replacing the brewer motor:

• Open the door.
Operator Manual.
• Remove the brewer motor assembly, see this section, page 5B (FB) - 8.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the brewer motor:

1 Remove four screws from
the brewer motor housing
(1).
2 Lift off toothed belt from

gear wheel (2) and pull out
front of brewer motor
housing with spindle (3).
Note: The rotation 2

blocking pin (4) will fall out
when spindle is pulled out
of its housing.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 9


3 Remove four screws and
pull out brewer motor (5).
Assembly Assembly is done in reverse order. Remember to re-insert rotation block-

ing pin and insert spindle correctly in the housing, see also “Assembly” in
this section, page 5B (FB) - 11.
5B (FB) - 10 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.7 Disassembling driving parts of brewer motor

without removing motor
Preparation Before disassembling the driving parts of the scraper motor:

• Open the door.
Operator Manual.
• Remove the brewer motor assembly, see this section, page 5B (FB) - 8.
Removal Follow these steps to disassemble the driving parts of the brewer motor:
1 Remove four screws
from the brewer motor
housing (1).
2 Lift off toothed belt from

gear wheel (2) and pull
out front of brewer motor
housing with spindle (3).
Note: The rotation 2

blocking pin (4) will fall
out when spindle is
pulled out of its housing.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 11


3 Remove gear assembly 5
by rotating it off the 6
spindle (5).
4 Remove toothed belt (6).
5 Disassemble ball 7
bearings (7), toothed belt
guide (8) and tacho disk
(9).
Assembly Follow these steps to re-assemble the brewer motor assembly:

1 Re-assemble ball bearings 1
(1), toothed belt guide (2)
and tacho disk (3).
5B (FB) - 12 August, 2007


2 Re-insert tacho disk, ball
bearings and toothed belt
guide on spindle (4).
3 Re-insert rotation blocking

pin in spindle (5).
7
4 Place toothed belt on
8
tacho disk (6).
5 Re-insert spindle in brewer 6
motor housing.
Note: Be sure to position

the spindle the correct way
in the housing: The piston
plate must be turned
correctly (7). 5
6 Rotate the spindle

forwards a few cm to make
room for repositioning the
toothed belt on the gear
wheel (8).
7 Reinsert four fastening
screws on the brewer
motor housing (9).
Tighten the screws to a

torque value of 1 Nm.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 13

(FB) B.3.8 Removing / Replacing the optical sensor of the

brewer motor
Preparation Before removing / replacing the optical sensor:

• Open the door.
Operator Manual.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the optical sensor:

1 Remove two screws of the
position tacho sensor
located next to the brewer
motor, and remove it (1).
5B (FB) - 14 August, 2007

(FB) B.4 Function of the brewer
Introduction Through an electronically controlled brewing process, the brewer takes in

coffee and water and dispenses freshly brewed coffee.
The principle of the brewing process is that hot water and ground coffee
are mixed in the mixing funnel and led into the brewer cylinder. Infusion
time determines for how long the brew stays in the infusion chamber
before it is pressed through the filter by air pressure produced by the air
cylinder.
In these functional descriptions, ground coffee is used as an example. But

tea could have been used as well.
Brewing process The brewing process can be divided into the following phases:
• Brewer in stand by position ready to start brewing cycle.
• Dosing of water and coffee.
• Infusion time.
• Rinsing of upper valve and brewer cylinder.
• Downflow.
• Discharge of coffee grounds.
• Brewer returning to stand-by position.
Table of brewing This table shows the various phases of the brewing process and the stages
process in each phase:
Phases
• Brewer in stand-by position ready to start brewing cycle.
Stage Description of function Illustration

1 Scraper in stand-by
position (1).
Filter plate lowered (2),

i.e. the infusion chamber 3
is open.
2 Air piston in home

position, i.e. pulled back
in air cylinder (3).
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 15

Phases
• Dosing of water and coffee.

1 Filter plate (1) moves
up and closes brewer
cylinder forming an
infusion chamber.
2 Dosed water and coffee
is mixed in the mixing
funnel and runs into the
infusion chamber
• Infusion time.
Note:
- The Infusion time corresponds to the Infusion time set in the programming.
- The pressure value corresponds to the Extraction pressure set in the
programming.

1 The brewer motor
starts.
The air piston moves 4
1
forwards in the air
cylinder (1), and 2
produces an air
pressure that will close
the upper valve (2).
2 By means of the air
pressure the first part of
the brew is forced
through the infusion
filter (3) and into the
cup via the diffuser (4).
3 At the same time hot 3
water - the remaining
amount of water for the
brew - goes into the
mixing funnel.
5B (FB) - 16 August, 2007

Phases
• Rinsing of upper valve and brewer cylinder:

1 The air piston moves
backwards in air 1
cylinder (1), releasing
the pressure in the 2
infusion chamber (2).
2 The upper valve opens
and the hot water
contained in the mixing
funnel runs into the
infusion chamber.
An “umbrella effect” is
created forcing the
water against the inner
surfaces of the infusion
chamber, cleaning the
chamber as well.
• Downflow:

1 The brewer motor
starts again.
1 2
The air piston (1)
moves forwards for the
second time closing the
upper valve (2) and
pressing the rest of the
brew through the
infusion filter and into
the cup via the diffuser
(3).
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 17

Phases
• Discharge of coffee grounds

1 The air piston moves
backwards in air
cylinder (1), releasing
1
the pressure in the
infusion chamber.
2 The scraper motor
starts, the filter plate
moves down and the
scraper is moved
across the infusion filter
pushing the coffee
grounds into the coffee
waste container (2). 2
• Brewer returning to start position

1 The scraper returns to
stand-by position (1),
and the brewer is ready
for a new cycle.
5B (FB) - 18 August, 2007

(FB) B.5 Electrical diagrams
Not available here.
(FB) B.6 Technical specifications
Not available here.
(FB) B.7 Options
Not available yet.
(FB) B.8 Accessories
• Filter plate for tea

• Filter plate for coffee
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 19

5B (FB) - 20 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Brewer System - FB Delta version
(FB) B Freshbrewer system
(FB) B.1 Adjustments
General adjust- Water volume, minimum + maximum (depending on the flow and the cor-
ments responding valve adjustments (l/min.)).
• Machine adjustments min. 60 ml. - max. 80 ml.
• Programming max. 240 ml.
Scraper position (adjustable via programming)

• Front
• Rear
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 21

(FB) B.2 Total overview
Illustration This illustration shows the location of the brewer components:
A G
C
F
D E
Legend for figure:

Part Function
A Safety Switch switches as soon as the brewer moves beyond the closing
position.
E.g. seal of the filter plate, filter plate, or brewer cylinder not
installed.
B Brewer (Actuator) Motor drives the actuator, controls the brewing process.
C Ingredient Motor drives the dosing unit, controls the ingredient quantity.
D Brewer Closed Switch switches as soon as the brewer cylinder and the filter plate
form a chamber.
E Brewer Cylinder Position ensures correct position of cylinder.
Switch
F Brewer at End Switch switches on both end positions of the brewer,
e.g. scraper in end position or lower piston position.
G Actuator controls the movements of the filter plate, the piston and the
scraper during the brewing process.
5B (FB) - 22 August, 2007

(FB) B.3 (Dis-)assemblies
(FB) B.3.1 Safety instructions
Installation and repair works on the machine may only be carried out by
trained service technicians.
General Mounting Instructions
Scraper guide Follow this instruction to assemble the scraper guide:

Instruction
• The guiding lugs (1) have to
point towards the brewer’s
fastening holes (rear side)
2
and the cable harness (2).
Support Follow this instruction to assemble the support:

Instruction
• The screw (1) has to be
fastened by means of
Locktite. 1
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 23

(FB) B.3.2 Disassembling the brewer unit
When repairing the brewer unit, these safety rules must be observed:
• Beware of sharp edges.
• Beware of spring loaded actuator, if defective.
Tools needed: Clamp (if actuator is taken out of the brewer unit).
Preparation Follow these steps to prepare the brewer unit for removal:
Step Action
1 Remove the coffee canister.
2 Detach the filter roll bracket from its location peg (if applied).
3 Pull off coffee outlet hose.
4 Place a piece of e.g. corrugated paper on the filter plate and bring the
brewer cylinder into transport position.
Warning! Keep hands and loose objects away from the Brewer!
Warning! If the cylinder is not closed you must be careful when

proceeding with the removal. If nut, piston holder or spindle are
defective, the actuator spring load may be released causing danger of
injury!
5 Switch off the main switch, disconnect the power supply, and close the
water tap.
6 Pull off the hot water hose.
7 Remove the water inlet elbow tube from the brewer, and push it to the
side.
Warning If it was not possible to move the brewer into transport position, only
touch the brewer on its outside. Do not reach underneath the brewer
cylinder, as there is a risk of injuries if the actuator is defective.
Continued...
5B (FB) - 24 August, 2007

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the brewer unit:

Step Action
1 If necessary, remove the filter plate, the scraper, and the brewer
cylinder.
2 Unscrew two screws and lift out brewer.
Warning! If brewer cylinder is not closed, lift out brewer by the sides. Do
not touch underneath the unit!
3 Disconnect the 15-pole plug of the harness at the back of the brewer.
4 If necessary, assemble the filter plate, the scraper, and the brewer
cylinder.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 25

(FB) B.3.3 Testing the brewer unit next to the machine
There is an increased risk of injuries. Keep parts of your body and loose
clothing away from the brewer.
Preparation Before testing the brewer unit:

• Open the door.
• Remove the brewer, see this section, page 5B-24.
• Connect a hose to the water inlet elbow tube (1), and put the end of the
tube into a container, so that the water does not run into the machine.
1
Initiating Test Follow these steps to initiate test of the brewer unit outside the machine:
1 Plug the adapter
cable harness (1)
between the 15-pole
plug of the brewer
unit and the
connection socket of
the brewer unit in
the machine.
Note: For service

parts refer to the
spare parts list). 1
2 Reconnect the power supply, switch on the main switch, and open the water
tap.
3 Actuate the safety switch.
5B (FB) - 26 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.4 Removing the brewer cylinder, filter plate holder

and scraper
Removal Follow these steps to remove the parts:

1 Remove the outlet pipe from the
filter plate.
2 Press lock at the filter plate

support backwards and
withdraw filter plate holder with
filter plate.
3 Take hold of the brewer cylinder

by placing your thumb on the
outside and the rest of your
fingers inside the “brewing
chamber”, tilt the cylinder
smoothly and remove cylinder.
4 Remove scraper by turning and lifting it straight up.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 27

(FB) B.3.5 Removing the brewer housing
Preparation Before removing the brewer housing:

• Open the door.
• Remove the brewer cylinder, the filter plate holder, and the scraper, see
this section, page 5B-27.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the brewer housing:

Step Action
1 Remove the four screws (1).
2 Remove the coffee canister bracket (2).
3 Remove the three screws (3).
4 Remove the brewer housing.
Note: Consider screws of different lengths!
5B (FB) - 28 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.6 Disassembling the tie rods
Preparation Before disassembling the tie rods:

• Open the door.
• Remove the brewer cylinder, the filter plate holder, and the scraper, see
• Remove the brewer housing, see this section, page 5B-28.
The actuator of the brewer is provided with a heavy spring under tension.
Always turn the top and bottom of brewer away from any person before
removing the scraper, as a defective actuator could expand suddenly.
There is an increased risk of injuries.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the tie rods:

1 Loosen the tie rods (1)
1
(two self-locking nuts with
washers).
2 Pull out the tie rods

together with the filter plate
support.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 29

Continued on next page.
• The self-locking nuts must be exchanged.

• Do not re-tighten the self-locking nuts too tight when reassembling the
tie rods.
5B (FB) - 30 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.7 Removing the ingredient motor
Preparation Before removing the ingredient motor:

• Open the door.
• Remove the brewer cylinder, the filter plate holder and the scraper, see
Note When removing the dosing motor, the scraper has to be in the rear position.
If not remove scraper arm before proceeding.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the ingredient motor:

1 Remove the two screws
(1).
2 Pull the ingredient motor
backwards (2).
2
3 Disconnect the plug
connection.
4 Remove the ingredient
motor.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 31

Continued on next page...
If the ingredient motor is stuck, check whether the fastening of the base
console to the brewer base is defective. In this case, press the actuator
against the brewer base. There is the possibility that the fastening domes
were broken so that the actuator slided from the brewer base towards the
top.
5B (FB) - 32 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.8 Disassembling the scraper arms
Preparation Before disassembling the scraper:

• Open the door.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the scraper:

1 Follow next steps to both right and left side of brewer
2 Unhinge the spring (1) on the
outer scraper arm (2). 9
3
3 Remove the retaining rings (3)
and the washers in front of the
outer scraper arm (2).
4 Remove the fastening screws 4 5
(4) and the collar bushes (5) of 8 7
the lever arms (6) on the
bearing housing (8).
5 Pull the outer scraper arm (2)
from the axle (7), remove the 2
retaining ring (9) (above the
inner scraper arm) on one side 1
of the axle, then pull the axle
(7) out of the other side of the
bearing housing (8). 3
4 5 6
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 33


6 If necessary, remove the inner
scraper arm through the lower
bore in the side plate.
5B (FB) - 34 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.9 Removing the actuator
Preparation Before removing the actuator:

• Open the door.
• Disassemble the tie rods with the filter plate support, see this section,
page 5B-29.
• Remove the ingredient motor, see this section, page 5B-31.
• Disassemble the Scraper Arms, see this section, page 5B-33.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the actuator from the brewer unit:
1 Disconnect the cable of the
Brewer at End Switch.
2 Remove the four screws (1)

from the base of the brewer.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 35


3 Carefully pull out the
actuator, and simultaneously
disconnect the cable of the
Brewer Closed Switch.
5B (FB) - 36 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.10 Disassembling the tachoboard
Preparation Before disassembling the tachoboard:

• Open the door.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the tachoboard:

1 Remove the two screws 1
(1).
2 Disconnect the 6-pole plug

connection console/ 1
tachoboard.
3 Disconnect the two cable
3
plug connections (2) from
the actuator motor.
4 Remove the tachoboard
(3) together with the cable
harness.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 37

When reassembling:
• Observe the correct polarity.
The higher number (irrespectively of roman numbers or multiple-
digit numbers) on the stranded wire connections represents the
negative pole.
• When using a new tachoboard, ensure that rubber sleeves are
applied to the plug connections for the actuator motor.
If the toothing of the tachodisc is bent, there is danger of a short circuit on

the tachoboard. Observe the correct installation position of the tachoboard.
Cables and sound indicator have to point towards the magnet, i.e. towards
the inside.
5B (FB) - 38 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.11 Removing the actuator motor
Preparation Before removing the actuator motor:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the actuator motor:

1 Remove the four screws
(1). 1
Note! Do not remove the

loose spacer ring (2).
2 Disconnect the two cable

plug connections (1) from
the tachoboard.
3 Remove the motor.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 39

When installing:
• Observe the correct polarity.
The higher number (irrespectively of roman numbers or multiple-
digit numbers) on the stranded wire connections represents the
negative pole.
• When using a new tachoboard, ensure that rubber sleeves are
applied to the plug connections for the actuator motor.
If the toothing of the tachodisc is bent, there is danger of a short circuit on

the tachoboard.
5B (FB) - 40 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.12 Disassembling the actuator and its driving parts
Preparation Before disassembling the actuator and the driving parts:

• Open the door.
• Disassemble the tie rods with the filter plate support, see this section,
page 5B-29.
• Remove the ingredient motor, see this section, page 5B-31.
• Disassemble the scraper arms, see this section, page 5B-33.
• Remove the actuator from the brewer unit, see this section, page 5B-
35.
• Disassemble the tachoboard, see this section, page 5B-37.
• Disassemble the actuator motor, see this section, page 5B-39.
When disassembling the actuator do never disassemble the driving

parts first! When rotating the tachodisc the nut must rotate together
with it and must not loosen.
Always turn the top and bottom of actuator away from any person before
handling, as a defective actuator could expand suddenly. There is an in-
creased risk of injuries.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the actuator and the driving parts:
1 Release the actuator spring
(1) by turning the Tachodisc 2
(2) counterclockwise, or by
turning the nut (3) of the
Tachodisc counter-
clockwise.
Caution: nut must not
3
loosen.
Continued on next page ..
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 41


2 Remove the bearing
housing (1) and the spring
(2).
3 Fix the tachodisc by means

of e.g. a screwdriver while
unscrewing the nut.
4 Hold the large gear wheel

tightly and remove the nut 1
(1).
5 Remove the large gear
wheel with toothed belt and
small gear consecutively.
5B (FB) - 42 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.13 Disassembling driving parts of actuator without

removing actuator
Preparation Before disassembling the Driving Parts of the Actuator:

• Open the door.
• Disassemble the tachoboard, see this section, page 5B-37.
• Disassemble the actuator motor, see this section, page 5B-39.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the driving parts:

1 Remove the hexagon nut and 1
the washer (1).
2
2 Remove the tacho-generator
disc (2).
3 Remove the toothed belt (3). 3
4 Remove nut and washer (4).
5 Pull off the large toothed wheel 4
(5), teeth = 72.
6 Pull the small toothed wheel (6), 5
teeth = 18, off the actuator 6
motor.
Note: Both toothed wheels and the toothed belt should only be replaced together.
During re-installation make sure that under all circumstances the scraper
arms are in the correct position.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 43

(FB) B.3.14 Replacing the microswitch BSSW
Definition BSSW is an abbreviation of Brewer Safety Switch.
Preparation Before replacing the Brewer Safety Switch:

• Open the door.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the Brewer Safety Switch:

1 Remove the fastening screws
(1) with washers (2) and nuts 5
(4) to replace microswitch (3)
with new switch.
4
2 Disconnect the cable lugs from
the defective microswitch, and
connect them to the new 2
microswitch on the outer
contact pins (5).
Make sure that the 3
insulation hose is 1
positioned correctly.
3 Fasten the new microswitch as
illustrated on drawing.
Observe that the
screws are not
fastened too tight.
4 Check the function of the microswitch.
Horizontally place the microswitch into the 3 mm holes in the highest po-
sition possible.
5B (FB) - 44 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.15 Replacing the ejector spring
Preparation Before removing the ejector spring:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the ejector spring:

1 Remove the four screws
(1) of the brewer cylinder 3 2
support (2).
2 Press the spring (3)
towards the back by
means of a screwdriver, 1
and remove it to the side.
When reassembling:
• The spring has to be placed between the fastening domes and the
spring guide, see illustration above.
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 45

(FB) B.3.16 Replacing the gaskets of the piston
The gaskets of the piston are contained in a valve, located in the centre of
the piston:
Preparation Before replacing the gaskets:

• Remove the brewer cylinder, see this section, page 5B-27.
• Remove the piston from the brewer cylinder, see Operator manual.
Removal Follow these steps to replace the gaskets of the piston:

1 Press the four supports of
the valve together and pull it
out.
2 Remove the gaskets by

pulling the seal lips.
3 Replace gaskets and reassemble piston in reverse order.
5B (FB) - 46 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.17 Removing and descaling the filter plate
The filter plate has to be descaled on a regular bases after approx. 1000 dis-
pensings (depending on the hardness of the water and the coffee type (oil)).
Preparation Before removing the filter plate:

• Remove the filter plate roll holder (if fitted), see Operator manual.
Removal Follow these steps to remove and descale the filter plate:
1 Press the lock at the support
backwards and pull out the
filter plate holder (1).
Press out the sealing ring (2)

3
and the filter plate (3) by
means of the ejector pin (A) 2
of the filter plate holder (1).
2 Remove the tension plate (5)

from the filter plate. 2
3 Descale all metal parts of the
filter plate (3).
4 Clean the rubber sealing (4),
the sealing ring (2) and the
filter plate holder (1) in hot
water.
4 3
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 47

• Make sure that the disc is positioned correctly, i.e. the smooth side
must face the rubber sealing (see ill.).
• Avoid damage of the fine-pore filter.
5B (FB) - 48 August, 2007

(FB) B.3.18 General notes
All actuators/brewers as well as recycled actuators/brewers are equipped

with an additional Label for brewer (Part-no. 35207300):
Label for brewer The label looks like this:
MACH.TYPE INSTAL.DATE..........................
FB50...
COUNTER................................
FB55...
5500....
REMOVE DATE.......................
5100....
............ COUNTER................................
How to complete The table below explains which fields of the label to complete given the
the label type of procedure performed:
IF Brewer/Actuator THEN fields to be filled in ... by ... and how
is to be ...
Installed • MACH.TYPE (1) Manufacturer
• INSTAL.DATE (2)
From factory
• COUNTER (3)
Replaced • MACH.TYPE (1) Service technician
• INSTAL.DATE (2)
On site
• COUNTER (3)
Removed • REMOVE DATE (4) Service technician
• COUNTER (5)
On site
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 49

(FB) B.4 Function of the brewer
Introduction Through an electronically controlled brewing process the brewer takes in

coffee and water and dispenses freshly brewed coffee.
The principle of the brewing process is that a piston moves down inside a
cylinder pressing the freshly brewed coffee through a filter plate.
Brewing process The brewing process can be divided into the following phases:
• Brewer preparing a brewing chamber.
• Dosing of ingredients.
• Extraction time.
• Dispensing of drink.
• Brewer returning to start position.
Table brewing This table shows the various phases of the brewing process and the stages
Phases
• Brewer preparing a brewing chamber

1 Control switches actuator motor
on to drive actuator/spindle.
2 Actuator spring winds up
spindle:
• opens the switch BAE
(Brewer at End), and
• presses down the piston.
3 Scraper moves forward (if set to

starting position at rear).
Filter plate closes the brewer
cylinder.
Note: Counterpressure of
brewer cylinder prevents the filter
plate and the actuator from
further ascending.
4 Control stops the actuator motor
when the pin on the piston holder
does not operate the microswitch
BC (Brewer Closed) any longer
(illustration).
Continued...
5B (FB) - 50 August, 2007

Phases
Continued from previous page.
• Dosing of ingredients

1 The dosing motor is driven and
the outlet valve dispenses water.
2 The water flushes the coffee
powder into the brewing
chamber.
• Extraction time
Note: The extraction time corresponds to the top-stop time set in the
programming.
• Dispensing of a drink

1 The actuator motor descends the
piston in the brewer cylinder via
the spindle.
2 The beverage is filtered through
the filter plate (1) and dispensed
into the cup via the outlet spout
(2).
Continued...
August, 2007 5B (FB) - 51

Phases
Continued from previous page.
• Brewer returning to start position

1 The actuator motor stops as
soon as the guiding nut closes
the microswitch BAE (Brewer at
End). The piston is now in lower
end position.
2 The control switches the actuator
motor to reverse motion,
whereby the piston ascends.
3 The pin on the piston holder
operates the microswitch BC
(Brewer Closed - opener), when
the piston holder reaches its
upper position.
4 The brewer cylinder opens, and

the scraper is guided in such a
way that the dried coffee grounds
as well as the filter papera are
pushed into the coffee grounds
container.
5 The filter paper is rolled off the
paper roll and aligned into
position.
6 The microswitch BAE (Brewer at

End) is actuated, when the
scraper is in its rear or front
position (depends on
programmed setting).
7 The control stops the actuator
motor.
a. Optional for coffee filling.
5B (FB) - 52 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Brewer System (Z3000) - Espresso version
(ES) B Brewer System (Z3000)
(ES) B.1 Adjustments
General Water volume, minimum + maximum (depending on the flow and the
adjustments corresponding valve adjustments (l/min.)).
• Machine adjustments min. xx ml. - max. xx ml.
• Programming max. xx ml.
Settings Dosing unit

Range: 6 g to 8 g ±0.5.
Ratchet:
- low groove: 6 g ±0.5
- medium groove: 7 g ±0.5
- high groove: 8 g ±0.5
6 reference notches for fine tuning each changing approg. 0.25 g.
The dose is increased by lifting the lever up in a higher reference notch,

and reduced by lowering the lever into a lower located reference notch.
Grinder:
The variation in the grade of grinding is adjusted by turning the knob on
the grinder.
Note: After adjustment of the grade of grinding, make at least 2 test

selections in order to check the new granulometry of the ground coffee, see
chap. 4, page 65.
The finer the grade of grinding the longer the time necessary for dispensing
the coffee and vice versa.
Brewing chamber:
Range: Coffee doses from 5.5 to 8.5 g
- deep notches from 5.5 to 7.5 g doses
- low notches from 6.5 to 8.5 g doses.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 53

(ES) B.2 Overview of parts
5B (ES ) - 54 August, 2007

Legend for figure:

Part Description
A Espresso boiler module
B Espresso coffee brewer
C Grinder
D Adjusting screw
E Coffee doser unit
F Crank arm
G Coffee brewer motor
H Brewer park switch
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 55

(ES) B.3 (Dis-)assemblies
(ES) B.3.1 Removing the espresso brewer
Preparation Before removing the espresso brewer

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the espresso brewer:

1 Remove the boiler teflon hose
connection (1) from the upper
piston, paying attention not to 1
lose the seal.
2 Loosen the knob (2) securing the
brewer unit to the front cover of
3 Remove the brewer unit (3).
Installation Installation is done in reverse order taking particular care that the crank
arm of the coffee brewer motor is correctly engaged in its seat.
(ES) B.3.2 Disassembling the upper piston of the espresso

brewer
Preparation Before disassembling the upper piston:

• Open the door.
• Remove the espresso brewer, see this section, page 5B (ES) - 56.
5B (ES ) - 56 August, 2007

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the upper piston:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1) 1
3
from its seat.
2 Rotate the piston (2) and press 2
down.
3 Remove the piston from below
of ‘cross piece’ (3).
4 Unscrew the central screw of

piston filter (4).
5 Disassemble filter and clean
parts thoroughly.
- descale filter, or replace with
new one, if needed.
- clean remaining parts
thoroughly.
6 Flush parts thoroughly with clean, warm water ensuring that no dirt or
cleaning agent remains on the parts.
Assembly Reassemble all parts in reverse order. If necessary, replace the O-ring,
slightly lubricating it with special food-safe grease.
(ES) B.3.3 Disassembling outer parts of the espresso brewer
Preparation Before disassembling outer parts of the brewer:

• Open the door.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 57

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the brewer:

1 Rotate the disk (1) until the 2
connecting rods are quite at the top
potition in their tracks (2) and place
the brewer unit on a flat surface.
Note: Correct position, when

reference notches are facing
each other.
3
4
5
9
8
7
2 Remove the retaining rings (3) from the connecting rod (4), facing
upwards.
3 Remove the connecting rod (4).
4 Remove the retaining ring (5) for diverting slide, facing upwards.
5 Remove the diverting slide (6).
6 Unscrew the hexagon screw (7) of the handle wheel using an 4 mm allan
key.
Note: Hold counter with another allan 4 mm key on the hexagon screw of
the opposite handle wheel.
7 Unscrew 6 screws of upper brewer half shell (8) plus unscrew the brewer
securing nut (9) and take upper and lower brewer half shelf apart.
5B (ES ) - 58 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.4 Disassembling the brewing chamber assembly
Preparation Before disassembling the brewing chamber assembly:

• Open the door.
• Disassemble the outer parts of the espresso brewer
Prerequisites Have a holding clamp ready, when removing the inner parts of the brewing
chamber.
Take care not to loose springs when removing the lower cover for inner
parts of brewing chamber.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the brewing chamber assembly:

1 Remove the brewing chamber assembly from lower brewer half shell.
2 Remove the retaining ring (1) at end
of the lower piston guide (2). 3
3 Remove lower piston (3) from 4
brewing chamber assembly (4) as
follows:
press lower piston guide (2) from
bottom and take out piston from top 6
of brewing chamber.
5
4 Remove cap (5) above venting hole
(6) in one side of brewing chamber.
Clean hole, if needed. 2
1
5 Remove three screws (7) at bottom

of brewing chamber assembly to get
access to inner parts of brewing
chamber.
8
Use a holding clamp.
Note: When removing the lower (8)

cover, take care not loose springs. 7
6 Remove all components, paying attention to their position.

7 Clean all parts.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 59

(ES) B.3.5 Disassembling the lower piston of the espresso

brewer

• Open the door.
• Disassemble the outer parts of the espresso brewer
• Disassembling the brewing chamber assembly
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the lower piston:

1 Unscrew the central screw (1)
of piston filter (2). 1
2 Disassemble filter and clean
parts thoroughly. 2
- descale filter, or replace with
new one, if needed.
- clean remaining parts
thoroughly.
3 Flush parts thoroughly with
clean, warm water ensuring
that no dirt or cleaning agent
remains on the parts.
5B (ES ) - 60 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.6 Changing the brewing chamber volume of the

espresso brewer
Preparation Before changing the brewing chamber volume:

• Open the door.
Change Follow these steps to change the brewing chamber volume:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1) from
its seat. 1
2 Rotate piston (2) and press down.
3 Rotate piston and place it in the
other type of adjusting notches (3) 3
(deep or low ones). 2
Reference The reference notches in the upper pistons decide the volume of the
notches brewing chamber.
• Deep reference notches: From 5.5 g to 7.5 g doses.
• Low reference notches: From 6.5 g to 8.5 g doses.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 61

(ES) B.3.7 Adjusting the espresso coffee dose
Preparation Before adjusting the espresso coffee dose:

• Open the door.
Prerequisites Have a cup and a pair of scales ready for measuring the coffee dosed.
Adjustment Follow these steps to adjust the espresso coffee dose:

1 Rotate the dose adjusting lever
4
(1) fully upwards.
3
2 Release ratchet (2) from its
present groove (3) in the dose
regulator (4) and replace it into
the one, representing the wanted 2
dose, see ‘possible settings’
below.
back (1) in one of the reference
notches (5) bearing in mind that:
• lifting the lever: increases
dose 5
• lowering the lever: reduces
dose
1
4 Perform a check of the quantity dispensed from the dosing unit.
5B (ES ) - 62 August, 2007

Check dispensed Follow these steps to check the quantity of coffee dispensed from the
quantity dosing unit into the brewer unit:
1 Insert the service key and turn to the display.
2 Enter the menus ‘Technician’ -> ‘ES ES accessories only
Test Functions’ -> ‘Grind and Dose’, *Grind and Dose
ES brewer cycle
see ^ v Sel Esc
3 Press ‘Sel’ and follow instructions on

display. Grind to Pot test
Continue ?
OK Esc
4 Pres ‘OK’ and place a cup under the coffee doser unit.
5 Weigh out the dose delivered and check for desired quantity.
6 • If the quantity is OK, proceed with step 7.
• If the quantity is not OK, revert to adjustment and proceed from step 3.
7 Remove yellow key and reinstall espresso brewer, see this section,
page 5B (ES) - 56
Setting ranges Dosing unit

Range: 6 g to 8 g ±0.5.
Ratchet:

(ES) B.3.8 Disassembling the coffee brewer motor
Preparation Before disassembling the coffee brewer motor:

• Open the door.
• Open the front cover of the espresso boiler module, see section A,
page 5A (ES) - 34
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 63

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the coffee brewer motor

1 Pull off earth wire (1) from
terminal on motor. 1
2 Pull off plug connections (2)
from terminals of motor.
3 Unscrew four screws (3) from

front side of front cover for
espresso boiler unit and lift 3
off the motor.
4 Unscrew and remove two screws and washers (4) to separate motor from
motor support.
5 Unscrew one screw and remove crank arm (5) from motor.
5B (ES ) - 64 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.9 Replacing the brewer park switch
Preparation Before replacing the brewer park switch:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34
Prerequisites Have a soldering iron ready.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the brewer park switch:

1 Cut the electrical connections from the terminals of the switch using eg. a
pair of pincers.
2 Remove switch (1) by unscrewing two screws.
3 Fix the new switch by means of the screws and washers.

4 Solder the electrical connections onto the soldering terminals of the
switch.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 65

(ES) B.3.10 Removing the coffee doser unit
preparation Before removing the coffee doser unit:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coffee doser unit:

1 Pull off the electrical plug
connections (1) from the switch 4
(2) of the coffee doser unit.
2 Pull off the earth wire (3) from
solenoid (4).
1
3 Loosen two screws (5) to
remove the coffee doser unit.
4 Push aside the coffee doser unit 2
(6).
3
6 5
5B (ES ) - 66 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.11 Replacing the switch of the coffee doser unit
Preparation Before replacing the switch of the coffee doser unit:

• Open the door.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the switch of the coffee doser unit:
connections (1) from the 2
switch of the coffee doser unit.
2 Unscrew one screw fixing the
adapter plate for switch (2).
3 Press the adapter plate (2)
aside and tilt it upwards to
gain access to the screws (3)
of the switch.
4 Unscrew two screws (3) and

remove switch (4). 4
5 Replace with a new switch.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 67

(ES) B.3.12 Replacing the solenoid of the coffee doser unit

• Open the door.
• Close the shutter of the coffee bean canister and lift out canister.
• If needed, also remove instant canister next to the espresso canister to
gain easy access to the parts of the espresso unit system.
page 5A (ES) - 34.
• Remove the coffee doser unit, see this section, page 5B (ES) - 66.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the solenoid of the coffee doser unit:
1 Unscrew earth screw and
remove washer and terminal 3
tap (1). 1
2 Unscrew screw (2) and

remove the coffee doser unit
cover (3).
5B (ES ) - 68 August, 2007


3 Disconnect the electrical plug 5 6
connections for the solenoid
of the coffee doser unit (4)
inside the ES boiler module.
4 • Lift the grinder (5) from its
location bushings just
enough to release the
harness of the solenoid of
the coffee doser unit (6).
• Remove the harness of
the solenoid trough the
cable-duct seal (7).
7
5 Unscrew two screws with

lock washers from the rear 9
part of the coffee doser body
(8). 8
6 Pull the magnet coil (9) out of
the coffee doser body,
considering the plunger (10), 12
the spring (11) and the rod 10
pivot (12).
11
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 69

(ES) B.3.13 Removing the grinder unit
Preparation Before removing the grinder unit:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34.
• Remove and push aside the coffee doser unit, see this section, page 5B
(ES) - 66.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the grinder unit:

1 Disconnect electrical 3
connections (1) of grinder unit
and earth wire (2).
2 Lift off grinder unit (3) from its
location bushes on top of the
espresso boiler module (4)
and let the grinder unit rest on
the ‘coffee shelf cover’.
5B (ES ) - 70 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.14 Replacing the brushes of the grinder motor
Preparation Before replacing the brushes of the grinder motor:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34
(ES) - 66.
• Remove the grinder unit, see this section, page 5B (ES) - 70.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the brushes:

1 Remove cap (1) from brush
holder (2) in one side of grinder
5
motor
2 Remove electrical tap terminal
(3) and spring (4).
3 Tilt motor until brush (5) falls 4
out of brush holder.
3
4 Replace old brush with new
one.
5 Perform the same procedure in the other side.
Take care not to loose spring when removing the electrical tap terminal!
Replacement of brushes after approximately 100.000 selections.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 71

(ES) B.3.15 Removing the regulating screw of the grinder
Preparation Before removeing the regulating screw:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the regulating screw:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1)
using eg. a flat tipped 1
screwdriver.
2 Release regulating screw (2)

from first holder (a) and 3
unscrew rubber washer (3)
from regulating screw.
a
3 Unscrew regulationg screw (2)
from second holder (b).
2
b
5B (ES ) - 72 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.16 Removing the grinder motor
Preparation Before removing the grinder motor:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34
(ES) - 66.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the grinder motor:

1 Remove three screws from
1
motor support, one from upper
side (1) and two from lower
side of support (2).
2 Unscrew the three screws (3)
from inner side of support and
separate motor from motor
support.
3
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 73

(ES) B.3.17 Removing / replacing the upper grinding disk
Preparation Before removing the upper grind disk:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34
(ES) - 66.
• Remove the regulating screw of the grinder, see this section, page 5B
(ES) - 72.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the upper grinding disk:

1 Unscrew the holder for upper
grinding disk (1) from cap for
grinder (2) . 1
2 Unscrew three screws (3) and
remove the upper grinder disk
(4).
4
3 Replace old grinder disk with
new one.
5B (ES ) - 74 August, 2007

(ES) B.3.18 Removing / replacing the lower grinding disk
Preparation Before removing the lower grind disk:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34
(ES) - 66.
(ES) - 72.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the lower grinding disk:

1 Remove the holder for upper 1
grinding disk (1).
2 Remove three screws (2) and

remove the lower grinder disk 2
(3).
3 Replace old grinder disk with new one.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 75

(ES) B.3.19 Disassembling the lower parts of the grinder
Preparation Before disassembling the lower parts of the grinder:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 34.
(ES) - 66.
(ES) - 72.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the lower parts:

grinding disk (1).
5B (ES ) - 76 August, 2007


6
7
3 Hold a cloth against the shaft 2
wheel of the grinder (4) to hold
counter and turn left on the
screw (left threaded) at top of 5
the lower grinder part (5),
using eg an adjustable
spanner.
4 Remove spring (6) and washer
(7).
4
3
5 Remove shaft wheel (4) with
ball bearing from below of cap
of grinder.
6 Shake cap to remove 5
remaining parts from cap (5):
• Grinder disk and support
• Thrust bearing
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 77

(ES) B.4 Functional descriptions
(ES) B.4.1 Total overview of the brewer system
5B (ES ) - 78 August, 2007

Legend
Part Description
C Grinder
D Adjusting screw
E Coffee doser unit
F Coffee brewer motor
G Brewer park switch
H Crank arm
(ES) B.4.2 Function: Grinder unit
Description When an espresso coffee selection is made, the grinder starts and continues
until the coffee doser chamber is full.
(ES) B.4.3 Function: Coffee doser unit
Description When the coffee doser unit is full, the ground coffee dose is released into
the coffee brewer unit.
(ES) B.4.4 Function: Coffee brewer
Introduction The brewing process can be divided into the following phases:
• Stand-by - ready to start brewing cycle
• Brewer preparing a brewer cycle
• Pre-infusion
• Brewer returning to stand-by position
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 79

Table: Brewing This table shows the various phases of the brewing process and the stages
Phases
• Stand-by - brewer ready to start brewing cycle

1 The coffee brewer is in the open
position and ready to receive
ground coffee from the chamber
of the doser unit 1
2 The ground coffee falls into the
vertical brewing chamber (1),
and the coffee brewer motor is
activated.
• Brewer preparing a brewing cycle

1 The crank of the coffee brewer
motor - the motor is now running
- is engaging with the disks on 1
3
the outside of the unit (2).
Because of this mechanism, the
brewing chamber (1) is now
inclined until parallel with the
upper piston (3).
2 At the same time, the upper

piston (3), which is connected to
the crank by means of a steel
connecting rod, is lowered and
closes the brewing chamber.
2
5B (ES ) - 80 August, 2007

Phases
• Pre-infusion - brewing chamber is closed

1 The Three-way solenoid valve on top of the espresso boiler opens.
2 A thin layer of water from the
boiler wets the coffee dose (4),
preparing it for brewing.
4

1 The pump starts.
2 The water pressure (12 bar)
causes the pre-brewing spring
(5) to sink, thus making the
lower piston go down by 4 mm.
6
Hereby a water cushion (6) is
formed, allowing an even use of
the coffee dose. 5
3 The dispensing of coffee begins
(7). 7
4 The pump stops.
August, 2007 5B (ES) - 81

Phases
• Brewer returning to stand-by position

1 The pre-brewing spring (5)
returns to its initial position
slightly pressing the used coffee
dose from below.
2 The three-way valve on top of the
espresso boiler opens its third 5
way, discharging the excess
water into the waste container.
3 The coffee brewer motor is activated rotating the lever arms:

4 making the lower piston open
and move to the upper dead
centre (8). In this operation the
lower piston keeps rising until the 9
cake of the used coffee dose is
stopped and dropped by the 8
scraper (9).
5 making the upper piston (3)

return to its initial position. In this
operation the brewing chamber
(1) returns to vertical position.
3
6 The coffee brewer motor still 1
runing finally makes the lower
piston return to the botto dead
centre.
7 The coffee brewer is now ready
for the next selection.
5B (ES ) - 82 August, 2007

(ES) BEspresso brewer system
(ES) B.1 Adjustments
General Water volume, minimum + maximum (depending on the flow and the
adjustments corresponding valve adjustments (l/min.)).
• Machine adjustments min. xx ml. - max. xx ml.
• Programming max. xx ml.
Settings Dosing unit

Range: 6 g to 8 g ±0.5.
Ratchet:

Grinder:
The variation in the grade of grinding is adjusted by turning the knob on
the grinder.
Note: After adjustment of the grade of grinding, make at least 2 test

selections in order to check the new granulometry of the ground coffee, see
chap. 4, page 61.
The finer the grade of grinding the longer the time necessary for dispensing
the coffee and vice versa.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 1

(ES) B.2 Total overview
F
B
5B (ES ) - 2 June, 2006

Legend for figure:

Part Description
C Grinder
D Adjusting screw
E Coffee doser unit
F Crank arm
G Coffee motor
H Brewer park switch
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 3

(ES) B.2.1 Removing the espresso brewer
Preparation Before removing the espresso brewer

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the espresso brewer:

1 Remove the boiler teflon hose
connection (1) from the upper
piston, paying attention not to 1
lose the seal.
2 Loosen the knob (2) securing the
brewer unit to the front cover of
3 Remove the brewer unit.
Installation Installation is done in reverse order taking particular care that the crank
arm of the coffee motor is correctly engaged in its seat.
(ES) B.2.2 Disassembling the upper piston of the espresso brewer

• Open the door.
5B (ES ) - 4 June, 2006

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the upper piston:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1) 1
from its seat.
2
2 Rotate the piston and press
down.
3 Remove the piston from below
of ‘cross piece’ (2).
4 Unscrew one screw and

remove the filter (3).
5 Replace O-ring by new one, if
needed.
(ES) B.2.3 Disassembling the lower piston of the espresso brewer
Preparation Before disassembling the lower piston:

• Open the door.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 5

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the lower piston:

1 Rotate the disk (1) until the 2
connecting rods are quite at the top
potition in their tracks (2).
Note: Correct position, when

reference notches are facing
each other.
2 Loosen two screws (3 and 4), 5

enough to release the coffee funnel.
3 Release and remove the coffee
funnel (5).
3
4 Remove the retaining ring (6).

5 Press lower piston guide (7) until the
lower piston (8) can be taken out
from top of brewer.
8
6 Unscrew one screw and remove the
filter (9).
7 Replace O-ring (10) by new one, if
needed.
9
10
6 7
5B (ES ) - 6 June, 2006

(ES) B.2.4 Changing the brewing chamber volume of the espresso

brewer
Preparation Before changing the brewing chamber volume:

• Open the door.
Change Follow these steps to change the brewing chamber volume:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1) from 1
its seat.
2 Rotate piston (2) and press down.
3 Rotate piston and place it in the
other type of adjusting notches (3) 3
(deep or low ones). 2
Reference The reference notches in the upper pistons decide the volume of the
notches brewing chamber.
• Deep reference notches: From 5.5 g to 7.5 g doses.
• Low reference notches: From 6.5 g to 8.5 g doses.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 7

(ES) B.2.5 Adjusting the espresso coffee dose
Preparation Before adjusting the espresso coffee dose:

• Open the door.
Prerequisites Have a cup and a pair of scales ready for measuring the coffee dosed.
Adjustment Follow these steps to adjust the espresso coffee dose:

4
(1) fully upwards.
3
2 Release ratchet (2) from its
present groove (3) in the dose
regulator (4) and replace it into
the one, representing the wanted 2
dose, see ‘possible settings’
below.
back (1) in one of the reference
notches (5) bearing in mind that:
• lifting the lever: increases
dose 5
• lowering the lever: reduces
dose
1
4 Perform a check of the quantity dispensed from the dosing unit.
5B (ES ) - 8 June, 2006

Check dispensed Follow these steps to check the quantity of coffee dispensed from the
quantity dosing unit into the brewer unit:
1 Insert the service key and turn to the display.
2 Enter the menus ‘Technician’ -> ‘ES ES accessories only
Test Functions’ -> ‘Grind and Dose’, *Grind and Dose
ES brewer cycle
see ^ v Sel Esc
3 Press ‘Sel’ and follow instructions on

display. Grind to Pot test
Continue ?
OK Esc
4 Pres ‘OK’ and place a cup under the coffee doser unit.
5 Weigh out the dose delivered and check for desired quantity.
6 • If the quantity is OK, proceed with step 7.
• If the quantity is not OK, revert to adjustment and proceed from step 3.
7 Remove yellow key and reinstall espresso brewer, see this section,
page 5B (ES) - 4
Setting ranges Dosing unit

Range: 6 g to 8 g ±0.5.
Ratchet:

(ES) B.2.6 Disassembling the coffee motor
Preparation Before disassembling the coffee motor:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 9

Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the coffee motor

1 Pull off earth wire (1) from
terminal on motor. 1
2 Pull off electrical connections
(2) from terminals of motor.
3 Unscrew four screws (3) from

front side of front cover for
espresso boiler unit and lift 3
off the motor.
4 Unscrew and remove two screws and washers (4) to separate motor from
motor support.
5 Unscrew one screw and remove crank arm (5) from motor.
5B (ES ) - 10 June, 2006

(ES) B.2.7 Replacing the brewer park switch
Preparation Before replacing the brewer park switch:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7
Prerequisites Have a soldering iron ready.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the brewer park switch:

1 Cut the electrical connections from the terminals of the switch using eg. a
pair of pincers.
2 Remove switch (1) by unscrewing two screws.
3 Fix the new switch by means of the screws and washers.

4 Solder the electrical connections onto the soldering terminals of the
switch.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 11

(ES) B.2.8 Removing the coffee doser unit
preparation Before removing the coffee doser unit:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coffee doser unit:

connections (1) from the switch 4
(2) of the coffee doser unit.
2 Pull off the earth wire (3) from
solenoid (4).
1
remove the coffee doser unit.
4 Push aside the coffee doser unit 2
(6).
3
6 5
5B (ES ) - 12 June, 2006

(ES) B.2.9 Replacing the switch of the coffee doser unit

• Open the door.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the switch of the coffee doser unit:
connections (1) from the 2
switch of the coffee doser unit.
2 Unscrew one screw fixing the
adapter plate for switch (2).
3 Press the adapter plate (2)
aside and tilt it upwards to
gain access to the screws (3)
of the switch.

remove switch (4). 4
5 Replace with a new switch.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 13

(ES) B.2.10 Replacing the solenoid of the coffee doser unit

• Open the door.
• Close the shutter of the coffee bean canister and lift out canister.
page 5A (ES) - 7.
• Remove the coffee doser unit, see this section, page 5B (ES) - 12.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the solenoid of the coffee doser unit:
1 Unscrew earth screw and
remove washer and terminal 3
tap (1). 1
2 Unscrew screw (2) and

remove the coffee doser unit
cover (3).
5B (ES ) - 14 June, 2006


3 Disconnect the electrical plug 5 6
connections for the solenoid
of the coffee doser unit (4)
inside the ES boiler module.
4 • Lift the grinder (5) from its
location bushings just
enough to release the
harness of the solenoid of
the coffee doser unit (6).
• Remove the harness of
the solenoid trough the
cable-duct seal (7).
7
5 Unscrew two screws with

lock washers from the rear 9
part of the coffee doser body
(8). 8
6 Pull the magnet coil (9) out of
the coffee doser body,
considering the plunger (10), 12
the spring (11) and the rod 10
pivot (12).
11
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 15

(ES) B.2.11 Removing the grinder unit
Preparation Before removing the grinder unit:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7.
(ES) - 12.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the grinder unit:

1 Disconnect electrical 3
connections (1) of grinder unit
and earth wire (2).
2 Lift off grinder unit (3) from its
location bushes on top of the
espresso boiler module (4)
and let the grinder unit rest on
the ‘coffee shelf cover’.
5B (ES ) - 16 June, 2006

(ES) B.2.12 Replacing the brushes of the grinder motor
Preparation Before replacing the brushes of the grinder motor:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7
(ES) - 12.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the brushes:

1 Remove cap (1) from brush
holder (2) in one side of grinder
5
motor
2 Remove electrical tap terminal
(3) and spring (4).
3 Tilt motor until brush (5) falls 4
out of brush holder.
3
4 Replace old brush with new
one.
5 Perform the same procedure in the other side.
Take care not to loose spring when removing the electrical tap terminal!
Replacement of brushes after approximately 100.000 selections.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 17

(ES) B.2.13 Removing the regulating screw of the grinder
Preparation Before removeing the regulating screw:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the regulating screw:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1)
using eg. a flat tipped 1
screwdriver.
2 Release regulating screw (2)

from first holder (a) and 3
unscrew rubber washer (3)
from regulating screw.
a
3 Unscrew regulationg screw (2)
from second holder (b).
2
b
5B (ES ) - 18 June, 2006

(ES) B.2.14 Removing the grinder motor
Preparation Before removing the grinder motor:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7
(ES) - 12.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the grinder motor:

1
2 Unscrew the three screws (3)
from inner side of support and
separate motor from motor
support.
3
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 19

(ES) B.2.15 Removing / replacing the upper grinding disk
Preparation Before removing the upper grind disk:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7
(ES) - 12.
(ES) - 18.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the upper grinding disk:

1 Unscrew the holder for upper
grinding disk (1) from cap for
grinder (2) . 1
2 Unscrew three screws (3) and
remove the upper grinder disk
(4).
4
3 Replace old grinder disk with
new one.
5B (ES ) - 20 June, 2006

(ES) B.2.16 Removing / replacing the lower grinding disk
Preparation Before removing the lower grind disk:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7
(ES) - 12.
(ES) - 18.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the lower grinding disk:

grinding disk (1).
2 Remove three screws (2) and

remove the lower grinder disk 2
(3).
3 Replace old grinder disk with new one.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 21

(ES) B.2.17 Disassembling the lower parts of the grinder
Preparation Before disassembling the lower parts of the grinder:

• Open the door.
page 5A (ES) - 7.
(ES) - 12.
(ES) - 18.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the lower parts:

grinding disk (1).
5B (ES ) - 22 June, 2006


6
7
3 Hold a cloth against the shaft 2
wheel of the grinder (4) to hold
counter and turn left on the
screw (left threaded) at top of 5
the lower grinder part (5),
using eg an adjustable
spanner.
4 Remove spring (6) and washer
(7).
4
3
5 Remove shaft wheel (4) with
ball bearing from below of cap
of grinder.
6 Shake cap to remove 5
remaining parts from cap (5):
• Grinder disk and support
• Thrust bearing
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 23

(ES) B.3 Functional descriptions
B.3.1 Total overview of the brewer system
F
B
5B (ES ) - 24 June, 2006

Legend
Part Description
C Grinder
D Adjusting screw
E Coffee doser unit
F Coffee motor
G Brewer park switch
H Crank arm
(ES) B.3.2 Function: Grinder unit
Description When an espresso coffee selection is made, the grinder starts and continues
until the coffee doser chamber is full.
(ES) B.3.3 Function: Coffee doser unit
Description When the coffee doser unit is full, the ground coffee dose is released into
the coffee brewer unit.
(ES) B.3.4 Coffee brewer
Description • When in stand-by, the coffee brewer is in the open position and ready
to receive ground coffee from the coffee doser unit.
• When the coffee is released from the coffee doser unit, the coffee falls
into the vertical brewing chamber and the coffee motor is activated.
• The crank of the coffee motor is engaged with the disks located on the
outside of the unit. By means of this special mechanism the brewing
chamber is oscillated by approximately 30°. At the same time the
upper piston, which is connected to the crank by means of a steel con-
necting rod, is lowered and inserted into the brewing chamber, com-
pressing the ground coffee.
• At this point the three-way solenoid valve opens and a slight layer of
water wets the coffee dose, preparing it for brewing.
June, 2006 5B (ES) - 25

• A moment later the pump is started.

• The water pressure (12 bar) causes the pre-brewing spring to sink, thus
making the lower piston go down by 4 mm. Hereby a water cushion is
formed, allowing an even use of the coffee dose.
• After the pump stops (during a 3 second pause) and at the end of the
dispensing cycle, the pre-brewing spring returns to its initial position
slightly pressing the used coffee dose. Simultaneously the three-way
valve opens its third way, discharging the excess water.
• At this point the coffee motor is activated making the filter piston open
and move to the upper dead centre. In this operation the brewing cham-
ber returns to the vertical position and the filter piston keeps rising
until the cake of the spent coffee dose is stopped and dropped by the
scraper on the coffee hopper.
• The lower piston now returns to the bottom dead centre, preparing the
coffee brewer unit for the next selection.
5B (ES ) - 26 June, 2006

Service Manual 7600 series Dosing system
C Dosing system
C.1 Adjustments
General The basic elements of a recipe may be adjusted via the Operator menu.
adjustments More advanced settings of recipes have to be carried out via the
Wittenborg Configurator tool.
Adjustments via This table gives a brief overview of the possible adjustments to recipes.
Operator menu
and/or Wittenborg Function Operator menu * Wittenborg Configurator
configurator Dosing:
(Water: ml) x x
(Powder: mg)
Speed
(Water: ml./sec.) x
(Powder: mg/sec.)
Mixer time x x
(ms)
Mixer speed x x
(0-100%) Range: 100% or <51% Range: 100% or <51%
Mixer delay x
(ms)
Dispensing time x x
(ms)
Preselections
x
Selections
(assignment of drinks x
to buttons)
* All adjustments via the Operator menu are carried out in the Basic
operations menu, see chap. 4, Operator menu, Basic Operations
August, 2007 5C - 1
C.2 (Dis-)assemblies
C.2.1 Removing the instant ingredient mixing units
Preparation Before removing the mixing units:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the mixing units:

1 Detach the mixing unit by pressing
a screwdriver against the upper and 1
lower click tab (1), and pull out the 2
mixing unit (2) from the main
bracket for mixing units (3).
3
1
2 Disconnect the electrical connector

5
(4) from the connection rail (5).
• Ensure that mixing unit connects properly to extraction tube coupling

and valve connection when reinstalling into main bracket.
• The main bracket for mixing units is provided with holes to facilitate
correct location of mixing units.
5C - 2 August, 2007
C.2.2 Removing a dispensing valve for instant

ingredients
Preparation Before removing a dispensing valve:

• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient mixing unit in question, see this section,
page 5C-2.
Disassembly Use a flat screwdriver to lift the locking tab (1) as shown in illustration be-
low, and pull out the dispensing valve (2) of the outlet tube module plate
(3).
Illustration
Ensure that valve is properly seated in the outlet tube, which is simultane-
ously acting as a seal.
August, 2007 5C - 3
C.2.3 Replacing a whipper motor
Preparation Before replacing a whipper motor:

• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient mixing unit in question, see this section,
page 5C-2.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace a whipper motor:

1 Detach mixing funnel (1) from mixing
unit by turning green locking ring (2)
counter clockwise. Remove funnel.
2 Pull whipper wheel (3) out of mixing

unit.
3 Hold the mixing unit (4) in one hand

and with the other turn the locking
cover for whipper motor (5) clockwise
to release motor.
4 Remove motor from cover and replace
with new one, if necessary (5).
5 Check gasket (V-ring) for motor and 6
4
replace, if necessary (6).
5C - 4 August, 2007
When re-inserting the whipper wheel make sure to turn it correctly

considering that the insertion hole and the connecting pin are D-shaped.
Rearrangement In case the configuration of instant ingredient canisters or mixing funnels

is changed, the whipper motors must be rearranged as well.
Blanks of 20 mm and/or 40 mm clicked on between motors eliminate free
space.
C.2.4 Removing the coffee whipper module
Preparation Before removing the coffee whipper module:

• Open the door.
• Switch off the main switch
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coffee whipper module::

1 Remove the lid for coffee whipper 1 6
(1).
4
2 Remove inlet and outlet hose (2),
(3) from coffee whipper.
5
3 Detach the coffee whipper by
pressing a screwdriver against the
2
upper and lower click tabs (4) of the
module plate, and pull out the
coffee whipper (5) from the main
bracket for coffee whipper and
mixing units (6).
4
3
4 Disconnect the electrical connector

8
(7) from the connection rail (8).
August, 2007 5C - 5
C.2.5 Replacing the coffee whipper motor
Preparation Before replacing the coffee whipper motor:

• Open the door
• Switch off the main switch
• Remove the coffee whipper unit
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the coffee whipper motor

1 Detach diffuser (1) from coffee
whipper module plate (2) by turning 2
it either anti-clockwise or clockwise, 1
depending on one or two brewers,
and pull off the diffuser.
2 Pull whipper wheel (3) out of

module plate.
3 Remove two screws (4) to remove

motor brace (5) from motor (6).
4 Remove motor from module plate
and replace with new one, if
necessary.
6
5C - 6 August, 2007

5 Check gasket V-ring for motor (7)
and replace it, if necessary.
August, 2007 5C - 7
C.2.6 Rearranging the extraction tube couplings
Preparation Before repositioning an extraction tube coupling:

• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient mixing units in question, see this
section, page 5C-2.
Rearrangement • Turn the appropriate coupling a quarter revolution to either side and
remove from the rear of the connection rail.
• Reposition the coupling to the proper hole in the connection rail and
re-lock it by turning a quarter revolution.
• In case the configuration of instant ingredient canisters or mixing
funnels is changed, the extraction tube couplings may ned to be
rearranged as well.
Illustration
5C - 8 August, 2007
C.2.7 Disassembling an ingredient motor for instant

products (or coffee - Sigma brewer)
Preparation Before disassembling an ingredient motor:

• Open the door.
• Remove the appropriate ingredient canisters, see Operator manual.
• Remember to close the outlet spouts of relevant ingredient canisters

before removing canisters.
• This procedure applies to canisters for instant ingredient products and,
in machines with Sigma brewer, also to the coffee canister/s.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble an ingredient motor:

1 Detach the ingredient motor module (1) 2
by pressing a screwdriver against the
upper and lower click tabs (2), and pull
out the ingredient motor module from the
connection rail (3).
3
2
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3 Detach the ingredient motor from the
motor module plate as follows: 5 4
• Turn motor module plate (4) front up,
motor pointing downwards over, for
example, a table
• Place your thumbs on front side of
plate and place other fingers on
retaining tabs on rear side.
• Press retaining tabs (5) aside till
motor is released from the tabs and
falls down on table. 5
Assembly Assembly is done in reverse order. Module will click into position.
Rearrangement In case the configuration of instant ingredient canisters is changed, the in-
gredient motors must be rearranged as well.
Blanks of 20 mm and/or 40 mm clicked on between motors eliminate free
space.
August, 2007 5C - 9
• Ensure that the ingredient motor module is installed in place in

mounting rail in correct relation to ingredient canister.
• Ensure that the corresponding ingredient canister is gearing correctly
into the motor coupling.
• Remember to open the outlet spout of canister after reinstallation of
canister.
5C - 10 August, 2007
C.2.8 Distributor head configuration
Introduction The holes for the spouts have been separated into two 'zones', ie one for the
drinks known as 'light colour' drinks, and the other for the drinks known as
'dark colour' drinks. The zone for the 'light colour' drinks is located in the
right side of the head, and the zone for the 'dark colour' drinks in the left
side (seen from front, with open door).
Definition of “dark” • A ‘dark’ colour drink is defined as a drink, a drip from which may be
or “light” colour visible in a ‘light’ colour drink. A typical ‘dark’ colour drink contains
drinks coffee or chocolate.
• A ‘light’ colour drink is defined as a drink, a drip from which is not
visible in another drink. A typical ‘light’ colour drink is hot or cold
water or lemon tea.
• A syrup drink may be “dark” coloured. However, the hose spouts from
cold drinks are also to be positioned in the ‘zone for ‘light’ colour
drinks.
Illustration The below illustrations show the available hose spouts locations for the
individual machine types:
ES/IN machines and

FB machines with FB machines with FB machines with
Sigma brewer/s one Delta Brewer two Delta brewers
A B C
A B C D
A
B B
A B A C C D
A B
A B B C A D
A B C
A: Optional for instant products A: Freshbrew product A/B: Freshbrew products

B: Hot or cold water / Tea or B: Optional for instant products C: Optional for instant products
Syrup drinks with or without CO2 C Hot or cold water / Tea or D Hot or cold water / Tea or
Syrup drinks with or without CO2 Syrup drinks with or without CO2
Rearrangement In case the configuration of instant ingredient canisters or of drinks is

changed, the positioning of the various hose spouts in the distributor head
may be needed.
If a machine has been upgraded to software 6.9 from older software, and a
different recipe is chosen, the cup slide position may need to be changed
from ‘big hole’ into ‘small hole’, see chapter 4, Technician, Adjust system.
August, 2007 5C - 11
C.2.9 Disassembling the drive assembly for branch pipe
Preparation Before disassembling the drive assembly for branch pipe:

• Open the door.
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the drive assembly for branch pipe:
1 Remove the distributor head (1)
from its holder (2).
2 Pull off electrical connector plug from the drive assembly at rear of
assembly.
3 Note position of the mounting
screws of the drive assembly in the 4 5
adjusting slots, and mark the
position with a pen or equal (3).
3
4 Unscrew the two mounting screws
(4) and remove the drive assembly
from the shelf for branch pipe (5) 6
under mixing units by lowering the
drive assembly (6) and pulling it
forwards out.
5 Remove holder for distributor head
(2) by pulling it forwards.
Assembly Assembly is done in reverse order considering the markings for correct
positioning of the drive assembly.
5C - 12 August, 2007
C.2.10 Removing the drive assembly from its housing
Preparation Before removing the drive assembly for branch pipe from its housing:
• Open the door.
• Remove the drive assembly for branch pipe, see this section, page 5C-
12.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the drive assembly from its housing:
1 Turn the housing with drive
assembly (1) upside down and
remove the three screws (2) 2
holding the drive assembly.
2 Turn the housing with drive assembly upside again.

3 Cut possible cable ties from harness in housing to release harness.
4 Take hold of the drive assembly 3
(3), pull it slightly backwards until
the the drive shaft is free and lift
the drive assembly out of the
housing.
August, 2007 5C - 13
C.2.11 Replacing switches of drive assembly for branch

pipe
Preparation Before removing/replacing the switches of the drive assembly for pipe as-
sembly:
• Open the door.
12.
• Remove the drive assembly from its housing, see this section, page 5C-
13
Removal Follow these steps to replace the switches in either side of sliding shaft:
1 Loosen two screws (1) 3
2 Remove switch, threaded piece
and shim (2).
3 Pull off electrical connectors (3)
from switch.
4 Replace switch by new one, if necessary.

5 If needed, remove switch in other side, repeating steps 1 through 4.
Installation Replacement is done in reverse order, see sketch below for correct loca-
tions of wires.
5C - 14 August, 2007
Sketch of location Right switch (switch at motor): green side up

Pin locations from left to right:
(1st: P13-6, 2nd: P13-3, 3rd: blank)
Left switch: black side up
Pin locations from left to right:
(1st: blank, 2nd: P13-5, 3rd: P13-6 (double wire))
See sketch of switch and pin locations below:
MOTOR
Left Right
NO
NO
NC
NC
C
C
P13-6
P13-3
P13-5
P13-6
C.2.12 Replacing the motor of drive assembly
Preparation Before removing the motor of the drive assembly for pipe assembly:
• Open the door.
12.
13.
August, 2007 5C - 15
Removal Follow these steps to remove and replace the motor:

1 Pull off electrical connectors 1
from motor (1).
1 Pull off driven pulley (2) with 4
toothed belt.
2 Loosen three screws (3) and
remove motor (4)
3 Replace motor by new one, if necessary.
C.2.13 Removing the toothed belt for drive assembly
Preparation Before removing the toothed belt:

• Open the door.
12.
13.
• Remove switches of drive asembly, see this section, page 5C-14.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the toothed belt:

1 Pull off toothed belt and driven
pulley (1).
2 Remove two screws (2), one at
both ends of sliding shaft (3).
1
2 3
5C - 16 August, 2007

3 Lift drive shaft holder (4) and
sliding shaft (3) upwards, and slide 4
the drive shaft holder to one side,
off the sliding shaft. 3
4 Lift drive shaft holder (4) upwards
and loosen two screws (5) from
holder for toothed belt.
5 Lift off toothed belt (6).
6
5
C.2.14 Removing and adjusting the drive shaft
Preparation Before removing the drive shaft:

• Open the door.
12.
13.
• Remove switches of drive asembly, see this section, page 5C-14.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the drive shaft:

1 Pull off toothed belt and driven
pulley (1).
2 Remove two screws (2) at both
ends of sliding shaft (3).
1
2 3
August, 2007 5C - 17

3 Lift drive shaft holder (4) and
sliding shaft (3) upwards and slide
the drive shaft holder to one side, 9
3
off the sliding shaft. 4
4 Remove the retaining ring (5) from
drive shaft (6).
5 Take out three snap rivets (7) and
remove guide for drive shaft (8).
6 Remove drive shaft holder (4) from
the bracket for drive assembly (9).
5 7
6
8
7
7 Untighten locking nut (10) by
holding counter on drive shaft (6) 6
using for example an adjustable
spanner.
8 Remove drive shaft (6).
10
Installation and Installation is done in reverse order considering the correct position of the
adjustment shaft as follows:
Step Action
1 Relocate drive shaft in reverse order.
2 Fasten nut of drive shaft.
3 Check that the shaft is parallel to the bottom of the housing for drive
assembly or alternatively positioned 90° in relation to side of housing.
4 Check that the switches are activated in stand-by position as well as in
operating position.
5C - 18 August, 2007
C.2.15 Removing the suspension assembly for ingredient

canisters
Preparation Before removing the suspension assembly for the instant ingredient canis-
ters:
• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient canisters, see Operator Manual.
Remember to close the outlet spouts of instant ingredient canisters before

removing canisters.
Suspension The suspension assembly consists of:

assembly Description Illustration
Mounting rail (1)
Suspension rails (2)
Guides for canisters (3)
1
2
3
Removal of Follow these steps to remove the suspension assembly for the instant in-
suspension gredient canisters:
assembly for Step Action Illustration
ingredient 1 Remove the three screws (1)
canisters retaining the suspension
assembly (2).
2
1
2 Pull suspension assembly (2)

downwards and out of the
slots in the rear side of the
bracket for suspension
assembly (3).
3 2
August, 2007 5C - 19
C.2.16 Removing the suspension rails and guides for

ingredient canisters
Preparation Before removing the suspension rails and guides for instant ingredient can-
isters:
• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient canisters, see Operator Manual.
• Remove the suspension assembly for ingredient canisters, see this
section, page 5C-19
Removal Follow these steps to remove the suspension rails and guides:
1 Loosen two screws (1) and
remove suspension rail.
2 Flex the front locking tab on

top of the mounting rail (2) and
push the guide downwards.
3 Pull guide free of mounting 2
rail.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all suspension rails and guides are removed
from mounting rail.
5C - 20 August, 2007
Prerequisites to Before starting the re-arrangements not only the order and position of the
rearrangement canisters must be considered, but also the size of the canisters.
Standard canisters require a span of five slots, large canisters seven slots,
see illustration.
Illustration Illustration of example of configurations
80 mm 120 mm
Rearrangement Follow these steps to rearrange the suspension for the ingredient canisters:
Step Action
1 Slot the suspension rails for the ingredient canisters in mounting rail in
relevant slots.
2 Slot the location guides for the ingredient canisters in mounting rail in
relevant slots.
3 Check if canisters are properly located in relation to ingredient motors and
mixing units.
August, 2007 5C - 21
C.2.17 Removing the spring in lid for ingredient canister
Preparation Before removing the spring in lid for instant ingredient canisters:
• Open the door.
• Remove the instant ingredient canister, see Operator Manual.
Remember to close the outlet spouts of instant ingredient canisters before

removing canisters.
Removal of spring Follow these steps to remove the spring in lid:

in lid Step Action Illustration
1 Take hold at top of canister with
one hand, and push sides
together while pulling lid off with
the other, see illustration.
2 Turn lid upside down and ensure that the spring loaded side turns against
you.
3 Press the opposite side of lid off
the hinge tab and disassemble
lid.
4 Take out spring.
Assembly of lid Put one hinge tab in its holder on the other part of the lid, and let the other
hinge tab click in place as well.
5C - 22 August, 2007
C.3 Functional descriptions
C.3.1 Total overview - IN mixing units
Illustration This illustration shows the location of the parts for mixing units:
E
B
Legend for figure

A Mixing unit module D Blank between mixing unit modules
B Extraction tubes E Outlet spout
C Suspension element
August, 2007 5C - 23
C.3.2 Total overview - Branch pipe
Illustration This illustration shows the location of the branch pipe components:
B
F
IN/ES/FB SIGMA FB/FF DELTA
A
D
Legend for figure:

A Distributor head D Holder for distributor head
B Drive assembly E Spout for coffee hose
C Drive shaft F Spout for instant drink hoses
5C - 24 August, 2007
C.4 Electrical diagrams
Not available here.
C.5 Technical specifications
Not available here.
C.6 Options
Not available here.
C.7 Accessories
Not available here.
August, 2007 5C - 25
5C - 26 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Product delivery
D Product delivery
D.1 Adjustments
General adjust-
ments Toothed belts for cup See this chapter, page 5D-21.
elevator.
Cup stack conveyors The cup stack conveyors can be adjusted according
to the shape of the cups.
See this chapter, page 5D-9.
Cup storage mode The start position of the stacks can be set for either
left side (Default), right side (Side) or both sides, one
stack at a time (Stack).
See chap 4, Adjust system.
August, 2007 5D - 1
D.2. Overview of parts
Illustration
A J
K
B
L
N
C
E O
Q
F
R
S
G
H T
5D - 2 August, 2007
Legend A Cup pile guide with sensors L Cup drop ring

B Cup drop ring motor M Cup slide mechanism (behind)
C Drip guide N Cup slide
D Cover for cup station O Opto-sensors
E Cup/pot platform P Safety switch
F Sliding rail, right Q Sliding rail, left
G Motor for cup elevator R Left cover
H Right cover S Cup elevator
I Magazine empty switches (behind) T Shield
J Cup conveyor motor (behind) U Drip tray
K Cup brake
August, 2007 5D - 3
D.3. (Dis-)assemblies
D.3.1 Replacing the cup drop ring
Preparation Before replacing the cup drop ring:

• Open door of cup magazine.
• Remove cup stack above cup drop ring, see Operator manual.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the cup drop ring:

1 Loosen two screws to remove the
1
cover plate in front of the cup drop
ring motor (1).
2 Unscrew two screws to remove the
holder for cup brake (2).
1 2
3
3 Remove cup drop ring:

• Push the cup drop ring to the right
to release the suspension screws
from the key holes (3).
• Remove the tap (4) of the cup
drop ring from the tension rod.
4 Replace cup drop ring.
The cup ring is available in two sizes:

• 7C
• 7H
See also Choice of cup ring on page 5D-37.
5D - 4 August, 2007
D.3.2 Replacing the cup drop ring motor
Preparation Before replacing the cup drop ring motor:

• Remove cup drop ring, see this chapter, page 5D-4.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the cup drop ring motor:
1 Loosen two screws to remove the
bracket for cup drop ring motor (1).
2 Remove electrical connectors from the
cup drop ring motor (2).
3 Unscrew the grub screw (3) from crank.

4
4 Remove motor loosening three screws
(4). 3
5 Replace motor.
August, 2007 5D - 5
D.3.3 Replacing the switch for cup drop ring motor
Preparation Before replacing the switch for cup drop ring motor:
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the switch for cup drop ring motor:
1 Remove the bracket for cup drop ring
motor loosening two screws (1).
2 Disconnect electrical connectors from

the switch (2). 2
3 Unscrew two screws (3), and remove 4
switch (4) and shim (5).
4 Replace switch.
Remember to relocate insulation between switch and bracket when re-in-

stalling switch.
5D - 6 August, 2007
D.3.4 Removing the cup dispenser
Preparation Before removing the cup dispenser:

• Remove coin mechanism, see chap. 5.G.2.3, page 5G-5.
• Remove coin chutes, see chap. 5.G.2.4, page 5G-6.
• Remove right cover for payment panel, see chap. 5.G.2.5, page 5G-6.
• Remove coin return motor, see chap. 5.G.2.6, page 5G-7.
• Remove the coin insert chute, see chap. 5.G.2.7, page 5G-8.
• Remove hinge rail for payment panel cover, see chap. 5.G.2.8,
page 5G-9.
• Remove mounting plate for coin mechanism, see chap. 5.G.2.9,
page 5G-11.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the cup dispenser:

1 Disconnect the electrical connectors of the electric components on the
cup dispenser from the SPC. Release wires from cable ties.
2 Open door of cup magazine.
Remove nut (1), and lift off
door.
1
3 Remove all cups from the
cup magazine. Push right
cup conveyor towards the
middle of the cup room.
4 Remove two screws (2), and

remove the cover for cup
conveyor motor.
August, 2007 5D - 7

remove cover plate for cup 3
drop motor.
6 Unscrew six screws (4) to

remove lower cover plate for
cup dispenser.
7 Loosen and remove the two

nuts from the spacer studs
at the right-hand side of the
cup magazine (5).
8 Unscrew the two screws in
the left-hand side of the cup
5
dispenser (6). 6
9 Slide cup dispenser slightly
to the left and remove it from
door of machine.
5D - 8 August, 2007
D.3.5 Adjusting the cup stack conveyors
Introduction To ensure a problem-free motion of the cup conveyors, the cup stacks must
be completely vertical when placed correctly in the cup room.
An oblique cup stack hanging between a cup conveyor and the cup support
may prevent the cup conveyor in question from moving causing a time-out
and thus no cup delivery.
The problem arises if the cup shape is either too close to cylindric or too
conic compared to the angles of the cup conveyors. The problem is solved
by adjusting the angles of the cup conveyors.
Illustration Correct and incorrect angles of cup stacks.
Preparation Before adjusting the cup conveyors:

• Remove all cups from cup room.
Adjustment This table shows how to adjust the cup conveyors:

If cup stacks are... then... Illustration
too cylindric-shaped press the cup conveyor
compared to the angle of angle towards the
the cup conveyor, conveyor bar.
too conic-shaped pull the cup conveyor

compared to the angle of angle in the direction of
the cup conveyor, the cup support.
When a cup stack is conveyed vertically in one action on stack shift, the
angle of the cup conveyor is correctly bent.
August, 2007 5D - 9
D.3.6 Replacing the cup conveyor motor
Preparation Before replacing the cup conveyor motor:

• Remove all cups from cup magazine.
• Remove the cup dispenser, see this chapter, page 5D-7.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the cup conveyor motor:

1 Disconnect electrical connectors from
the motor (1).
2 Pull the driven pulley (2) off the motor
shaft (3).
3
3 Loosen three screws to (4) to remove
1
the motor (5).
5 2
4 Replace motor.
D.3.7 Replacing the cup pile guide with sensor
Preparation Before replacing the cup pile guide with sensor:

Replacement Follow these steps to replace the cup pile guide with sensor:
1 Unscrew two screws (1) to
remove the bracket for cup drop
ring motor and switch.
5D - 10 August, 2007

2 Unscrew four screws to remove
the base plate for cup dispenser
(2).
3 Loosen two screws to remove
cup pile guide with sensor (3).
connectors (4) from cup drop
ring motor and switch.
5 Replace cup pile guide with sensor.
August, 2007 5D - 11
D.3.8 Replacing the magazine empty switches of cup

magazine
Preparation Before replacing the magazine empty switches:

• Remove coin mechanism, see chap. 5.G.2.3, page 5G-5.
• Remove coin chutes, see chap. 5.G.2.4, page 5G-6.
• Remove right cover for payment panel, see chap. 5.G.2.5, page 5G-6.
• Remove coin return motor, see chap. 5.G.2.6, page 5G-7.
• Remove the coin insert chute, see chap. 5.G.2.7, page 5G-8.
• Remove hinge rail for payment panel cover, see chap. 5.G.2.8,
page 5G-9.
• Remove mounting plate for coin mechanism, see chap. 5.G.2.9,
page 5G-11.
• Follow steps 2 to 7 (both inclusive) of the instruction Removing the cup
dispenser, see this chapter, page 5D-7.
Removal Follow these steps to replace the magazine empty switches:

1 Loosen two screws to remove
bracket for switches (1).
1
from switches (2).
3 6
3 Unscrew two screws (3) and a
threaded piece (4) to remove a
switch (5) from bracket (6).
4 2
5D - 12 August, 2007
D.3.9 Removing the cover at the cup slide mechanism
Preparation Before removing the cover at the cup slide mechanism:

• Remove the drip guide, see Operator manual.
• Remove the cup slide, see Operator manual.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the cover at the cup slide mechanism:
1 Loosen left screw (1).
2 Unscrew the right screw (2) Slide 2
the cover to the right and lift it off. 1
D.3.10 Replacing the position switches for cup catcher /

cup slide mechanism
Preparation Before replacing one ore more of the three position switches:
• Remove the cover at the cup slide mechanism, see this chapter,
page 5D-13.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace one or more of the position switches:
(1) from the switch (2) in question. 1
2 Unscrew two screws (3) to remove
switch.
3
2
August, 2007 5D - 13
D.3.11 Removing the bracket for cup catcher / cup slide

mechanism
Preparation Before removing the bracket for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism:
page 5D-13.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the bracket:

1 Disconnect the electrical connector from the SPC circuit board.
2 Remove three screws (1). 3
3 Tilt bracket (2) out of its holders
(3) and lift it off. 2
5D - 14 August, 2007
D.3.12 Removing the motor for cup catcher / cup slide

mechanism
Preparation Before removing the motor for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism:
• Remove the drip guide, see Operator manual
• Remove the cup slide, see Operator manual
page 5D-13.
• Remove the bracket for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism, see this
chapter, page 5D-14.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the motor:

1 Disconnect electrical connectors.
2 Take hold of bracket for motor and
switches (1) with one hand, take
hold of holder for cup slide (2) with 1
the other and slide holder for cup
slide to the opposite side as that of
the motor (3).
2
3 Pull off driven pulley (4) from motor

shaft. 4
5
4 Remove the motor (3) from bracket
1
for motor and switches (1)
loosening three screws (5).
Installation Installation is done in reverse order considering that the electrical plug
connection turning to the side with the motor label must be connected to
wire P16-2 and the electrical plug connection on the opposite side connect-
ed to wire P16-1.
August, 2007 5D - 15
D.3.13 Removing the driven pulley from motor for cup

catcher / cup slide mechanism
Preparation Before removing the driven pulley from motor for cup catcher / cup slide
mechanism:
page 5D-13.
Removal Pull off driven pulley (1) from motor shaft. See illustration below.
5D - 16 August, 2007
D.3.14 Removing the toothed belt for cup catcher / cup

slide mechanism
Preparation Before removing the toothed belt for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism:
page 5D-13.
• Remove the driven pulley for cup catcher, see this chapter, page 5D-
16.

1 Remove one screw retaining the belt
holder (1).
2 Remove belt holder.
3 Remove toothed belt from free running
pulley.
1
D.3.15 Removing the free running pulley from toothed

belt for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism
Preparation Before removing the free running pulley from toothed belt for cup catcher
/ cup slide mechanism:
page 5D-13.
• Remove the toothed belt, see this chapter, page 5D-17.
August, 2007 5D - 17
Removal Follow these steps to remove the free running pulley:

1 Remove the retaining ring (1).
2 Pull the free running pulley off its
shaft (2).
D.3.16 Removing the cover for cup station
Preparation Before removing the cover for cup station:

• Remove the cup slide, see Operator manual
• Remove the cup catcher, see Operator manual.
page 5D-13.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the cover for cup station:
1 Loosen and remove remaining five
screws in cover (1). 1
2 Lift off cover for cup station (2).
5D - 18 August, 2007
D.3.17 Replacing the opto-sensor glasses for upper cup

sensors
Preparation Before replacing the opto sensor glasses for upper cup sensors:
page 5D-13.
• Remove the cover for cup station, see this chapter, page 5D-18.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the opto-sensor glasses:

1 Turn cover for cup station upside
down. (The opto-diode and the 1
opto-transmitter are positioned on
either side of the cup ring (1).)
2 Unscrew two screws of the holder 2

for opto-diode and of the holder for
opto-transmitter, respectively (2).
3 Remove opto-diode and opto-
transmitter from their holders (3).
4 Replace the glasses (4) for opto-
diode and opto-transmitter,
respectively.
3 4
3 4
August, 2007 5D - 19
D.3.18 Replacing the safety switch for cup catcher / cup

slide mechanism
Preparation Before replacing the safety switch for cup catcher / cup slide mechanism:
page 5D-13.
• Remove the cover for cup station, see this chapter, page 5D-18.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the safety switch:

retaining plate for switch (2).
from switch.
3 Lift off switch (3) from retaining
pins (4).
3
4
2 1
Illustration The pins of the switch are connected electrically as illustrated below:
5D - 20 August, 2007
D.3.19 Removing the left / right cover for cup elevator
Preparation Before removing the left and right covering for cup elevator:
Removal Follow these steps to remove the left and right covering for cup elevator:
1 Loosen two screws in front and
one screw at the side of left /
right cover for cup elevator,
respectively.
2 Slide down and remove left /
right cover, respectively.
D.3.20 Adjusting the toothed belts for cup elevator
Preparation Before removing the toothed belts for cup elevator:

• Remove the left/right cover for cup elevator, see this chapter, page 5D-
21.
Adjustment Follow these steps to adjust the toothed belts for cup elevator:
1 Loosen the four locking screws
of adjustable fixation plates in
both sides of the cup elevator
(1).
August, 2007 5D - 21

2 Level the tension of the toothed 3
belts using the adjusting screws
in each side of sliding rails as
follows:
1. Loosen the two adjusting

screws (2) and ensure that the
shaft of the cup elevator motor 1
(3) is in a horizontal position.
2. Retighten the adjusting

screws equally till the correct
tension of the toothed belts is
reached, i.e., the shaft must be
straight (not bending), and the
toothed belts must neither be
too loose nor too tight.
2
See also “Adjustment check”
below.
3 Re-tighten locking screws of adjustable fixation plates (1).
Adjustment check Use the following method to check if the tension of the toothed belt is
correct:
Push in one side of the toothed belt towards the other. When pushing, the
shaft must bend slightly. If the shaft does not bend at all, tighten the
adjusting screws a bit more.
Note: The shaft may only bend when pressing in the belt.
Illustration When you press in the toothed belt, the shaft must bend slightly.
0 - ½ mm
5D - 22 August, 2007
D.3.21 Removing the shield around the cup station
Preparation: Before removing the shield around the cup station:

• Remove the left / right cover for cup elevator, see this chapter,
page 5D-21.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the shield around the cup station:
Step Action
1 Remove four screws (1).
2 Remove shield (2) around cup
station.
2 1
Remember to fasten yellow/green earth wire to upper left screw when in-
stalling the shield.
August, 2007 5D - 23
D.3.22 Replacing the glasses of the cup sensors
Preparation Before removing the glasses of the cup sensors:

page 5D-21.
• Remove the shield around the cup station, see this chapter, page 5D-
23.
Replacement Replace glass for opto-diode and glass for opto-transmitter, respectively.
Illustration The illustration shows the positions of the cup sensors.
5D - 24 August, 2007
D.3.23 Replacing the position switches for cup elevator
Preparation Before replacing one or more of the three position switches:

page 5D-21.
23.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace one or more of the position switches:
1 Remove switch in question
loosening two screws and 1
threaded plate (1).

from switch in question.
August, 2007 5D - 25
D.3.24 Removing the right side sliding rail
Preparation Before removing the right side sliding rail:

page 5D-21.
23.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the right side sliding rail:
1 Loosen and remove adjusting
screw (1).
2 Remove two screws from side of
sliding rail (2).
2
3 Remove screw from cup station

cover (3).
4 Loosen and remove three screws
(4). 3
5D - 26 August, 2007
D.3.25 Removing the upper pulley for right side toothed

belt for cup elevator
Preparation Before removing the upper pulley for right side toothed belt:
page 5D-21.
23.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the upper pulley:
Step Action
1 Remove two retaining rings: 2
• from end of slide bearing (1). 1
• from slide bearing at inner
side of pulley (2).
3
2 Pull slide bearing to either side of
sliding rail (3) and remove pulley.
August, 2007 5D - 27
D.3.26 Removing the right side toothed belt for cup

elevator
Preparation Before removing the right side toothed belt for cup elevator:
page 5D-21.
23.

Step Action
1 Loosen two screws (1) from belt holder (2).
2 Remove toothed belt (3). 2
1
3
5D - 28 August, 2007
D.3.27 Removing the motor for cup elevator
Preparation Before removing the motor for cup elevator:

page 5D-21.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the motor for cup elevator:
Step Action
(1) from motor lugs (2). 1
2 Remove retaining ring from shaft
2
for cup elevator (3).
3 Pull motor off the shaft (4).
Installation Installation is done in reverse order considering that the electrical lug on
the motor turning away from the cup station must be connected to wire
P25-1, and the electrical lug on the motor turning against the cup station
must be connected to wire P25-2.
August, 2007 5D - 29
D.3.28 Removing the lower pulleys for left/right toothed

belts of cup elevator
Preparation Before removing the lower pulleys for toothed belts:

page 5D-21.
• Remove motor for cup elevator, see this chapter, page 5D-29.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the lower pulleys:

1 Unscrew adjusting screws (1) in
both sides.
2 Unscrew two screws of motor

bracket (2).
3 Lift off motor bracket and pull
the complete motor bracket to
the left (3).
2
4 Tap pin (4) out of motor

coupling (5). 5
5D - 30 August, 2007

5 Take motor coupling (5) and
shaft for cup elevator apart (6).
6 Withdraw right pulley from shaft
(7). 7
7 Loosen lock nut (8) of shaft for 10

cup elevator. 6
8 Remove bearing bushing (9) 9
from shaft.
8
9 Remove left pulley (10).
D.3.29 Removing the left side sliding rail
Preparation Before removing the left side sliding rail:

• Remove the cup slide if in closed position, see chap. 4, page 98.
page 5D-21.
• Remove the motor for cup elevator, see this chapter, page 5D-29.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the sliding rail:

1 Disconnect electrical connectors from position switches.
2 Loosen and remove adjusting

screw (1).
3 Remove two screws from fixation
plate (2).
2
August, 2007 5D - 31

power resistor (4) from side of
sliding rail.
4
5 Remove screw from cup station

cover (5). 5
6 Remove three screws from sliding
rail (6).
7 Lift off toothed belt from pulleys
(7).
7
8 Lift off sliding rail (8).
8
6
Remember to fasten earth strap to lower left screw of motor bracket when
installing the fixation plate.
5D - 32 August, 2007
D.3.30 Removing the upper pulley for left side toothed

belt for cup elevator
Preparation Before removing the upper pulley for left side toothed belt:
page 5D-21.
• Remove the left side sliding rail., see this chapter, page 5D-31.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the upper pulley:

1 Remove two retaining rings:
• from end of slide bearing (1). 2
• from slide bearing at inner side 1
of pulley (2).
2 Pull sliding bearing to either side of
sliding rail.
August, 2007 5D - 33
D.3.31 Removing the left side toothed belt for cup

elevator
Preparation Before removing the left side toothed belt:

page 5D-21.
• Remove the left side sliding rail, see this chapter, page 5D-31.

Step Action
1 Loosen two screws (1) from belt
holder (2).
2 Lift off toothed belt (3). 2 1
5D - 34 August, 2007
D.4. Functional descriptions
D.4.1 Total overview
Illustration
A J
K
B
L
N
C
E O
Q
F
R
S
G
H T
August, 2007 5D - 35
Legend A Cup pile guide with sensors L Cup drop ring

B Cup drop ring motor M Cup slide mechanism (behind)
C Drip guide N Cup slide
D Cover for cup station O Opto-sensors
E Cup/pot platform P Safety switch
F Sliding rail, right Q Sliding rail, left
G Motor for cup elevator R Left cover
H Right cover S Cup elevator
I Magazine empty switches (behind) T Shield
J Cup conveyor motor (behind) U Drip tray
K Cup brake
5D - 36 August, 2007
D.5. Electrical diagrams
Not available here
D.6. Technical specifications
Not available here
D.7. Options
D.7.1 Choice of cup ring
Cup drop ring If a new cup type is used it may be necessary to replace the cup ring, ob-
serving the below considerations:
Action
,
The choice of cup ring depends on
the diameter of the cup used,
considering diameters D1 and D2
,
The cup ring is available in two sizes:

• 7C MAX ø74 MAX ø73
• 7H
7H 7C
MAX ø68 MAX ø66
August, 2007 5D - 37
D.8. Accessories
Not available here.
5D - 38 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Cooling system
F Cooling system
If a 7600 machine is fitted with a chiller it is an accessory.

For details accordingly, please contact the local service.
August, 2007 5F - 1
Service Manual 7600 series Cooling system
5F - 2 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Housing / Cabinet
G Housing / Cabinet
G.1 Adjustments
Not available here.
August, 2007 5G - 1
G.2 Overview of parts
Cabinet
Legend A Fan
B Fan housing with inlet tubes
C Boiler cover
Door
5G - 2 August, 2007
A
G
B
H
C
B
C
N
A Upper poster frame H Coin return motor

Legend B Cover for fluorescent tube I Coin insert chute
C Fluorescent tube J Mounting plate for coin mechanism
D Lower poster frame K Coin mechanism
E Front cover for selection panel L Selection panel
F Right cover for selection panel M Coin chutes
G Hinge rail for selection panel cover N Cover for choke coils and starters
August, 2007 5G - 3
G.3 (Dis-)assemblies
G.3.1 Removing the fan
Preparation Before removing the fan:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the fan:

1 Remove cover at boiler.
2 Turn the turnbuckle at the bottom

cover for fan housing to the side.
3 Remove the bottom cover for fan
housing.
4 Pull out the fan from below.
5 Disconnect the electrical connector to the fan.
5G - 4 August, 2007
G.3.2 Removing the coin mechanism
Preparation Before removing the coin mechanism:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coin mechanism:

Step Action
1 Open the front cover for
selection panel.
2 Disconnect electrical connectors to coin mechanism.

3 Detach the coin mecha-
nism from the three
retaining screws.
August, 2007 5G - 5
G.3.3 Removing the coin chutes
Preparation Before removing the coin chutes:

• Open the door.
• Remove the coin mechanism, see this section, page 5G-5.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coin chutes:

Step Action
1 Remove two screws (1
and 2).
2 Remove coin chutes by
pulling forwards and
towards the right.
5G - 6 August, 2007
G.3.4 Removing the right cover for selection panel
Preparation Before removing the right cover for selection panel:

• Open the door.
• Remove coin mechanism, see this section, page 5G-5.
• Remove coin chutes, see this section, page 5G-6.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the right cover for selection panel:
1 Unscrew two screws
and rotate cover slightly
to remove it.
August, 2007 5G - 7
G.3.5 Removing the coin return motor
Preparation Before removing the coin return motor:

• Open the door.
• Remove the coin chutes, see this section, page 5G-6.
• Remove right cover for selection panel, see this section, page 5G-7.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coin return motor:

1 Disconnect electrical connectors from coin return motor.
2 Remove two screws (1)
from motor bracket.
3 Remove bracket with
motor (2).
5G - 8 August, 2007
G.3.6 Removing the coin insert chute
Preparation Before removing the coin insert chute:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coin insert chute:

1 Remove two screws (1).
2 Remove coin insert 1
chute (2).
2
August, 2007 5G - 9
G.3.7 Removing the hinge rail for selection panel cover

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the hinge rail:

1 Lift off front cover for
selection panel.
2 Remove two screws.

3 Pull out hinge rail.
5G - 10 August, 2007
G.3.8 Removing the mounting plate for coin mechanism

• Open the door.
• Remove coin chutes, see this section, page 5G-6.
• Remove right cover for selection panel, see this section, page 5G-7.
• Remove coin return motor, see this section, page 5G-8.
• Remove coin insert chute see this section, page 5G-9.
• Remove hinge rail for selection panel cover, see this section, page 5G-
10.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the mounting plate:

1 Unscrew four screws
(1).
2 Remove mounting
plate.
If the coin mechanism is changed into a Mars Cashflow 7000, the three re-
taining screws on the mounting plate for coin mechanism must be replaced
by three M4x12 screws and added three spacing discs ø10.0/ø4.5/4.5 mm
to ensure correct distance between the coin mechanism and the coin insert
chute.
August, 2007 5G - 11
G.3.9 Replacing the selection signs (Direct selection)
Preparation Before replacing the selection signs:

• Open the door.
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the selection signs:

Step Action
1 Loosen the four wing
nuts (1) at the back of
the selection panel. 1
2 From rear side of door,
press the selection 2
panel (2) out of the
mounting frame.
3 Change the labels/price

tickets:
• Slide aside old label /
price ticket and
replace with new
one/s.
5G - 12 August, 2007
G.3.10 Removing the selection panel (Direct selection)
Preparation Before removing the selection panel:

• Open the door.
Caution:
To avoid damage:
• Alternatively, touch a metal area of the earthed cabinet to discharge
Removal Follow these steps to remove the selection panel:

1 Loosen the four wing
nuts (1) at the back of
the selection panel.
2 From rear side of door,
press the selection 2 1
panel (2) out of the
mounting frame (3).
August, 2007 5G - 13

3 From the front side of
the door disconnect all
board connectors.
Installation Follow these steps to install the selection panel:

1 From front of door
reconnect the board P4
connectors as follows: P5 P22

P4: Power
P5: Wittlink
P22: Display
P24: Power for payment
system MDB/BDV P23 P24 P25
P25: Coin return
P26: Cup transport
P27: Cup magazine
P28: Cup drop
P26 P27 P28
P31: Door light relay
P32: Cup elevator
P33: Cup sensor
P34: Expansion board
P29 P30
Note: Ensure that
connectors for P5 and
P24 are not switched by
mistake as this may cause
fatal damage to all pcbs in
machine.
P31
P32
P34 P33
5G - 14 August, 2007

2 Push selection panel with
SPC circuit board back
into its mounting frame.
3 From rear side of door
fasten selection panel with
four wing nuts.
4 Reinstall all remaining parts in door.
G.3.11 Replacing a selection button (Direct selection)
Preparation Before replacing a selection button:

• Open the door.
• Remove the selection panel, see this section, page 5G-13.
Removal Follow these steps to remove a selection button:

1 Place the selection 1
panel (1) on a flat 1
surface with the
selection buttons
facing downwards.
August, 2007 5G - 15

2 Release the base 3 3
module (2) by pressing
the spacing legs (3)
out of the mounting
frame (4).
3 Lift the selection panel
(1) slightly with one
hand and with the
other lift out the base
module (2) without
turning it.
4 Remove the white

plastic spring (5) from
the push button in
question.
5 Push the push button
(6) out of the base
frame.
5
5G - 16 August, 2007
G.3.12 Removing the upper advertising poster frame
Preparation Before removing the upper advertising poster frame

• Open the door.
Removal The procedure for removing the upper advertising poster is as follows:
Step Action
1 Remove two screws at lock side of
door (1).
2 Remove stop pin (2) at top of the

2
hinge side of door
3 Press at point indicated on
illustration (3) and remove
advertising poster frame by pulling
carefully leftward out of the wing.
3
PR
ES
S
August, 2007 5G - 17
G.3.13 Replacing the upper advertising poster
Preparation Before replacing the upper advertising poster:

• Open the door.
• Remove the upper advertising poster frame, see this section, page 5G-
17.
Replacement The procedure for replacing the upper advertising poster is as follows:
1 Remove upper row of plugs (1)
retaining the opaque diffuser 2
plate.
2 Pull outwards opaque diffuser 1
plate and poster (2).
3 Replace old poster by new one.
Installation Installation is done in reverse order, considering that the poster and the
diffuser are placed carefully in the frame, in order that no light is
penetrating the edges when poster frame is repositioned.
5G - 18 August, 2007
G.3.14 Replacing the upper fluorescent tube
Preparation Before replacing the upper fluorescent tube:

• Open the door.
• Remove the upper advertising poster frame, see this section, page 5G-
17.
Replacement The procedure for replacing the upper fluorescent tube is as follows:

1 Remove cover for fluorescent tube
(1).
2 Replace old fluorescent tube (2) by
new one.
2
August, 2007 5G - 19
G.3.15 Removing the lower advertising poster frame
Preparation Before removing the lower advertising poster frame:

• Open the door.
Removal The procedure for removing the lower advertising poster is as follows:
1 Remove two screws at lock side
of door (1).
2 Remove stop pin (2) at bottom of

the hinge side of door.
3
3 Press at point indicated on PR
ES
illustration (3) and remove S
advertising poster frame by

pulling carefully leftward out of
the wing.
5G - 20 August, 2007
G.3.16 Replacing the lower advertising poster
Preparation Before replacing the lower advertising poster:

• Open the door.
• Remove the lower advertising poster frame, see this section, page 5G-
20.
Replacement The procedure for replacing the lower advertising poster is as follows:
Step Action
1 Remove lower row of plugs (1)
retaining the opaque diffuser plate.
2 Pull outwards opaque diffuser plate
and poster (2).
3 Replace old poster by new one.
Installation Installation is done in reverse order, considering that the poster and the
diffuser are placed carefully in the frame, in order that no light is
penetrating the edges when poster frame is repositioned.
August, 2007 5G - 21
G.3.17 Replacing the choke coils / starters of the

fluorescent tubes
Preparation Before replacing the choke coils / starters of the fluorescent tubes:
• Open the door.
• Switch off the main switch and disconnect the power supply.
Removal The procedure for removing the choke coils / starters is as follows:
Step Action
1 Remove cover for choke coils by
loosening one screw (1) at the
bottom of cover.
2
If you want to replace then go to step
the choke coils 3
the starters 4
3 Loosen two screws and remove

choke coil in question (2).
4 Pull out starter in question from its
socket (3).
5G - 22 August, 2007
G.3.18 Replacing the lower fluorescent tube
Preparation Before replacing the lower fluorescent tube:

• Open the door.
• Remove the lower advertising poster frame, see this section, page 5G-
20.
Replacement The procedure for replacing the lower fluorescent tube is as follows:
Step Action
1 Remove cover for fluorescent
tube (1).
2
2 Replace old fluorescent tube (2)
by new one.
August, 2007 5G - 23
G.4 Functional descriptions
G.4.1 Total overview
Cabinet
Legend A Fan
B Fan housing with inlet tubes
C Boiler cover
5G - 24 August, 2007
Door
E
A
G
B
H
C
B
C
N
Legend A Upper poster frame H Coin return motor

B Cover for fluorescent tube I Coin insert chute
C Fluorescent tube J Mounting plate for coin mechanism
D Lower poster frame K Coin mechanism
E Front cover for selection panel L Selection panel
F Right cover for selection panel M Coin chutes
G Hinge rail for selection panel cover N Cover for choke coils and starters
August, 2007 5G - 25
G.5 Electrical diagrams
Not available here.
G.6 Technical specifications
Not available here.
G.7 Options
Not available here.
G.8 Accessories
Photographic Purpose: Branding

panels
Replacement:
See this section, page 5G-18.
or
See this section, page 5G-21.
5G - 26 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Power supply unit and control
K Power supply unit and control
K.1 Adjustments
Not available here.
August, 2007 5K - 1
K.2 (Dis-)assemblies
K.2.1 Safety instructions
Installation and repair works on the machine may only be carried out by
trained service technicians.
Be extremely careful, your life can be endangered!

The vending machine controllers and power supply box parts are carrying
the mains voltage if the machine is connected to the power supply.
Make sure that no splashes of the product or water get onto the vending
machine controllers.
Caution:
To avoid damage:
5K - 2 August, 2007
K.2.2 Disassembling the power supply cord
Preparation Before disassembling the power supply cable:

• Disconnect the power supply to the machine.
Disassembly From rear side of machine follow these steps to disassemble the power
supply cable:
1 Remove cord unloader (1) loosening one
screw.
2 Release the snap pins (2) at both sides
at the bottom of cover and tilt up the
cover
3 Disconnect the cable connection at the
terminal strip. 2
4 Remove the power supply cord.
1
Make sure the reconnection is made correctly, see table below:
1 blue / neutral (3).

4
2 brown / line (4).
3 yellow / green (protective earth) (5). 5 3
August, 2007 5K - 3
K.2.3 Removing the cover plate for power supply box
Preparation Before removing the cover plate for power supply box:
• Open the door.
• Remove the freshbrew canister.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the cover plate for power supply box:
1 Loosen three screws (1).
2 Remove cover.
K.2.4 Removing the power supply box
Preparation Before removing the power supply box:

• Open the door.
• Remove cover plate for power supply box, see this section, page 5K-4.
5K - 4 August, 2007
Removal Follow these steps to remove the power supply box:

1 Pull off the electrical connector plugs of the electrical components in
power supply box
2 Remove the fixing screw (1) to
1
the right side in rear of power
supply box
3
3 Lift up 2 cm to detach supply
box (2) from mounting rail.
Note: The supply box is held in
place by the fixing screw (1) and
the hook (3).
Installation Installation is done in reverse order
Ensure that connectors are correctly fitted.
K.2.5 Removing the transformer
Preparation Before removing the transformer:

• Open the door.
• Remove the power supply box, see this section, page 5K-4.
August, 2007 5K - 5
Removal Follow these steps to remove the transformer:

1 Remove four screws (1).
2 Lift off transformer (2). 1
K.2.6 Removing the relay for heating element
Preparation Before removing the relay for heating element:

• Open the door.
• Remove the power supply box, see this section, page 5K-4.
Ensure that the machine is disconnected from the mains electrical supply!
The machine is only isolated from the mains supply when the plug has
been pulled out.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the relay for heating element
1 Pull off the electrical connector
2
plugs (1). 3
2 Loosen two screws (2). 1
3 Remove relay (3).
5K - 6 August, 2007
K.2.7 Removing the noise capacitor or fuses
Preparation Before removing the noise capacitor:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the noise capacitor:

1 Pull off electrical connectors (1)
1
from capacitor.
2 Loosen nut (2).
3 Detach noise capacitor (3) from its
bracket,
or
3
Unscrew fuse holders with fuses
(4).
2 4
Ensure that connectors are correctly fitted.
August, 2007 5K - 7
K.2.8 Removing the cover for electronic box
Preparation Before removing the cover for electronic box:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the cover for electronic box:
Step Action
1 Loosen two screws (1).
2
2 Remove cover plate (2).
K.2.9 Removing the up-key connection circuit board
Preparation Before removing the up-key connection circuit board:

• Open the door.
• Remove the cover for electronic box, see this section, page 5K-8.
Caution:
To avoid damage:
5K - 8 August, 2007
Removal Follow these steps to remove the up-key connection circuit board:
1 From the side remove the two
screws (1) of the mounting angle
for up-key connection.

plug (2) from the circuit board.
2
remove the circuit-board from
mounting angle.
Ensure that the up-key connection circuit board is correctly fitted.
August, 2007 5K - 9
K.2.10 Removing the RS 232 plug
Preparation Before removing the RS 232 plug:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the RS 232 plug:

1 Remove two screws (1).
2 Push the RS 232 plug backwards
through its mounting hole.
plug.
5K - 10 August, 2007
K.2.11 Removing the main switch
Preparation Before removing the main switch:

• Open the door.
Ensure that the machine is disconnected from the mains electrical supply!
The machine is only isolated from the mains supply when the plug has
been pulled out.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the main switch:

plugs (1) from the main switch.
2 From behind of main switch flex the
taps of the main switch (2) and 1
press the main switch forwards
through its mounting hole.
August, 2007 5K - 11
K.2.12 Disassembling the vending machine controller

(VMC)
Preparation Before disassembling the vending machine controller:

• Open the door.
Caution:
To avoid damage:
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the printed circuit board:

Step Action
1 Disconnect all board connectors.
2 Remove screw (1) at right upper 1
corner of printed circuit board.
3 Squeeze the five fastening clips (2)

with an appropriate tool
Tip: Use a piece of hard hose/tube 3
with internal diameter of 4 mm
(3).
4 Gently pull off the printed circuit board.
5K - 12 August, 2007
K.2.13 Disassembling the ICB / CPU
Preparation Before disassembling the printed circuit board:

• Open the door.
Caution:
To avoid damage:

Step Action
2 Remove screw (1) at left upper 1
corner of printed circuit board.
2
3 Squeeze the three fastening clips (2)
(3).
August, 2007 5K - 13
K.2.14 Disassembling the expansion board of the ICB /

CPU

• Open the door.
Caution:
To avoid damage:

Step Action
1 Disconnect board connection.
2 Remove screw of printed circuit
board (1).
3 Remove expansion printed circuit
board. 1
5K - 14 August, 2007
K.2.15 Disassembling the printed circuit board for

freshbrewer unit

• Open the door.
Caution:
To avoid damage:

Step Action
2 Remove screw (1) at left lower corner
of printed circuit board.

(3).
August, 2007 5K - 15
K.2.16 Disassembling the ES controller circuit board
Preparation Before disassembling the ES controller circuit board:

• Open the door.
Caution:
To avoid damage:
Disassembly Follow these steps to disassemble the ES controller circuit board:

Step Action
2 Remove screw (1) at left lower corner
of printed circuit board.

(3).
4 Gently pull off the ES controller circuit board.
5K - 16 August, 2007
K.2.17 Disassembling / replacing the circuit board for the

espresso boiler
Preparation Before disassembling / replacing the circuit board:

• Open the door.
• Remove the espresso brewer, see Section B, page 5B (ES) - 30.
• Open the front cover for the espresso boiler module, see Section A,
page 5A (ES) - 34
Caution:
To avoid damage:
Disassembly Follow these steps to remove the circuit board:

Step Action
1 Loosen two screws (1) to remove
suspension bracket with the control
circuit board.
August, 2007 5K - 17
Step Action
3 Squeeze the four fastening clips with
an appropriate tool
(2).
K.2.18 Replacing the SPC circuit board
Preparation Before replacing the SPC circuit board:

• Open the door.
• Remove the coin mechanism, see Section G, page 5G-5.
• Remove coin chutes, see Section G, page 5G-6.
• Remove the selection panel, see Section G, page 5G-13.
Caution:
To avoid damage:
5K - 18 August, 2007
Replacement Follow these steps to replace the SPC circuit board:

Step Action
1 Place the selection panel (1)
on a flat surface with the
selection buttons facing
downwards. a
3
2 Loosen and remove earthing
b
screw (2) from the SPC
circuit board.
2
3 Remove 15 plastic push-in 4
rivets (3) (drive pin (a) and
socket (b)) using a flat tool.
Take care not to

damage the
elements on the
SPC circuit board.
Do not reuse the 5
plastic push-in 1
rivets after removal.
4 Remove the PIC micro
controller (4) from the SPC 6
circuit board (5) using a
special tool (6).
Installation Follow these steps to install the SPC circuit board:

Step Action
1 Place the insulating foil (1) on
the mounting plate (2).
4
2 Place the SPC circuit board
(3) on the insulating foil and
attach the SPC circuit board
to the mounting plate using 15 6 5
new plast push-in rivets (4).
3 Reinsert and fasten the
earthing screw (5) to the SPC
circuit board.
1
2
3
August, 2007 5K - 19
Step Action
4 Place the PIC micro controller
(6) on the new SPC circuit
board.
Ensure correct
installation of PIC
micro controller,
see
"Installation of PIC
micro controller" 6
below.
5 From front of door reconnect P4

the board connectors as P5 P22
follows:
P4: Power
P5: Wittlink
P22: Display
P23 P24 P25
P24: Power for payment
system MDB/BDV
P25: Coin return
P26: Cup transport P26 P27 P28
P27: Cup magazine

P28: Cup drop
P31: Door light relay
P29 P30
P32: Cup elevator
P33: Cup sensor
P34: Expansion board
Note: Ensure that connectors
for P5 and P24 are not
switched by mistake as this
may cause fatal damage to all
P31
pcbs in machine.
P32
P34 P33
6 Push selection panel (7) with

SPC circuit board back into its
mounting frame.
7 From rear side of door fasten
selection panel (7) with 4 wing
nuts (8).
5K - 20 August, 2007
Step Action
8 Check if the PIC micro processor is communicating with the CVU, see
"Checking communication of PIC micro processor"
9 Switch off main switch and reassemble all remaining parts.
Installation of PIC It is important that the PIC micro controller is placed in the proper
micro controller direction in its socket to ensure its functioning.
The PIC micro controller is provided with a notch at one end. This notch
must point in the same direction as the notch at one end of the socket, see
illustration for correct location
- Illustration of
correct location
of PIC micro
processor
Checking After installation of the new SPC circuit board and the PIC micro
communication of processor the machine should be checked for proper communication as
PIC micro follows:
processor Step Action
1 Switch on the main switch.
2 Wait until the machine is ready for a vend.
3 Look at the indicator LEDs (1)
of the SPC circuit board
August, 2007 5K - 21
Step Action
4
If the centre LED ... Then the PIC micro processor...
is flashing twice at a time has a correct connection.
is flashing once at a time has no connection. Check P5.
is not lit has been inserted incorrectly, the
PIC micro processor is defective,
or no software in PIC.
5K - 22 August, 2007
K.3 Overview - the vending machine controllers

and E-box
Illustration
A B
C D E F G H
K J
Legend
A Fuse 2A 5x20 mm H Fuse 8A
B Plug for supply cord I RS232 plug connector
C Noise capacitor J Main switch
D ES controller circuit board K Fuse 10A 6.3x32 mm
E CPU circuit board L Fuse holders for 10A fuses
F Circuit board for Up-key M Transformer
G VMC circuit board N Relay for heating element
August, 2007 5K - 23
K.4 Electrical diagrams
Survey In this section you find the electrical wiring diagrams for:
• FB machines
• FF machines
• IN machines
• ES machines
5K - 24 August, 2007
Diagrams for FB Sigma machines
August, 2007 5K - 25
5K - 28 August, 2007
Diagrams for FF Sigma machines
August, 2007 5K - 29
Diagrams for FB Delta machines
August, 2007 5K - 33
5K - 36 August, 2007
Diagrams for FF Delta machines
August, 2007 5K - 37
Diagrams for IN machines
August, 2007 5K - 41
Diagrams for ES machines
August, 2007 5K - 47
K.5 Technical specifications

What How
Control system Operating voltage: 24 V
Fuses - power supply units Main power supply unit: Line: 10 A

Neutral: 10 A
Transformer, primary: 2 A
Transformer, secondary (on VMC): 8 A
K.6 Options
Not available here
K.7 Accessories
Not available here
August, 2007 5K - 53
5K - 54 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series External options
L External options
August, 2007 5L - 1
Service Manual 7600 series External options
5L - 2 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Payment systems
P Payment systems
P.1 Adjustments
Unit Setting
BDV All settings related to the BDC coin mechanism are made
via the Menu System, under Payment settings, in techni-
cian mode.
The following setting options exist:
- Single/Multi vend
- Payment type
- Max credit
- Max change
- Obligation to buy
- Coin inhibit
- Low change inhibit
- Audit unit internal/External
- Exact change equation
- Exact change offset
- Keyboard inhibit
- Price mode
- Price to index
- Zero vend mode
- Zero vend index
- Revalue
- Immediate change
- Currency code (auto)
- Currency code (manual)
- Decimal point pos
- Freevend count mode
See chap. 4, page 4-112.
August, 2007 5P - 1
Unit Setting
MDB All settings related to the MDB payment system are made
via the Menu System, under Payment settings, in techni-
cian mode.
The following setting options exist:
- Single/Multi vend
- Payment type
- Max credit
- Max change
- Obligation to buy
- Coin inhibit
- Low change inhib
- Exact change equation
- Exact change offset
- Keyboard inhibit
- Price mode
- Price to index
- Zero vend mode
- Zero vend index
- Revalue
- Immediate change
- Currency code (auto)
- Currency code (manual)
- Decimal point pos
- Freevend count mode
- Delayed Paymentmode
- Cash sale
- Sess. complete
Executive All settings related to the Executive coin mechanism are
made directly on the coin mechanism itself:
Please refer to the coin mechanism manual concerning the

use of these functions.
Coin validator All settings related to the coin validator are made via the
Menu System under Payment settings.
5P - 2 August, 2007
P.2 (Dis-)assemblies
P.2.1 Removing the coin mechanism
Preparation Before disassembling the coin mechanism:

• Open the door.
• Switch of the main switch.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the coin mechanism:

Step Action
1 Swing cover for selection panel open.
2 Disconnect electrical connectors to coin mechanism.

3 Lift and pull the coin mechanism to
detach it from the three retaining screws.
NB! If the coin mechanism is changed into a Mars Cashflow 7000, the
three retaining screws on the mounting plate for coin mechanism must be
replaced by three M4x12 screws and added three spacing discs ø10.0/ø4.5/
4.5 mm to ensure correct distance between the coin mechanism and the
coin insert chute.
August, 2007 5P - 3
For more information concerning the coin mechanism refer to the informa-
tion of the manufacturer.
Never adjust the coin mechanism or disconnect the connecting cable to the
vending machine while the machine is carrying voltage.
P.2.2 Removing the Zip card reader
Preparation Before removing the card reader:

• Open the door.
Removal Follow these steps to remove the card reader:

1 Swing cover for selection panel
open.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector to the card reader.

3 Remove two nuts and pull the card
reader out from front of machine.
5P - 4 August, 2007
For more information concerning the card reader refer to the information
of the manufacturer.
Never adjust the card reader or disconnect the connecting cable to the
P.2.3 Removing the CPU for the ZIP card reader
Preparation Before removing the Card reader:

• Open the door.

open.

3 Remove two nuts and remove the
CPU.
August, 2007 5P - 5
P.2.4 Removing the card reader

(Proton = Chipper/Chipknip)
Preparation Before Removing the Card reader:

• Open the door.

open.

3 Remove six rivets, and remove the
card reader from front of machine.
4 Remove four screws to
disassemble the frame from the
card reader.
5P - 6 August, 2007
Never adjust the card reader or disconnect the connecting cable to the
August, 2007 5P - 7
P.3 Functional descriptions
P.3.1 Function of the BDV or the MDB/ICB coin

mechanism
Standard The BDV coin mechanism operates in accordance with a standard pre-
pared by ‘Bundesverband der Dienstleistungsunternehmen für Verpfle-
gungssysteme e.V.’.
Change amount The coin tubes can be filled manually with change money:
• Insert the coins in the usual way.
• Change the credit amount into a change amount via the menu “Manual
filling”,
Manual repayment It is possible to manually pay out coins from each tube via the menu “Dis-
pense coins”.
Coin rejection If coins have difficulty getting accepted, it is usually due to impurities in
the coin track of the validator in the coin mechanism.
Clean the coin track according to the instructions of the manufacturer of

the coin mechanism.
5P - 8 August, 2007
P.3.2 Function of the Executive coin mechanism
Standard The executive coin mechanism operates in accordance with a standard pre-
pared by ‘Mars Electronics’.
Change amount When the changegiver of the coin mechanism is idle (no vends made or
coins inserted) it is possible to enter coins via the acceptor after having put
the coin mechanism in a special ‘filling mode’.
See manual of manufacturer.
Manual repayment When the changegiver of the coin mechanism is idle (no vends made or
coins inserted) it is possible to manually pay out coins from each change
tube by pressing the relevant key on the coin mechanism.
See manual of manufacturer.
Coin rejection? If coins have difficulty getting accepted, it is usually due to impurities in
the coin track of the validator in the coin mechanism.
Clean the coin track according to the instructions of the manufacturer of

the coin mechanism.
August, 2007 5P - 9
P.4 Electrical diagrams
Not available here
P.5 Technical specifications
Payment System How

BDV Voltage from power supply print board:
between 24V - 36V DC.
MDB/ICP Voltage from power supply print board:
Executive / Price line Voltage from power supply print board:
24V AC (+10% / -15%).
Coin validator Voltage from power supply print board:
P.6 Options
Not available here.
P.7 Accessories
Not available here.
5P - 10 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Preventive maintenance
Table of Contents
Preventive maintenance 6
Preventive maintenance for the Service 6.1
Additional preventive maintenance instructions by the

distributors 6.2
August, 2007 6-1

Service Manual 7600 series Preventive maintenance
6-2 August, 2007

6 Preventive maintenance
6.1 Preventive maintenance for the Service
Item Action Interval (Months) Remarks
1 3 6 12
Water stop valve rinse After approximately 50,000 selections.
Boiler descale Depending on the local hardness of

water.
Fan, air chute remove dust Depending on the ambient conditions

at the location of the machine.
Mixer gasket replace X
Outlet valves descale Depending on the local hardness of

water.
Sigma brewer:
Brewer filter descale X Approximately every 1000 selections

depending on the local hardness of
water and the coffee type (oil).
Brewer filter check / replace X or after every 5000 coffee dispensings.

Note: A filter that is too clogged with
scaling makes brewing slow and diffi-
cult, with the risk of leaking product
along the seal.
Nylon filter for coffe replace After every 25,000 dispensings of cof-
fee, even if apparently still efficient.
Gasket for metal replace After every 50,000 dispensings

brewer filter
Sigma brewer unit clean / lubricate X or after every 150,000 brewings.

/ replace worn
parts
Delta brewer:
Scraper arms lubricate Approximately every 50,000 selections.
Brewer filter clean / descale Approximately every 1000 selections

depending on the local hardness of
water and the coffee type (oil).
Espresso brewer:
Espresso brewer descale X or after every 10,000 dispensings
Upper Piston filter descale / X or after every 2,000 dispensings

replace
Lower piston filter descale / X or after every 6,000 dispensings

replace
August, 2007 6-3

Brushes for replace approximately every 100,000 selec-

grinder motor tions.
6-4 August, 2007

6.2 Additional preventive maintenance

instructions by the distributors
August, 2007 6-5

6-6 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Service procedures
Table of Contents
Service procedures 7
August, 2007 7-1

Service Manual 7600 series Service procedures
7-2 August, 2007

7 Service procedures
August, 2007 7-3

7-4 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Technical information
Table of Contents
Technical information 8
August, 2007 8-1

Service Manual 7600 series Technical information
8-2 August, 2007

8 Technical information
August, 2007 8-3

8-4 August, 2007

Service Manual 7600 series Modification Instructions
Table of contents
Modification Instructions 9
August, 2007 9-1

Service Manual 7600 series Modification Instructions
9-2 ,
August, 2007
9 Modification Instructions
August, 2007 9-1

3 - 20 August, 2007
Table of Contents GSM-Kit
GSM - kit
1 August, 2007
Table of contents
1 GSM assembly into 7600 vending machine .................................................... 3
2 GSM programming .......................................................................................... 6
August, 2007 2
Mounting Instruction - 7600 GSM Kit
1 GSM assembly into 7600 vending machine
Preparation Before installing the GSM kit:

• Disconnect the power supply to the machine
• Open the door
• Remove cover plate for power supply box
• Remove cover for electronic box
• Remove the upper advertising poster frame
• Lift off front cover for selection panel to get easy access to the working
area.
Prerequisites • Have some cleaning medium ready for cleaning the area for the fixing
of the antenna, e.g. degreasing agent.
• If a hole is not present for the antenna cable, drill a hole ensuring a
diameter of at least 14 mm and provide the hole with a cable-duct seal.
• The curvature of the antenna cable must be at least 10 times the cable’s
diameter to prevent it from being damaged beyond repair, due to a too
narrow curvature.
• It is important that the antenna is positioned above the aluminium wing
as high against the top and as close against the side of the poster as
possible to prevent the antenna from being covered by the aluminium
wing. Correct location, see illustration in below table.
Installation of Follow these steps to install the antenna:

Antenna Step Action
1 Clean the area for the fixing
of the antenna.
5.0 mm
2 Fix the antenna onto the
door frame using the
adhesive tape applied onto
the back of the antenna.
From top: 5 mm
From left side: 15 mm
3 Lead the antenna cable
through the large hole just
under the antenna.
Note! When a hole is drilled

from factory, a cable-duct
seal is not necessary.
15.0 mm
August, 2007 3
Mounting Instruction 7600 GSM-Kit
Installation of Follow these steps to install the electrical socket:

electrical socket Step Action
for power supply 1 Clip the socket for power supply plug
plug for modem onto the bracket.
2 Place wires of harness to power supply
box in the terminals of the socket.
3 Fit bracket with socket for power supply
plug using two screws.
4 Remove paint around hole for earth wire
and fix the earth wire with a screw and a
serrated disc.
Important! paint must be removed to

ensure earthing.
5 Fit cover for bracket using two screws.
6 Plug the harness in socket in power

supply box of machine.
4 August, 2007
Mounting Instruction - 7600 GSM Kit
Installation of Follow these steps to install the modem:

modem Step Action
1 Slot the SIM card into the modem.
2 Fit the modem onto the door:

• Fix one of the mounting fittings with
thread-forming screw.
• Slide modem onto mounting fitting.
• Fix modem using the remaining
mounting fitting and thread-forming
screw.
Connection of Follow these steps to connect the individual parts of GSM kit:
individual part Step Action
1 Connect the antenna cable A to the
modem.
2 Plug the power supply plug into its
socket B.
3 Connect wire from power supply plug
with modem C.
D B
C
August, 2007 5
Mounting Instruction 7600 GSM-Kit
Step Action
4 Connect the modem D and the
connector J4 (circle) on the CPU board
using the RS232 cable.
Final installation Follow these steps to finalize the installation:

work Step Action
1 Fasten all cables/harnesses up so that they cannot get into the way when
opening / closing the cabinet door.
2 Relocate all disassembled parts.
3 Switch on machine.
2 Programming
See chap. 4, page 155.
6 August, 2007
Service Manual 7600 series Spare parts list
Table of contents
Spare parts list 10
August, 2007 10 - 1
Service Manual 7600 series Spare parts list
10- 2 ,
August, 2007
10 Spare parts list
For more information, see “Spare parts” on

the N&W Global Vending web-site.
http://www.nwglobalvending.com
August, 2007 10 - 3

0734net PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

0734net PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

0734net PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drink Vending Machine

Service Manual 75514800

© Published by Wittenborg A/S, Odense, Denmark

Installation / Putting into Operation 2

Power Supply Unit and Control K

Spare Parts List 10

© 2007 Wittenborg A/S, Odense, Denmark

August, 2007 1-1

1 Preface and safety instructions

1.1 Preface / how to use this manual

It can be considered and used as a reference manual.

1.1.2 Structure of the manual

Sections Chapters may be divided into sections.

Subsection Each section is divided into subsections

August, 2007 1-3

Service informa- As the vending machine is subject to changes, consecutively numbered

1-4 August, 2007

1.1.3 Definitions of options and accessories

August, 2007 1-5

1.2 Safety instructions

Introduction This subsection is intended as an overview of the instructions and warnings

Danger - Immediate hazard will result in severe personal injury or

Warning - Hazards of unsafe practices which could result in severe

Caution - Hazards of unsafe practices which could result in minor

Installation, start-up, programming and, if required, repair of the machine

1-6 August, 2007

1.2.4 Various safety instructions

August, 2007 1-7

• Rinse the machine before putting it into operation.

Caution • To ensure proper hygiene and operation of the machine, it must be

1-8 August, 2007

August, 2007 2-1

2.1 Transport / Handling

2.1.1 Dimensions and general transport instructions

Dimensions The following table states the dimensions of the machine

General transport Observe the following instructions / cautions:

August, 2007 2-3

2.1.2 Transport and storage conditions

Precautions Before storing or transporting a used machine to a new location

Danger of being scalded by hot water.

5 Ensure that the water system is drained completely when machine is to

2-4 August, 2007

2.2 Installation requirements

2.2.1 Prerequisites to water supply

Special conditions • Observe safety precautions and local regulations.

August, 2007 2-5

2.2.2 Prerequisites to electricity supply

Customer’s site Recommended:

Machine • National plug on power supply cable.

2-6 August, 2007

2.2.3 Physical dimensions of required space

Minimum require- Floor: Even, nonskid floor.

August, 2007 2-7

2.2.4 External options

(To be used for national information - e.g. on external filters).

2-8 August, 2007

2.3.1 How to unpack the machine

Procedure Follow these steps to unpack the machine: